Home

PX2-3000/4000/5000 User Guide - it

Contents

1. 1 PACKAGES Coments rosnie EET EO QT EE fedeiaise 4 ZOKO Ul PrOQUCIS m 4 jussu 4 2 ecie 4 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Rackmount Safety Guidelines issit ct uec aei Een eain kh aee utat n uequ nete a tin En keE ARR NN a DecRu Rad 5 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation essent nnne nnne ntes 5 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets sssssssssssee eene nnns 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount sse 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets ssssssseeeenenes 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons ssssssssseseeeeeenenen nnn 10 Mounting 1U or 2U Models entren ttc reden du akku bu RE ed een EES HEEE E EKKE AaS 11 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 13 Before etse 13 Unpacking the Product and Components sss 13 Preparing the Installation SIt6 iced tesi ertt neither een dna pas ERU re esed 13 zie Raritan Contents Checking the Branch Circuit Ratings riakina idana aniani 14 Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet 0 cceceeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeesneeeeaas 14 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional see 14 Connecting the PDU to a Power SOUEGO intret noe rd tuna tee ente d de e
2. sssssssssssseeenee nennen 299 zd E 300 Command EIStOLy coru wea whee shares pese eg ete claw Seas chet extr antec desi eda sec ree et au seateg euis 301 l SE Raritan Contents History Butter Eengtlisu uidet iue Hnc ee af chee ide he a edges 301 Reliability Dataren aaa an aa ani aa a Ea aa EI 302 Reliability Error LO es sie eguna nda ae nada and anaE aiarad 302 Example Sonerien E EE gain awe ea aea dere 302 Glearinig IPfOFtmallOL sssini d etx uade a da aeaniee saia 304 Gleanng Event OG PRETI eoe N aa N EAE EEE 304 Configuring the PX Device and Network sssessssssesessseseee eene enne nnne nns 305 Entering the Configuration MOQO accettate ttes tk deg a ra nou Ek da una wee 305 PDU Contiguration Commands codec eerta serunt to ede cet enr nda adest atta rape 305 Networking Configuration Commands essent 314 Time Contiguratiori Commands eseese iinditan cedro etii Duet eere ben 339 Security Configuration Commands sse enne 343 Outlet Config ration Gomimarids such eoe tae noceret Exe bae esee a daa Ruta du Ea pages 366 Inlet Configuration COMMANGS 1 erroe tte ete renuncia deae deeds namen 368 Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands sse enne 369 Environmental Sensor Configuration Commands sse 370 Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands sss 374 User Configuration
3. 1 To change the serial port baud rate settings Choose Device Settings gt Serial Port Settings The Serial Port Configuration dialog appears In the Baud Rate field click the drop down arrow and select the desired baud rate from the list If needed configure GSM modem settings a Enterthe SIM PIN b Select Use custom SMS center number if a custom SMS will be used c Enter the SMS center number in the SMS Center field SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface d Click Advanced Information and complete all required information e Enterthe number of the recipient s phone in the Recipients Phone field then click Send SMS Test to send a test SMS message Click OK Specifying the Device Altitude You must specify the PX device s altitude above sea level if a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached This is because the device s altitude is associated with the altitude correction factor See Altitude Correction Factors on page 499 The default altitude measurement unit is meter You can have the measurement unit vary between meter and foot according to user credentials See Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units on page 124 Ae To specify the altitude of the PX device Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Se
4. Variables show sensor inlet n sensor type details e n is the number of the inlet whose sensors you want to query For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type current voltage activePower apparentPower powerFactor activeEnergy unbalancedCurrent Description Current sensor Voltage sensor Active power sensor Apparent power sensor Power factor sensor Active energy sensor Unbalanced load sensor 289 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified inlet sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range e If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information This command is only available for a three phase PDU except for an in line monitor PX2 3000 series This command syntax shows the specified inlet pole sensor s threshold related information show sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n is t
5. Number Item 1 8U MASTER asset sensor with 8 tag ports e 8U SLAVE asset sensor with 8 tag ports e 5U ending SLAVE asset sensor with 5 tag ports 47 48 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Note Unlike regular slave asset sensors which have one DIN connector respectively on either end the ending slave asset sensor has one DIN connector on only one end An ending asset sensor is installed at the end of the asset sensor assembly gt To assemble asset sensors 1 Connect a MASTER asset sensor to an 8U SLAVE asset sensor Plug the white male DIN connector of the slave asset sensor into the white female DIN connector of the master asset sensor Make sure that the U shaped sheet metal adjacent to the male DIN connector is inserted into the rear slot of the master asset sensor Screw up the U shaped sheet metal to reinforce the connection 2 Connect another 8U slave asset sensor to the one being attached to the master asset sensor in the same manner as Step 1 3 Repeat the above step to connect more slave asset sensors The length of the asset sensor assembly can be up to 64U The final asset sensor can be 8U or 5U depending on the actual height of your rack Using the ending asset sensor as the final asset sensor is strongly recommended 4 Vertically attach the asset sensor assembly to the rack next to the IT equipment making each tag port horizontally align with a rack unit The asset
6. ssessssssseeenenmeens 174 Setting Inlet Thresholds iet e iens me n ERR asd xu SN ERR ea lex Anu vex erus duse ug 175 Setting a Circuit Breaker s Thresholds esssssseseeeeeeenenennrerennes 176 Bulk Configuration for Circuit Breaker Thresholds ssssseeseese 177 What is Deassertion Hysteresis sesssssssssssseessseeenee entente en 178 Whatis Assertion TimeOut a i eec tr trn reine pese ete nenne ed x Ha den deflate 179 Event Rules and ACIHOFS eiii dier ena ed Eee e cei e EE Dr uade ar ty d eade 180 Componernis ofan Event RUIS iicet nce ner Ea trn t nna ae cns naa aede 180 Greating Eid 180 Sample Event Rules ee rient dre c ree Fara tv eerte nre Gide 208 ANote about Intinite LOOPiisi iriiria terit nere treni earned i Hace xin urea ea 211 Moditying an Event RUle sisaning etur regere sae EE eter xcu ee a ER nad 213 Modifying Am gi Cero er r 214 Deleting an Event Rule or ACEORD eicere niiina nera ee cen Dan a rua ea 214 A Note about Uritrigaered Rules cider inar tte eri ea cer exon a 215 Managing Event ere e 11e DESEE EE EE E DEED ES 215 Viewing the Local Event Log ori eate ped icit tines Eat Xu uet rd pna cesi x ade n aut 215 Clearing Event ziice M aaiae 216 S Raritan Contents Viewing Connected SOrS reri inii aaa aa aiti DER aan td ad edd ded ddan bla UR add 216 Monitoring Server ACCeSSIDIIILy 2
7. 319 320 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface The system prompts you to enter the contents of the CA certificate Do the following to input the contents a Open your CA certificate with a text editor b Copy the contents between the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE lines in a certificate c Paste the certificate contents into the terminal d Press Enter Tip To remove an existing CA certificate simply press Enter without typing or pasting anything when the system prompts you to input the certificate contents If the certificate is valid the system shows the command prompt config again If not it shows a message indicating that the certificate is not valid Example This section provides a CA certificate example only Your CA certificate contents should be different from the contents displayed in this example gt 1 To provide a CA certificate Make sure you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 305 Type the following command and press Enter config f network wireless eapCACertificate The system prompts you to enter the contents of the CA certificate Open a CA certificate using a text editor You should see certificate contents similar to the following S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface BEGIN CERTIFICATE MIICjTCCAfigAwIBAgIEMaY gRZALBgkghkiG9w0BAQQwRTELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMx NjJ
8. Click Edit or double click the user The Edit User XXX dialog appears where XXX is the user name 4 To change the SNMPv3 access permissions click the SNMPv3 tab and make necessary changes For details see Step 6 of Creating a User Profile on page 120 S Raritan Chapter 7 Using SNMP 5 Click OK to save the changes The user is now set up for encrypted SNMP v3 communication Configuring SNMP Notifications The PX automatically keeps an internal log of events that occur See Event Rules and Actions on page 180 These events can also be used to send SNMP v2c or v3 notifications to a third party destination The PX provides you with the ability to create SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 TRAP communications or SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 INFORM communications SNMP TRAP communications capture and send information via SNMP but no confirmation that the communication between the devices has succeeded is provided to the receiving device SNMP INFORM communications capture and send information via SNMP and an acknowledgment that the communication was received by the receiving device is provided If the inform communication fails it is resent You can define the number of times and the intervals to resend the inform communication or leave the defaults of five 5 resends in three 3 second intervals Note SNMP INFORM communications may take up slightly more network resources than SNMP TRAP communications since there are additional communica
9. Note Only English is supported for SMS messages For Turkish characters use 7 bit ASCII instead Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog 191 192 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Switch LHX If Schroff LHX Support is enabled the LHX related actions will be available See Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support on page 252 Use this action to switch the LHX on or off when for example temperature thresholds are reached gt 1 To create a switch LHX action Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Switch LHX From the Operation drop down select Turn LHX On or Turn LHX Off From the Available LHXs list box click on the LHX to be turned on or off then click L or to add to the Switched LHXs list box Use or to remove the LHX from the Switched LHXs list box thereby removing the action Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog Switch Outlets The Switch outlets action is available only when your PDU is outlet switching capable This action turns on off or power cycles a specific outlet ON ow To
10. Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface The size of each snapshot file the date and time each snapshot was taken and the webcam that took each snapshot is displayed when viewing snapshots Details such as the webcam location and or labels if any are displayed in the Details section below the snapshot in the right pane This information is defined when the webcam is initially configured See Configuring Webcams on page 242 gt To delete any snapshot from the storage e Delete snapshots by selecting the checkbox next to the snapshot you want to delete then clicking the Delete icon Q atthe top of the section To select and delete all snapshots at once click the checkbox in the checkbox column header then click the Delete icon gt To change the sorting or displayed columns of the list e You can resort the snapshot list or hide any displayed column in the Storage section For details see Changing the View of a List on page 90 Configuring Webcam Storage By default when a snapshot is taken using the Store Snapshot to Webcam Storage feature it is stored locally on the PX Up to ten 10 images can be stored on the PX at once To save more than 10 snapshots save the images on a Common Internet File System Samba Note NFS and FTP are not supported for this release and are disabled on the dialog gt To configure another storage location for images 1 In the navigation tree click Snapshot under t
11. TRANSFERSWITCHSENSOR TRANSFERSWITCH UMTARGETROLE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Definition The power inlet label Boolean flag whether an event condition was entered 1 or left 0 An LDAP error occurred The ID of a fan connected to an LHX The ID of an LHX power supply The ID of an LHX sensor probe The RGB LED color The LED indication mode The LED operating mode The name or IP address of a monitored host The overcurrent protector sensor name The overcurrent protector label The firmware version the device is being upgraded from The outlet power line identifier The outlet sensor name The outlet label The sensor name for a certain power line The label of the external port the event triggering device is connected to The type of the external port for example feature or auxiliary the event triggering device is connected to The unit of a sensor reading The value of a sensor reading The list of recipients an SMTP message was sent to The name or IP address of a server The timestamp of the event occurrence The transfer reason automatic or manual The transfer switch sensor name The transfer switch label The name of a user management role an action was applied on 207 208 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Placeholder UMTARGETUSER USERIP USERNAME VERSION WIRESENSOR WIRE Definition The user an action was triggered for The IP addres
12. Raritan th Mi LUN Copyright O 2013 Raritan Inc DPX2 0H v2 4 E February 2013 255 80 6101 00 Safety Guidelines WARNING Read and understand all sections in this guide before installing or operating this product WARNING Connect this product to an AC power source whose voltage is within the range specified on the product s nameplate Operating this product outside the nameplate voltage range may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Connect this product to an AC power source that is current limited by a suitably rated fuse or circuit breaker in accordance with national and local electrical codes Operating this product without proper current limiting may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Connect this product to a protective earth ground Never use a ground lift adaptor between the product s plug and the wall receptacle Failure to connect to a protective earth ground may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING This product contains no user serviceable parts Do not open alter or disassemble this product All servicing must be performed by qualified personnel Disconnect power before servicing this product Failure to comply with this warning may result in electric shock personal injury and death WARNING Use this product in a dry location Failure to use this product in a dry location may result in electric shock personal inju
13. asserted below lower critical Outlet JOUTLET has been powered on by user TUSERNAME from host USERIPJ Outlet JOUTLET has been powered off by user USERNAME from host USERIPJ Outlet OUTLET power cycle initiated by user USERNAME from host USERIPT Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet lOUTLET unavailable Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet lOUTLET asserted above upper critical Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet lOUTLET asserted above upper warning Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet lOUTLET asserted below lower warning Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet lOUTLET asserted below lower critical Outlet OUTLET state changed to on Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet OUTLET unavailable Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet OUTLET asserted above upper critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLET of outlet OUTLET when the Event FALSE deasserted above upper warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLE of inlet INLET deasserted below lower warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLE J of inlet INLET deasserted below lower critical Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet OUTLET available Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet OUTLET deasserted above upper critical Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet OUTLET deasserted above upper warning Sensor OUTLETSENSO
14. config user modify May forcePasswordChangeOnNextLogin true Raritan Modifying the SNMPv3 Settings There are different commands to modify the SNMPv3 parameters of a specific user profile You can combine all of the following commands to modify the SNMPv3 parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 gt To enable or disable the SNMP v3 access to PX for the specified user config user modify name snmpV3Access optionl Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the SNMP v3 access permission for the specified user disable Disables the SNMP v3 access permission for the specified user gt To determine the security level config user modify lt name gt securityLevel lt option2 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option2 gt is one of the options noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv or authPriv Option Description noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy authNoPriv Authentication and no privacy authPriv Authentication and privacy 409 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface gt To determine whether the authentication passphrase is identical to the password config user modify lt name gt userPasswordAsAuthenticationPassphrase lt option3 gt Variables e lt name gt is the na
15. gt To cycle the power of an outlet 1 Click Cycle The Power Cycle Port dialog opens The page at https 192 168 59 173 says x Power Cycle Port testport 5 Do you want to continue 2 Click OK The outlet will then cycle note that this may take a few seconds The page at https 192 168 59 173 says AN Power Cycle was successfully performed on Port testport 5 3 Once the cycling is complete the dialog will open Click OK to close the dialog Dominion SX By connecting to a Dominion SX device you can associate one or more outlets on a PX device to specific Dominion SX ports 489 Appendix E Integration Configuring a PX on Dominion SX 1 Choose Setup gt Power Strip Configuration 2 Click Add The Power Strip Configuration screen appears Hame Doo Description Humber of Outlets 8 b Type a name and description in the Name and Description fields Select the number of outlets from the Number of Outlets drop down menu Type the port number in the Port field Click OK id Raritan Appendix E Integration Power Control 1 Choose Power Control gt Power Strip Power Control The Outlet Control screen appears Outlet State D Outlet 1 OFF 7 Outlet 2 Orr o E Outlet 3 FF a Outlet 5 OFF oO Outlet 6 OFF oO Outlet 7 ON o Outiet 6 OFF B Outiet 9 OFF D Outlet 10 FF oO Outiet 11 Orr Setan go Outlet 12 OFF E Outlet 13
16. lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables lt n gt is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Warning threshold for the pole 2 L2 L3 voltage of the inlet 1 to 180V It also enables the upper warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inletpole 1 L2 voltage upperWarning 1
17. password After performing this command the PX prompts you to enter both current and new passwords respectively Important After the password is changed successfully the new password is effective immediately no matter you type the command apply or not to save the changes Example This procedure changes your own password 1 Verify that you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 305 2 Type the following command and press Enter config password 3 Type the existing password and press Enter when the following prompt appears Current password 4 Type the new password and press Enter when the following prompt appears Enter new password 5 Re type the new password for confirmation and press Enter when the following prompt appears Re type new password zie Raritan Ms 416 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting Default Measurement Units Default measurement units including temperature length and pressure units apply to the PX user interfaces across all users except for those who have changed their own preferred measurement units or those whose preferred measurement units are set differently by the administrator Different measurement unit commands can be combined so that you can set all default measurement units at a time To combine all commands see Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Note The measurement unit change only applies to the we
18. see Modifying the Network Settings on page 101 gt To enable service advertisement 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services to select the Service Advertisement checkbox 2 Click Yes on the confirmation message to switch to zero configuration advertising The feature is enabled and the Service Advertisement checkbox is selected in the submenu gt To disable service advertisement 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services to deselect the Service Advertisement checkbox 109 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 110 2 Click Yes on the confirmation message to switch off the zero configuration advertising The feature is disabled and the Service Advertisement checkbox is deselected in the submenu Setting the Date and Time Set the internal clock on the PX device manually or link to a Network Time Protocol NTP server and let it set the date and time for the PX 1 To set the date and time Choose Device Settings gt Date Time The Configure Date Time Settings dialog appears In the Time Zone field click the drop down arrow and select your time zone from the list If the daylight saving time applies to your time zone verify the Automatic Daylight Saving Time Adjustment checkbox is selected If the daylight saving time rules are not available for the selected time zone the checkbox is not configurable Choose one of the methods to set the date and time To customize the date and t
19. the location of the system Select the MIB to be downloaded The SNMP MIB for your PX is used by the SNMP manager Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your PX to use with 12 your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Downloading SNMP MIB on page 270 Click OK to save the changes To configure SNMP notification destinations Choose Device Settings Network Services SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears Click the Notifications tab Select the Enabled checkbox Select an SNMP notification type SNMP v2c Trap SNMP v2c Inform SNMP v3 Trap and SNMP v3 Inform Specify the SNMP notification destinations by doing the following d Specify the SNMP notification destinations in the Host field s e Specify a port number for the destination in the Port field s f Enter necessary information in other fields such as the community string for SNMP Trap or authentication pass phrase for SNMP Inform See Configuring SNMP Notifications on page 265 for details Click OK to save the changes The SNMP notification destinations can be also set in the Event Rule Tip Settings dialog See Modifying an Action on page 214 Cha You nging the Modbus TCP Settings can enable or disable the Modbus TCP access to the PX or the read only mode or change the default TCP port for the Modbus service 1 To change the Modbus ser
20. variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF Note A rack unit s LED color setting overrides the global LED color setting on it See Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags on page 429 and Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags on page 429 Example The following command sets the LED color of the rack unit whose index number is 25 on the asset sensor 1 to PINK that is FFOOFF config rackUnit 1 25 LEDColor FFOOFF S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit This command syntax sets the LED mode for a specific rack unit on the specified asset sensor You need to set a rack unit s LED mode only when the LED operation mode of this rack unit has been set to manual config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDMode lt mode gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e rack unit is the index number of the desired rack unit The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface e mode is one of the LED modes on off blinkSlow or blinkFast Mode Description on This mode has the LED stay lit permanently off This mode has the LED stay off permanently blinkSlow This mode has the LED blink slowly blinkFast This mode has the LED blink quickly Example The following command c
21. x Qinin 459 Appendix A Specifications In This Chapter Power Measurement Accuracy cccceeeecceteeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeteeeeneeees 460 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature sssessssss 460 Serial RS 232 Port PInOULES iieri nd rire pa pd rans rri ran Ya deal reae rad 461 Sensor HJ 12 Port PINGUS iioii tiie ned ore tese iai ca LE ror a ed 461 Feature RJ 45 Port Pinouts i csicscdans cecidi ario a ext sea Fade oaa ka debant rad 461 Power Measurement Accuracy The following measurement accuracy applies to all Raritan PDUs whose model names begin with PX2 or PXE Power Measurement measurement accuracy range accuracy 196 RMS voltage V 1 0 1A 0 1A to rated current RMS current A 1 20W to rated power Active power Watts 1 20VA to rated power Apparent power VA 1 Active energy Watts hour Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature Raritan The maximum ambient operating temperature TMA for PX varies from 50 to 60 degrees Celsius depending on the model and certification standard CE or UL If necessary contact Raritan Technical Support for this information for your model Specification Measure Max Ambient Temperature 50 to 60 degrees Celsius 460 Serial RS 232 Port Pinouts RS 232 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction 1 DCD Input 2 RxD Input 3 TxD Output 4 DTR Output 5 GND 6 DSR Input 7 RTS Output 8 CTS Input 9 RI Input Senso
22. 0 samples Variables e n is the environmental sensor number The environmental sensor number is the ID number assigned to the sensor which can be found on the External Sensors page of the PX web interface Displayed information zie Raritan di Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface e Without the parameter details only the reading threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout settings of the specified environmental sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range Note For a discrete on off sensor the threshold related and accuracy related data is NOT available Security Settings This command shows the security settings of the PX show security To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show security details Displayed information e Without the parameter details the information including IP access control role based access control password policy and HTTPS encryption is displayed e With the parameter details more security information is displayed such as user blocking time and user idle timeout id SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Existing User Profiles This command shows the data of one or all existing user profiles show user lt user_name gt To show detailed information add the parameter de
23. 167 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 3 5 To mark an outlet as non critical select it from the Critical outlets list box and click to move it to the Non critical outlets list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To move all outlets in the Critical outlets list box to the Non critical outlets list box at a time click To mark an outlet as critical select it from the Non critical outlets list box and click to move it to the Critical outlets list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To move all outlets in the Non critical outlets list box to the Critical outlets list box at a time click Click OK to save the changes Marking an Outlet This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs You can also choose to mark a specific outlet as a critical or non critical outlet in its setup dialog gt 1 168 To mark an outlet If the Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page
24. 16A The derated ampacity must be marked on the Raritan product so the new reduced rating can be easily identified For in line monitors the receptacles used must have the same voltage and ampacity rating as the plug chosen in step 1 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 9 In Line Monitors 4 The flexible cord must have a rated ampacity greater than or equal to the derated ampacity Since the new flexible cord may be smaller diameter a check must be performed to insure the cable gland nut when tightened will securely hold the flexible cord so that it cannot be twisted pulled or pushed in the cable gland A sealing ring for small diameter flexible cords may have been included with the Raritan product or one can be requested from Raritan to reduce the inside diameter of the cable gland Wiring of 3 Phase In Line Monitors 3 phase in line monitors contain 4 pole wiring terminal blocks L1 L2 L3 N to monitor 5 wire 4P PE 3 phase wye connections Delta wired 4 wire 8P PE 3 phase connections are also permitted no wire connected to the terminal block neutral N No additional hardware or firmware configuration is required to specify whether the connection is 5 wire wye or 4 wire delta In Line Monitor Unused Channels It is not necessary to wire up all channels of multi channel in line monitors The inlet and outlet openings of unused channels must be completely closed off Goof plugs for this purpose may
25. 4 Forboth SNMP TRAPS and INFORMS enter the following as needed and then click OK to apply the settings a b C d 188 Host name Port number User ID needed to access the host Select the host security level S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Security level Description noAuthNoPriv Select this if no authorization or privacy protocols are needed e Click OK authNoPriv Select this if authorization is required but no privacy protocols are required e Select the authentication protocol MD5 or SHA e Enter the authentication passphrase and then confirm the authentication passphrase e Click OK authPriv Select this if authentication and privacy protocols are required e Select the authentication protocol MD5 or SHA e Enter the authentication passphrase and confirm the authentication passphrase e Select the Privacy Protocol DES or AES e Enter the privacy passphrase and then confirm the privacy passphrase e Click OK Syslog Message Use this action to automatically forward event messages to the specified syslog server gt To configure a syslog message action 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 5 Inthe Action field
26. Connecting External Equipment 33 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional 47 64 113 232 Connecting the PDU to a Power Source 15 Connecting the PX to a Computer 17 467 468 Connecting the PX to Your Network 20 99 100 Connection Ports 63 Contact Closure Sensor LEDs xvi 43 Contact Closure Sensors 35 Copying a PX Configuration 240 Correctly Displaying the LHX Device 252 Creating a Certificate Signing Request 143 Creating a Role 122 125 417 Creating a Self Signed Certificate 145 S Raritan Creating a User Profile 78 106 120 123 124 125 126 264 404 Creating Actions xvi 59 181 213 242 Creating an Event Rule 180 Creating Firewall Rules 129 130 Creating Role Based Access Control Rules 138 139 Creating Rules 194 D Dashboard Page 458 Data for BTU Calculation 499 Data Pane 88 Date and Time Settings 284 dcTrack xvii 492 dcTrack Overview 493 Default Log Messages 137 186 198 Default Measurement Units 285 Deleting a Firewall Rule 349 Deleting a Role 127 422 Deleting a Role Based Access Control Rule 366 Deleting a User Profile 124 414 Deleting an Event Rule or Action 214 Deleting Firewall Rules 133 Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings 220 Deleting Role Based Access Control Rules 142 Deleting the Authentication Server Settings 154 Derating a Raritan Product 450 Describing the Sensor
27. Connecting the PX to Your Network on page 20 Type the name of the wireless access point AP in the SSID field If the BSSID is available select the Force AP BSSID checkbox and type the MAC address in the BSSID field Note BSSID refers to the MAC address of an access point in the wireless network 7 Inthe Authentication field click the drop down arrow and select an appropriate option from the list Option Description No Authentication Select this option when no authentication data is required PSK A Pre Shared Key is required for this option Inthe Pre Shared Key field type the PSK string m Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Option Description EAP PEAP PEAP stands for Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol The following authentication data is required Inner Authentication Only Microsoft s Challenge Authentication Protocol Version 2 MSCHAPv 2 is supported allowing authentication to databases that support MSCHAPv2 Identity Type your user name for EAP authentication Password Type your password for EAP authentication CA Certificate A third party CA certificate must be provided for EAP authentication Click Browse to select a valid certificate file To view the contents of the selected certificate file click Show If the selected certificate file is invalid click Remove Then select a new file 8 Click OK to save the changes Modifying th
28. Manage Roles New Close Note Not all dialogs support the sorting or column change functions SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the Column You can hide some columns of a list or table or adjust a specific column s width 1 To change displayed columns Hover your mouse pointer over any column header A black triangle appears to the far right of this column header Click the black triangle and a drop down menu appears Point to Columns A submenu showing all columns appears Click any column you want to deselect or select To hide a column have its checkbox deselected To show a column have its checkbox selected gt To change the column width 1 Hover the mouse pointer to the right border of the desired column 2 When the mouse pointer turns to a two way arrow drag the border horizontally to widen or shrink the column Changing the Sorting By default a list or table is sorted against the first column in the ascending order You can re sort the list in a reverse order or against a different column To re sort the list by doing either of the following Click the column header against which you want to sort the list a The first click sorts the list in the ascending order indicated by a blue upward pointing triangle b The second click reverses the sorting to the descending order indicated by a blue downward pointing triangle 7 Select
29. Monday Friday 9 00 a m 6 p m local time Phone 61 3 9866 6887 gt Taiwan Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m GMT 5 Standard 4 Daylight Phone 886 2 8919 1333 Email support apac raritan com
30. Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command disables the Lower Warning threshold for the outlet 5 RMS current config f sensor outlet 5 current lowerWarning disable uds Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified outlet sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis
31. Optional esses 58 Gonnecting a GSM Modem Optlonal 2 12 xtd ente tate SR px Fede carni Extend enu a Regna 59 Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional sse 59 Connecting an RF Code PDU Sensor Tag Optional 60 Chapter 5 Using the PDU 61 Panel Components asked aa ri teet eb aput dec edd Pa odd aab dtu eee ade aee ito ane 61 aeiaee m TEE 61 enis M 61 Connection POLES i aen te tete sedet Rete ta tdem loe cede vsu o atte deu Dua deat datu dd Reda 63 LED DIS Play A EUREN 65 PRESS ti BUHO t M 70 eres T 71 Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker sssssssssseeeneeenees 71 Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker 72 dil c m 73 Fuse Replacement on Zero U Models ssssssssssseeeeenenen nens 73 Fuse Replacement on 1U Models sssssssssseseeeeeeen nennen nnns 74 SE Raritan Contents z ge pM 76 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface TT Supported Web BEOWSOIS irr ntu ota nines eria rae ten nals roca uacua n dde eL REPE R a Baud innt Dodd ieee 77 Logging in to the Web Interface sssessssssssssssseseeeeee ener entrent n nennt entren enn 78 LOGIN PER PRU Nc S
32. Repeat Step 2 for other component groups you want to expand The expanded tree looks similar to this image Bl Dashboard 4 my PX 192 168 57 47 ye Inlet I1 4 El Outlets 1 G2 3 a s 4 A Overcurrent Protectors c c 4 i External Sensors Humidity 1 On Off 1 4 Temperature 1 4 7 Feature Port 3 Asset Strip 1 4 El Webcam Management gj Snapshots fis Webcam T E Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Collapsing the Tree You can collapse the whole tree structure or a specific component group to hide all or partial tree items gt To collapse the whole tree e Click the black gradient arrow 44 prior to the PDU folder icon or double click the folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 The arrow then turns into a white arrow b and all items below the PDU folder disappear gt To hide some tree items 1 Click the black gradient arrow 4 prior to the component group folder that you want to collapse or double click the folder The arrow then turns into a white arrow b and all items below the folder disappear 2 Repeat Step 1 for other component groups you want to collapse Adjusting the Pane You can change the width of the pane to make the area larger or smaller gt To adjust the pane s width 1 Move the mouse pointer to the right border of the Dominion PX Explorer pane 2
33. See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane 3 Select the checkbox of the sensor you want to manage on the External Sensors page To manage multiple sensors select the checkboxes of all desired sensors Note To identify all detected sensors see Identifying Environmental Sensors on page 222 4 Click Manage If you selected only one sensor the Manage sensor serial number sensor type gt dialog appears where serial number is the sensor s serial number and sensor type is the sensor s type Note For a contact closure sensor a channel number is added to the end of the sensor type 5 There are two ways to manage the sensor zie Raritan a Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 224 TA To manage this sensor by letting the PX assign a number to it select Automatically assign a sensor number This method does not release any managed sensors To manage this sensor by assigning the number you want to it select Manually select a sensor number Then click the drop down arrow to select a number If the number you selected was already assigned to a sensor that sensor becomes released after losing this ID number Tip The information in parentheses follow
34. cable B Tag connector Cable connector for connecting the blade extension strip Note A tag connector cable has a unique barcode which is displayed in the PX s web interface for identifying each blade extension strip where it is connected Blade extension strip L9 99 O20 9 9 9 9 9j F E E Item Description D Mylar section with the adhesive tape E Tag ports F Cable socket s for connecting the tag connector cable 51 52 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Note Each tag port on the blade extension strip is labeled a number which is displayed as the slot number in the PX s web interface gt To install a blade extension strip 1 Connect the tag connector cable to the blade extension strip Plug the cable s connector into the socket at either end of the blade extension strip 9 9See 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9j 2 Move the blade extension strip toward the bottom of the blade chassis until its mylar section is fully under the chassis and verify that the blade extension strip does not fall off easily If necessary you may use the adhesive tape in the back of the mylar section to help fix the strip in place 3 Connect one end of an asset tag to a blade server and connect the other end to the blade extension strip a Affix the adhesive part of the asset tag to one side of a blade server through the tag s tape S Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting Exter
35. click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Syslog message 6 Inthe Syslog server field specify the IP address to which the syslog is forwarded 7 Inthe Port field specify an appropriate port number 189 190 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 8 9 Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog Change Load Shedding State The Change load shedding state action is available only when your PDU is able to control outlet power Use this action to activate or deactivate the load shedding mode for responding to a specific event See Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode on page 167 for additional information om lSv To change the load shedding state Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Change load shedding state From the Operation drop down select either of the following Enable load shedding Enters the load shedding mode when the specified event occurs Disable load shedding Quits the load shedding mode when the specified event occurs Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Send SMS Message You can configure
36. field enter the interval of time in seconds after which a new inform communication is resent if the first is not received For example resend a new inform communication once every 3 seconds b Inthe Number of Retries field enter the number of times you want to resend the inform communication if it fails For example inform communications are resent up to 5 times when the initial communication fails 9 Forboth SNMP TRAPS and INFORMS enter the following as needed and then click OK to apply the settings a Hostname b Port number C User ID needed to access the host d Select the host security level ud SE Raritan Security level noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv authPriv SNMP Gets and Sets zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using SNMP Description Select this if no authorization or privacy protocols are needed e Click OK Select this if authorization is required but no privacy protocols are required e Select the authentication protocol MD5 or SHA e Enter the authentication passphrase and then confirm the authentication passphrase e Click OK Select this if authentication and privacy protocols are required e Select the authentication protocol MD5 or SHA e Enter the authentication passphrase and confirm the authentication passphrase e Select the Privacy Protocol DES or AES e Enter the privacy passphrase and then confirm the privacy passphrase e Click OK In addition to sending traps the
37. oO Outlet 14 o Outlet 15 OFF oO Outlet 16 OFF oO Outlet 17 OFF Fi Outiet 18 OFF m Outlet 19 OFF oO Outiet 20 ON Ezra m 2 Check the box of outlet number you wish to control and click On Off buttons to power on off the selected outlet s 3 Aconfirmation message appears indicating successful operation Outlet 19 The power operation has been sent The system shall reflect successful operations shortly zie Raritan il Appendix E Integration Checking Power Strip Status 1 Choose Power Control gt Power Strip Status DPX Status Power strip Outlet Breaker Status 1 True RMS Current 0 0 Maxium Detected Current 0 4 True RMS Voltage 113 0 Internal Temperature 45 0 Average Power 0 Apparent Power 0 Outlets 20 9 ce OoORGGINS Outlet 1 Outlet 2 Outlet 3 Outlet 4 Outlet 5 Outlet 6 Outlet 7 Outlet 8 Outlet 3 Off Off Off On Off Off On Off Off 10 Outlet 10 Off 11 Outlet 11 Off 12 Outlet 12 Off 13 Outlet 13 Off 14 Outlet 14 Off 15 Outlet 15 Off 16 Outlet 16 Off 2 Astatus box appears displaying details of the controlled PX including power state of each outlet on the device dcTrack dcTrack is a Raritan product that allows you to manage the data center You can use dcTrack to 492 Record and manage the data center infrastructure and assets Monitor the electrical consumption of the data ce
38. user interfaces 1 Choose User Management User Preferences The Setup User Preferences dialog opens 2 Update any of the following as needed Inthe Temperature Unit field select C Celsius or F Fahrenheit as the measurement unit for temperatures um SE Raritan Setting Up Roles zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface In the Length Unit field select Meter or Feet as the measurement unit for length or height Inthe Pressure Unit field select Pascal or psi as the measurement unit for pressure Click OK to save the changes A role defines the operations and functions a user is permitted to perform Or access Every user must be assigned at least a role The PX is shipped with two built in roles Admin and Operator The Admin role provides full permissions You can neither modify nor delete this role The Operator role provides limited permissions for frequently used functions You can modify or delete this role By default the Operator role contains these permissions View Event Settings View Local Event Log Change Event Settings Change Pdu Inlet Outlet amp Overcurrent Protector Configuration Change Own Password Switch Outlet all outlets Note PX2 3nnn and PX2 4nnn series where n is a number are NOT outlet switching capable so the Switch Outlet permission is not available The Operator role is assigned to a newly created user profile by default See C
39. which allows you to track the locations of the IT devices on the rack See Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional on page 47 Warning This is not an RS 232 port so do NOT plug in an RS 232 device or damages can be caused to the device Establishing a serial connection between a computer and the PX device This is a standard DTE RS 232 port You can use a null modem cable with two DB9 connectors on both ends to connect the PX device to the computer Connection to Raritan s environmental sensors For Zero U products a sensor hub is required if you want to connect more than one environmental sensor Connecting the PX device to your company s network Connect a standard Cat5e 6 UTP cable to this port and connect the other end to your network This connection is necessary to administer or access the PX device remotely using the web interface There are two small LEDs adjacent to the port Green indicates a physical link and activity Yellow indicates communications at 10 100 BaseT speeds For a USB cascading configuration the wired network connection is a must for the master PX See Cascading the PX via USB on page 29 for details Note Connection to this port is not required if the PX device is connected to a wireless network SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU LED Display The LED display is located on the side where outlets are available These diagrams show the LED display on different typ
40. 153 Special Character Requirement 358 Specifications 5 460 Specifying Non Critical Outlets 296 310 S Raritan Specifying the Agreement Content 351 Specifying the Asset Sensor Orientation 428 Specifying the Device Altitude 115 312 Specifying the EnergyWise Domain 424 Specifying the EnergyWise Secret 424 Specifying the Number of Rack Units 426 Specifying the Primary NTP Server 340 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Mode 427 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Offset 428 Specifying the Secondary NTP Server 341 Specifying the Sensor Type 371 States of Managed Sensors 229 Status Bar 86 Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups 470 Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server 471 Step by Step Flexible Cord Installation 451 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the PX Device 472 Step D Configure User Groups on the PX Device 474 Strong Passwords 355 Supported Web Browsers xvi 77 Supported Wireless LAN Configuration xvi 21 Switch LHX 182 192 Switch Outlets 182 192 Switching an Outlet 159 Switching Multiple or All Outlets 158 Syslog Message 182 189 T Testing the Network Connectivity 445 Testing the Server Connection 153 The PX MIB 270 The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading 89 93 94 156 157 171 172 228 255 Three Digit Row 66 Time Configuration Commands 339 Tracing the Network Route 248 Tracing the R
41. 1640 1 01 740 2428 1 04 1500 4921 1 15 2250 7382 1 26 3000 9842 1 38 Data for BTU Calculation The heat generated by the PX device differs according to the model you purchased To calculate the heat BTU hr use the following power data according to your model type in the BTU calculation formula Model name Maximum power Watt PX2 1nnn series 5 PX2 2nnn series 20 PX2 3nnn series 24 PX2 4nnn series 24 PX2 5nnn series 24 The letter n included in the model names represents a number zie Raritan Appendix F Additional PX Information Raritan Training Website Raritan offers free training materials for various Raritan products on the Raritan training website http www raritantraining com The Raritan products introduced on this website include the intelligent PDU dcTrack Power IQ KVM and CommandCenter Secure Gateway CC SG Raritan would update the training materials irregularly according to the latest development of Raritan products To get access to these training materials or courses you need to apply for a username and password through the Raritan training website After you are verified you can access the Raritan training website anytime Having access to the training website could be helpful for learning or getting some ideas regarding Raritan products and making correct decisions on purchasing them For example you can take the dcTrack video training before implementing or using it CLI Command Applicab
42. 2 11 rarreti rato Le tare aed cer dDa ad ope ne RE aai a LEA Fe guns e Dae e ru 217 Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring sseeseseessseseseeenee enne 217 Editing Ping Monitoring Settifig oce ederet roule tni ra cri cora pa edet aue nua deeds 220 Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings censeret kanienn aniani 220 Checking Server Monitoring States eese tne nnne tnrba aen ka tad nh bed usb ia 221 Environmental SensOfs 1 estere tete apre hacen deett penu de ke nd ha du ERR undc Ext a RE ene dea 221 Identifying Environmental Sensors eoi rtante ttr te rta cud eth eie races 222 Managing Environmental Sensors sessi nnne enne 223 Configuring Environmental Sensors cei dx ene nte di eaa nde etae dr ee duet 224 M IDeEsI egi 228 Unmanaging Environmental Sensors sees 232 Asset Mahagetmiellb s t eerte tactus an Ex a A eate eMe ptu aaaea dett acu ee Pese dde 232 Configuring thie ASSeL Sensor ee ei eee ttr nde tetas abe aaa aiaia 233 Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors sssssssssssseseserenennen nennen nnns 234 Configuring a Specific Rack Unit ener entente nnn nnns 235 Expanding a Blade Extension Strip ssssssssseeeeeeeens 236 Displaying the Asset Sensor Information sssssssseene 237 B k Conng rato Meise ae EA a LOT EE 238 Saving PX Conflgutatlor 5 sese odi hac
43. 457 Listing TCP Connections 249 Load Shedding Configuration Commands 437 Load Shedding Settings 296 Locking Outlets and Cords 32 496 Log an Event Message 181 184 Logging in to CLI 274 Logging in to the Web Interface 78 Logging out of CLI 447 Login 78 Login Limitation 352 Logout 80 Logout Button 88 Lowercase Character Requirement 357 M MAC Address 16 496 Managing Environmental Sensors 221 223 Managing Event Logging 215 Managing Firewall Rules 345 Managing Role Based Access Control Rules 361 Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger xvi 59 113 251 Managing the Snapshots Saved to PX 246 Manual Mode 69 71 456 Marking All Outlets 167 Marking an Outlet 168 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature 14 460 Maximum Password History 359 Maximum Password Length 357 Raritan Index Menus 82 Minimum Password Length 356 Modifying a Firewall Rule 347 Modifying a Role 122 123 126 420 Modifying a Role Based Access Control Rule 363 Modifying a User Profile e 80 123 126 405 Modifying a User s Personal Data 407 Modifying an Action 108 214 Modifying an Event Rule 213 Modifying the Firewall Control Parameters 344 Modifying the IPv4 Settings 102 Modifying the IPv6 Settings 103 Modifying the Network Configuration 98 Modifying the Network Interface Settings 99 Modifying the Network Service Settings 10
44. 73 Fuse Replacement on 1U Models 74 Fuse Replacement on Zero U Models 73 G Gathering the External Authentication Information 148 Gathering the LDAP Information 148 Gathering the RADIUS Information 149 H Help Command 277 History Buffer Length 301 How to Use the Calendar 111 HTTPS Access 352 Identifying Environmental Sensors 221 222 223 Identifying the Cascaded Devices xvi 30 94 95 Idle Timeout 354 Initial Network Configuration 22 78 86 99 100 467 468 469 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management 170 Inlet Configuration Commands 368 Inlet Information 283 Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information 290 Inlet Sensor Threshold Information 289 In Line Monitor Unused Channels 451 In Line Monitors 448 In Line Monitor s LED Display 456 In Line Monitor s Web Interface 457 Installation and Configuration 13 Installing a CA Signed Certificate 144 SE Raritan Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional 31 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional 14 Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files 146 Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional xvi 18 270 Integration 478 Introduction 1 Introduction to the Web Interface 81 IP Configuration 279 L LAN Interface Settings 280 Layout 271 LDAP Configuration Illustration 151 470 LED Display 65 456 LEDs for Measurement Units 67 69
45. 78 Ghanging Your PaSsWOEQ eroi ace ten cent tiae tet eee rende Ea ade det heed scent aisian ead dox ibinida 80 Logout P EE 80 Introduction to the Web Interface ssssssssssssseseseeeeee nennen entere ensis nennen nens 81 MODs rente tat nere tuti LI t ttn 82 Dominion PX Explorer Pane sessssssssssssseseneeen nennen nnne en nennen iiaa tiad ns 82 SCUD BUOM oerte thue eu a tete err Me eL 85 StU SBAT aas ea e aei e eE ere E EI Licorne To eredi 86 Add Page COIN ISERNIA E A TA 87 ore 2191 E s 1 U L9 EN TE E EE E DD D 88 BEIESEDIBM CE 88 More Information sss ccaitects P EE EE 88 Viewing the Dashboard uei tenes tte dicke n Se eS EEE SAEN OERE AAE EEE SEESE 93 Alerted SENSOrS ioina I m 93 Device Managelmert rne on anean ien t a aae e Lx le ER RRKLA ca dE CY e ANEAN ARKEEN 94 Displaying the PIU InfOrfriatiOri icu inerenti aeree geh ten ERR neu uad ennt 94 Naming the PDU ern tnt rne a et nen Sena e HR EBEN EORR ub E EEA 98 Modifying the Network Configuration sess 98 Modifying the Network Service Settings sssssssssssseeeeeeenen nnne 105 Setting the Date and TIIme s iiie e uersu iagecanecacd RU cede sx redu xlix x TERM Radon 110 Setting Up Default Measurement Units esssssseseseeee eene 112 Contig ring the Feature Potties ooi iiiter iR ntes ex rna puo cede Resa d exu ERE 113 Configuring the Serial POTE 5 o e
46. Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Select Outlet 3 from the submenu because that is the outlet in question Select Sensor to refer to sensor events Select Any sub event because we want to specify all events related to all types of outlet sensors and thresholds such as current voltage upper critical threshold upper warning threshold lower critical threshold lower warning threshold and so on 5 Select System SNMP Notification Action to send SNMP notifications to respond to the specified event Then the SNMP notifications are sent when Any numeric sensor reading moves past any threshold into the warning or critical range Any sensor reading or state returns to normal Any sensor becomes unavailable Any discrete sensor changes its state either from normal to alarmed or from alarmed to normal For example when the outlet 3 s voltage crosses into the upper warning range the SNMP notifications are sent and when the voltage drops below the upper warning threshold the SNMP notifications are sent again Sample Inlet Level Event Rule In this example we want the PX to send SNMP notifications to the SNMP manager for any sensor change event of the Inlet I1 Note The SNMP notifications may be SNMP v2c or SNMP v3 traps or informs depending on the settings for the System SNMP Notification Action See Configuring SNMP Notifications on page 265 The event rule is set like this e Event Inlet gt
47. Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Load Shedding Configuration Commands zie Raritan This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs A load shedding configuration command begins with loadshedding Unlike other CLI configuration commands the load shedding configuration command is performed in the administrator mode rather than the configuration mode See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 Enabling or Disabling Load Shedding This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines whether the load shedding feature is enabled loadshedding lt option gt After performing the above command PX prompts you to confirm the operation Press y to confirm or n to abort the operation To skip the confirmation step you can add the y parameter to the end of the command so that the operation is executed immediately loadshedding option y Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The load shedding feature is enabled disable The load shedding feature is disabled Example The following command enables the load shedding feature config f loadshedding enable 437 438 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Power Control Operations This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs Outlets on the PX device can be turned on or off or power cycled through the CLI You m
48. For ports with no CIM connected or with a blank CIM name a default port name of Dominion KSX2 Porti is assigned where Port is the number of the KSX Il physical port gt To access a port configuration 1 Choose Device Settings Port Configuration The Port Configuration Page opens This page is initially displayed in port number order but can be sorted on any of the fields by clicking on the column heading Raritan Appendix E Integration Port Number Numbered from 1 to the total number of ports available for the KSX II device Port Name The name assigned to the port Note Do not use apostrophes for the Port CIM Name Port Type DCIM Dominion CIM Not Available No CIM connected MCUTP Master Console MCUTP CIM in a cable PCIM Paragon CIM PowerStrip rack PDU Power strip connected Dual VM Virtual media CIM D2CIM VUSB and D2CIM DVUSB Blade Chassis Blade chassis and the blades associated with that chassis displayed in a hierarchical order KVM Switch Generic KVM Switch connection DVM DP Display Port DVM HDMI HDMI CIM DVM DVI DVI CIM 2 Click the Port Name for the port you want to edit For KVM ports the Port page for KVM and blade chassis ports is opened For rack PDUs the Port page for rack PDUs power strips is opened From this page you can name the rack PDUs and their outlets For serial ports the Port page for serial ports is opened z
49. Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane To enter the load shedding mode select the Load Shedding checkbox To exit from the load shedding mode deselect the Load Shedding checkbox You are then prompted to confirm this operation If you chose to activate the mode in the previous step click Yes to turn off all non critical outlets If you chose to deactivate the mode click Yes to turn on all non critical outlets that were previously ON prior to the load shedding mode 169 170 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Note During the load shedding mode this icon appears on all non critical outlets on the Outlets page and you CANNOT turn on any of them Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management You can name each inlet and circuit breaker or monitor their status Naming the Inlet You can customize the inlet s name for your own purpose The customized name is followed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the inlet number such as l1 gt To name the inlet 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click Inlet
50. Inlet 11 gt Sensor gt Any sub event e Actions System SNMP Notification Action gt Tocreate the above event rule 1 Select Event Inlet to indicate we are specifying an event at the inlet level 2 Select Inlet 11 from the submenu because that is the inlet in question Select Sensor to refer to sensor events Select Any sub event because we want to specify all events related to all types of inlet sensors and thresholds such as current voltage upper critical threshold upper warning threshold lower critical threshold lower warning threshold and so on 209 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 5 Select System SNMP Notification Action to send SNMP notifications to respond to the specified event Then the SNMP notifications are sent when Any numeric sensor reading moves past any threshold into the warning or critical range Any sensor reading or state returns to normal Any sensor becomes unavailable For example when the Inlet I1 s voltage crosses into the upper warning range the SNMP notifications are sent and when the voltage drops below the upper warning threshold the SNMP notifications are sent again Sample Environmental Sensor Level Event Rule This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs In this example we want PX to enable the load shedding function when a contact closure sensor enters the alarmed state This sample event rule requires the creation of a new action
51. Line Interface Enabling or Disabling Strong Passwords This command syntax enables or disables the strong password feature config security strongPasswords enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the strong password feature false Disables the strong password feature Example This command syntax enables the strong password feature config security strongPasswords enabled true Minimum Password Length This command syntax determines the minimum length of the password config security strongPasswords minimumLength lt value gt Variables e value is an integer between 8 and 32 Example This command syntax determines a password must comprise at least 8 characters config f security strongPasswords minimumLength 8 idi SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Maximum Password Length This command syntax determines the maximum length of the password config security strongPasswords maximumLength lt value gt Variables e value is an integer between 16 and 64 Example This command syntax determines that a password must NOT comprise more than 20 characters config security strongPasswords maximumLength 20 Lowercase Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a lowercase character config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneLo
52. MIB ASSETMANAGEMEN T MIB USB Console INF file PX2 5704U PO70154001 360 415V 24A 15 0 17 3kVA 50 60Hz 00 0d 5d 07 00 c5 2 3 0 5 36680 POF1050005 0x21 download download download 2 Click the tab containing the information you want to view The number of available tabs varies according to the model you purchased Tab Data Device Information General PDU information such as model name serial number firmware version hardware revision and so on Network The PDU specific network information such as the current networking mode IPv4 and or IPv6 addresses and so on This tab also indicates whether the PDU is part of an USB cascading configuration See S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Tab Data Identifying the Cascaded Devices on page 95 Outlets Each outlet s receptacle type operating voltage and rated current Inlets Each inlet s plug type rated voltage and current Overcurrent Protectors Each circuit breaker s type rated current and the outlets that it protects Controllers Each inlet or outlet controller s serial number firmware and hardware version Asset Strips Each asset sensor s ID boot version application version and protocol version Note An outlet s operating voltage is derived from the inlet s rated voltage The result of this calculation is rounded off mathematically to the nearest integer in volt For example if the calculatio
53. PDUs are implemented with any of the above locking outlets zie Raritan e Raritan Appendix F Additional PX Information SecureLock Outlets and Cords SecureLock is an innovative mechanism designed by Raritan which securely holds C14 or C20 plugs that are plugged into Raritan PDUs in place This method requires the following two components e Raritan PDU with SecureLock outlets which have a latch slot inside either side of the outlet e SecureLock cords which is a power cord with a locking latch on either side of its plug The following diagram illustrates such a plug Item Description A Latches on the SecureLock cord s plug Only specific PDUs are implemented with the SecureLock mechanism If you PDU does not have this design do NOT use the SecureLock cords with it Tip The SecureLock outlets can accept regular power cords for power distribution but the SecureLock mechanism does not take effect gt To lock a power cord using the SecureLock mechanism 1 Verify that the SecureLock cord you purchased meets your needs The cords female socket matches the power socket type C14 or C20 on your IT equipment The cord s male plug matches the outlet type C13 or C19 on your PDU 2 Connect the SecureLock cord between the IT equipment and your PDU Plug the female socket end of the cord into the power socket of the desired IT equipment Plug the male plug end of the cord int
54. PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 n represents the final number of that component Note A Webcam icon appears only when a supported Logitech webcam is connected to the PX See Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional on page 58 gt To navigate through the tree 1 To expand any folders see Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 To show any tree item s data click on that item See Add Page Icon on page 87 Expanding the Tree The icons representing all components implemented on or connected to the PX device are expanded by default If they are hidden you may expand the tree manually to show all component icons gt To expand the tree 1 By default the PDU folder has been expanded Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 83 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface If it is not expanded click the white arrow b prior to the folder icon or double click the folder The arrow then turns into a black gradient arrow 44 and icons of components or component groups appear below the PDU folder 2 To expand any component group at the second level click the white arrow P prior to the folder icon or double click the folder The arrow then turns into a black gradient arrow 44 and icons representing individual components appear below the group folder
55. PX is able to receive SNMP get and set requests from third party SNMP managers e Get requests are used to retrieve information about the PX such as the system location and the current on a specific outlet e Set requests are used to configure a subset of the information such as the SNMP system name Note The SNMP system name is the PX device name When you change the SNMP system name the device name shown in the web interface is also changed The PX does NOT support configuring IPv6 related parameters using the SNMP set requests Valid objects for these requests are limited to those found in the SNMP MIB II System Group and the custom PX MIB 269 Chapter 7 Using SNMP The PX MIB The SNMP MIB file is required for using your PX device with an SNMP manager An SNMP MIB file describes the SNMP functions Downloading SNMP MIB The SNMP MIB file for the PX can be easily downloaded from the web interface There are two ways to download the SNMP MIB file gt 1 3 To download the file from the SNMP Settings dialog Choose Device Settings Network Services SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears Click Download MIB A submenu of MIB files appear Select the desired MIB file to download PDU2 MIB The SNMP MIB file for PX s power management ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB The SNMP MIB file for asset management Click Save to save the file onto your computer To download the file from the Device Inform
56. Plug the other end of this phone cable to the IN port of the newly added differential air pressure sensor c Repeat Steps a to b to cascade more differential air pressure sensors Note that a SENSOR port supports a maximum of 16 environmental sensors 1 The PX device e The Raritan differential air pressure sensor SE Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional Raritan You can remotely track the locations of up to 64 IT devices in the rack by connecting an asset management sensor asset sensor to the PX after these IT devices are tagged electronically To use this asset management feature you need the following items e Raritan asset sensors An asset sensor transmits the tagging and positioning information to the PX e Raritan asset tags An asset tag electronically tags the IT device where it is attached Combining Asset Sensors Each tag port on the asset sensors corresponds to a rack unit and can be used to locate the IT devices on a specific rack or cabinet For each rack you can attach asset sensors up to 64U long consisting of one MASTER and multiple SLAVE asset sensors The difference between the master and slave asset sensors is that the master asset sensor has an RJ 45 connector while the slave one does not The following diagram illustrates some asset sensors Note that Raritan provides more types of asset sensors than the diagram E
57. SNMP v1 v2c and v3 Yes Yes Yes Telnet Yes Yes Yes SSH Yes Yes Yes SMTP Yes Yes Yes External authentication such as LDAP Yes Yes Yes Asset management Yes Yes Yes Local console via USB See Product Features on page 1 for more details zie Raritan Applicable Models PX2 4nnn PX2 5nnn Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XV zie Raritan What s New in the PX User Guide The following sections have changed or information has been added to the PX User Guide based on enhancements and changes to the equipment and or user documentation Checking the Branch Circuit Rating on page 14 Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional on page 18 USB Wireless LAN Adapters on page 21 Built in Wireless LAN Adapters on page 21 Supported Wireless LAN Configuration on page 21 Cascading the PX via USB on page 29 Connecting Detectors Switches to New DPX CC2 TR on page 38 Contact Closure Sensor LEDs on page 43 Floor Water Sensors on page 43 Using an X Cable on page 56 Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional on page 58 Two Digit Row on page 67 Supported Web Browsers on page 77 Identifying the Cascaded Devices on page 95 Setting Up Default Measurement Units on page 112 Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units on page 124 Enabling and Editing the Security Banner on page 137 Setting Up External Authentication on page 147 Creati
58. See Bulk Configuration on page 238 241 242 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Webcam Management With a Logitech webcam connected to the PX device you can visually monitor the environment around the PX via snapshots or videos captured by the webcam For more information on the Logitech webcam see the user documentation accompanying it For information on connecting a webcam to the PX see Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional on page 58 Snapshots or videos captured by the webcam are displayed in the right pane of PX web interface once a webcam is selected in the navigation tree Snapshots and videos can also be displayed in Live Preview mode in the Primary Standalone Live Preview window by clicking on the Live Preview p icon You must have Change Webcam Configuration permission applied to your role in order to configure webcams and the View Webcam Images and Configuration permission to view images in PX You can manually store snapshots taken from the webcam See Saving Snapshots on page 246 Links to snapshots or videos being captured by a webcam can be sent via email or instant message See Sending Snapshots or Videos in an Email or Instant Message on page 244 Events that trigger emails containing snapshots from a webcam can be created See Creating Actions on page 181 Configuring Webcams Before you can configure a webcam it must be connected to the PX See Connecting a Logitech Webcam Op
59. Storage Once a snapshot is taken using the Store Snapshot to Webcam Storage feature it is stored locally on the PX Up to ten 10 images can be stored on the PX at once Unless snapshots are deleted manually the oldest snapshot is automatically deleted from the device when the number of snapshots exceeds ten Note Rebooting the PX deletes the snapshots taken via webcam To save more than 10 snapshots save the images on a Common Internet File System Samba Note NFS and FTP are not supported for this release and are disabled on the dialog See Configuring Webcam Storage on page 247 for more information on configuration an image storage location Snapshot files are saved as JPG files The snapshot file is named based on the number of the snapshot starting from 1 So the first snapshot that is taken is named 1 jpg the second is 2 jpg and so on zie Raritan x 246 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Saving Snapshots If it is intended to keep the currently displayed webcam snapshot you can manually save it onto the PX A snapshot is saved as a JPEG file and stored on the Snapshots page Warning The stored snapshots are lost when you reset the PX so make sure it is fine to clear up the stored snapshots before performing the reset gt To save the snapshot being displayed 1 Inthe navigation tree click on the webcam you want to take a snapshot with The webcam image is displayed in the right pane The webcam mus
60. The following command determines that the outlet 1 s delay is 2 5 seconds outlet 2 s delay is 3 seconds and the delay for outlets 3 through 5 is 10 seconds config pdu outletSequenceDelay 1 2 5 2 3 3 5 10 zie Raritan il 308 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines the initial power condition of all outlets after powering up the PDU config pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup option Variables e option is one of the options off on or lastKnownState Option Description off Switches OFF all outlets when the PX device powers up on Switches ON all outlets when the PX device powers up lastKnownState Restores all outlets to the previous status before powering down the PX device when the PDU powers up again Example The following command causes all outlets to return to the last power state before powering down the PDU after you power up the PDU again config f pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup lastKnownState S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax sets the power off period of the power cycling operation for all outlets config pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing Variables e timing is the time o
61. The help command syntax under the configuration mode is config gt The help command syntax under the diagnostic mode is diag Press Enter after typing the command and a list of main commands for the current mode is displayed Tip You can check what parameters are available for a specific CLI command by adding the help command to the end of the queried command See Querying Available Parameters for a Command on page 278 zie Raritan i Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Querying Available Parameters for a Command 278 If you are not sure what commands or parameters are available for a particular type of CLI command or its syntax you can have the CLI show them by adding a space and the help command to the end of that command A list of available parameters and their descriptions will be displayed The following shows a few query examples To query available parameters for the show command the syntax is show To query available parameters for the show user command the syntax is show user To query available network configuration parameters the syntax is config network To query available role configuration parameters the syntax is config role To query available parameters for the role create command the syntax is config role create Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Showing Information zie Raritan You can
62. Username factorydefaults Type y on a confirmation message to perform the reset 469 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration This section provides an LDAP example for illustrating the configuration procedure using Microsoft Active Directory AD To configure LDAP authentication four main steps are required a Determine user accounts and groups intended for the PX b Create user groups for the PX on the AD server c Configure LDAP authentication on the PX device d Configure roles on the PX device In This Chapter Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups sssusssss 470 Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server 471 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the PX Device 472 Step D Configure User Groups on the PX Device 474 Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups Determine the user accounts and groups that are authenticated for accessing the PX In this example we will create two user groups with different permissions Each group will consist of two user accounts available on the AD server User groups User accounts members PX User usera pxuser2 PX_Admin userb pxuser Group permissions e The PX_User group will have neither system permissions nor outlet permissions e The PX_Admin group will have full system and outlet permissions zie Raritan is Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration S
63. WARNING This product contains a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or other reproductive harm Safety Instructions 1 Installation of this product should only be performed by a person who has knowledge and experience with electric power Make sure the line cord is disconnected from power before physically mounting or moving the location of this product This product is designed to be used within an electronic equipment rack The metal case of this product is electrically bonded to the line cord ground wire A threaded grounding point on the case may be used as an additional means of protectively grounding this product and the rack Examine the branch circuit receptacle that will supply electric power to this product Make sure the receptacle s power lines neutral and protective earth ground pins are wired correctly and are the correct voltage and phase Make sure the branch circuit receptacle is protected by a suitably rated fuse or circuit breaker If the product is a model that contains receptacles that can be switched on off electric power may still be present at a receptacle even when it is switched off This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without express prior written consent of Raritan Inc Copyright 2013 Raritan Inc All third p
64. When the mouse pointer turns into a two way arrow drag the border horizontally to widen or shrink the pane Setup Button The Setup button is available for most tree items It triggers a setup dialog where you can change settings for the selected tree item zie Raritan i Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Status Bar The status bar shows five pieces of information from left to right e Device name This is the name assigned to the PX device The default is my PX See Naming the PDU on page 98 S9 my PX 192 168 34 48 e IP address The numbers enclosed in parentheses is the IP address assigned to the PX device See Initial Network Configuration on page 22 or Modifying the Network Settings on page 101 my PX 192 168 8448 Tip The presence of the device name and IP address in the status bar indicates the connection to the PX device If the connection is lost it SA shows disconnected instead e Login name This is the user name you used to log in to the web interface amp Administrator admin e Last login time This shows the date and time this login name was used to log in to this PX device last time amp Last Login 3 24 11 9 46 PM When the mouse pointer hovers over the last login time detailed information about the last login is displayed including the access client and IP address For the login via a local connection serial or USB lt local gt is displayed instead
65. Zero U PDU with circuit breakers on ceiling e lfarackis subject to shock in environments such as boats or airplanes the PDU CANNOT be mounted upside down If installed upside down shock stress reduces the trip point by 1096 Note If normally the line cord is down upside down means the line cord is up Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it v m To mount Zero U models using L brackets Align the baseplates on the rear of the PX device Secure the baseplates in place Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex socket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened Align the L brackets with the baseplates so that the five screw holes on the baseplates line up through the L bracket s slots The rackmount side of brackets should face either the left or right side of the PX device Fasten the brackets in place with at least three screws one through each slot Use additional screws as desired S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Using rack screws fasten the PX device to the rack through the L brackets Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using button mount 1 A
66. a list of years and months Select the desired month from the list to the left and click OK 3 To select a date click that date on the calendar Click Today if you want to select today Note On the calendar the date for today is marked with a red frame Setting Up Default Measurement Units Default measurement units are applied to the PX web and CLI interfaces across all users including users accessing the device via external authentication servers Default units apply only when users have not set their own preferred measurement units or the administrator has not changed preferred units for any user Note To set preferred measurement units for your own see Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units on page 124 If your preferences are different from the default measurement units your preferences rather than the defaults apply to your own PX user interfaces gt To set up default user preferences 1 Choose User Management gt Default User Preferences SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Update any of the following as needed Inthe Temperature Unit field select C Celsius or F Fahrenheit as the measurement unit for temperatures In the Length Unit field select Meter or Feet as the measurement unit for length or height In the Pressure Unit field select Pascal or psi as the measurement unit for pressure 3 Click OK to save the changes Configuring the Feature P
67. a serial connection you need a null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan part number 254 01 0006 00 Connect the PX device to a TCP IP network that supports DHCP and use the IP address and web browser to remotely configure the PX The DHCP assigned IP address can be retrieved through the PX device s MAC address You can contact your LAN administrator for assistance See MAC Address on page 496 A Category 5e 6 UTP cable is required for a wired network connection S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Connecting the PX to a Computer To configure the PX using a computer it must be connected to the computer with an RS 232 serial interface These diagrams show the serial port location on different types of PDUs Zero U models If your computer does not have a serial port use a regular USB cable to connect the PX to the computer for initial configuration The PX device can emulate a serial port after the USB to serial driver is properly installed in the Windows operating system Note Not all serial to USB converters work properly with the PX device so this section does not introduce the use of such converters Connect the PX to a computer for initial configuration by following either of the procedures below gt To make a serial connection zie Raritan 17 18 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 1 Connect one end of the null modem cable to the RS 232 port labele
68. a sorting command from the column menu a Hover your mouse pointer over the column header against which you want to sort the list A black triangle appears to the far right of this column header b Click the black triangle and a drop down menu appears c Select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending The newly selected column header is marked with the upward or downward pointing triangle 91 92 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Resizing a Dialog Most dialogs cannot be resized except for a few ones such as the Event Log dialog which can be resized to display more information at a time gt To resize a dialog 1 Hover your mouse pointer over any border of the dialog 2 When the mouse pointer turns to a double headed arrow drag the border vertically or horizontally to make the dialog bigger or smaller Browser Defined Shortcut Menu A shortcut menu which is built in the web browser may appear when right clicking anywhere in the PX web interface The shortcut menu functions are defined by the browser For example the Back command on the Internet Explorer IE shortcut menu works the same as the Back button in the IE browser Both of these functions take you to the previous page For information on each shortcut menu command or item see the online help or documentation accompanying your web browser Below is the illustration of the IE browser s shortcut menu Available menu commands or items may slightly diff
69. activate remote LDAP LDAPS server authentication 3 Click New to add an LDAP LDAPS server for authentication The Create new LDAP Server Configuration dialog appears 4 IP Address Hostname Type the IP address or hostname of your LDAP LDAPS authentication server Important Without the SSL encryption enabled you can type either the domain name or IP address in this field but you must type the fully qualified domain name if the SSL encryption is enabled 5 Type of external LDAP LDAPS server Choose from among the options available OpenLDAP 149 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 150 Microsoft Active Directory Active Directory is an implementation of LDAP LDAPS directory services by Microsoft for use in Windows environments LDAP over SSL Select this checkbox if you would like to use SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a cryptographic protocol that allows the PX to communicate securely with the LDAP LDAPS server Port The default Port is 389 Either use the standard LDAP TCP port or specify another port SSL Port The default is 636 Either use the default port or specify another port This field is enabled when the LDAP over SSL checkbox is selected Use only trusted LDAP Server Certificates Select this checkbox if you would like to use a trusted LDAP server certificate file that is a certificate file signed by the CA When NOT selected you can use all LDAP LDAPS server certificates including a
70. an IPv4 rule s IP address and or subnet mask config security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt ipMask lt ip_mask gt gt The command syntax to modify an IPv4 rule s policy zie Raritan d Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config config config config config 348 security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt policy lt policy gt gt The command syntax to modify all contents of an existing IPv4 rule security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt ipMask lt ip_mask gt policy lt policy gt e Pv6 commands gt The command syntax to modify an IPv6 rule s IP address and or subnet mask security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number ipMask ip mask gt The command syntax to modify an IPv6 rule s policy security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number policy policy gt The command syntax to modify all contents of an IPv6 existing rule security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number ipMask ip mask policy policy Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to modify e lt ip_mask gt is the combination of the IP address and subnet mask values which are separated with a slash For example an IPv4 combination looks like this 192 168 94 222 24 e policy is one of the options accept drop or reject Option Description accept Accep
71. anonymous bind is NOT used e The Base DN of the server used for searching for users e The login name attribute or AuthorizationString e The user entry object class e The user search subfilter or BaseSearch lad SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Gathering the RADIUS Information To configure RADIUS authentication you need to collect the RADIUS information If you are not familiar with the remote RADIUS information consult your RADIUS administrator for help Below is the RADIUS information to gather e The IP address or host name of the RADIUS server e Authentication protocol used by the RADIUS server e Shared secret for a secure communication e UDP authentication port used by the RADIUS server e UDP accounting port used by the RADIUS server Adding Authentication Servers Add all external authentication servers that you want to use to the PX Later you can use the sequence of the server list to control the authentication servers access priority Adding the LDAP Server Settings To activate and use external LDAP LDAPS server authentication enable LDAP authentication and enter the information you have gathered for any LDAP LDAPS server Note An LDAPS server refers to an SSL secured LDAP server gt To add the LDAP LDAPS server settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Select the LDAP radio button to
72. becomes part of the Cisco EnergyWise domain The Cisco EnergyWise feature implemented on the PX is disabled by default gt To set the Cisco EnergyWise configuration 1 Choose Device Settings gt EnergyWise The EnergyWise Configuration dialog appears 2 Inthe Enable EnergyWise field select the enable checkbox to enable the Cisco EnergyWise feature 3 Inthe Domain name field type the name of a Cisco EnergyWise domain where the PX belongs The domain name comprises up to 127 printable ASCII characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable 4 Inthe Domain password field type the authentication password secret for entering the Cisco EnergyWise domain The password comprises up to 127 printable ASCII characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable 5 Inthe Port field type a User Datagram Protocol UDP port number for communication in the Cisco EnergyWise domain The port ranges from 1 to 65535 Default is 43440 6 Inthe Polling interval field type a polling interval to determine how often the PX is queried in the Cisco EnergyWise domain The polling interval ranges from 30 to 600 seconds Default is 180 seconds 7 Click OK to save the changes For PX2 3nnn PX2 4nnn and PX2 5nnn series the parent child relationship is formed after the Cisco EnergyWise feature is enabled 118 The PDU becomes a parent domain member All outlets become children of the PDU SE Raritan User Management zie
73. breaker e Current and voltage of the selected line Note L1 voltage refers to the L1 L2 or L1 N voltage L2 voltage refers to the L2 L3 or L2 N voltage and L3 voltage refers to the L3 L1 or L3 N voltage e The text FuP which indicates that the Firmware uPgrade is being performed e The text CbE which indicates the circuit breaker associated with the selected outlet has tripped SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU LEDs for Measurement Units Five small LED indicators are on the LED display four measurement units LEDs and one Sensor LED The measurement units vary according to the readings that appear in the three digit row They are e Amp A for current e Volt V for voltage e Kilowatt kW for active power e Percentage of the unbalanced load One of the measurement unit LEDs will be lit to indicate the unit for the value currently shown in the three digit row The Sensor LED is lit only when PX detects the physical connection of any environmental sensor The five LEDs look similar to this diagram but may slightly vary according to the model you purchased CURRENT O A VOLTAGE tv POWER Q kW UB LOAD 9 SENSOR O Two Digit Row The two digit row shows the number of the currently selected outlet line or circuit breaker Values that may appear include e Two digit numbers This indicates the selected outlet For example 03 indicates outlet 3 e Ox This i
74. checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Click OK to save the changes What is Deassertion Hysteresis The hysteresis setting determines when a threshold condition is reset This diagram illustrates how hysteresis values relate to thresholds Upper Critical Threshold Hysteresis Upper Critical Reset Hysteresis Upper Warning Threshold Upper Warning Reset Lower Warning Reset Hysteresis Lower Warning Threshold SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Lower Critical Reset Hysteresis Lower Critical Threshold The hysteresis values define a reset threshold For upper thresholds the measurement must fall past this reset threshold before a deassertion event is generated For lower thresholds the measurement must rise above this reset threshold before a deassertion event is generated Example When Hysteresis is Useful This example demonstrates when a deassertion hysteresis is useful The current critical threshold for the inlet is set to 19 amps A The curre
75. colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 There are two ways to access the inlet information gt To get the overview of the inlet status 1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboard page opens in the right pane 2 Locate the Inlet section on the Dashboard page gt To view the inlet s details 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click Inlet 1 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet l1 page opens in the right pane 171 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Monitoring Circuit Breakers Each circuit breaker on the PX device delivers power to a bank of outlets and draws power from one or two lines You can view the circuit breaker s details including its Label number Name Status closed open Its type Lines associated with this circuit breaker Outlets protected by this circuit breaker Sensor readings Current drawn A Current remaining A Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on p
76. command syntax turns off one or multiple outlets power outlets numbers off To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the end of the command which confirms the operation power outlets numbers off y Variables e numbers is one ofthe options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Switches OFF all outlets A specific outlet Switches OFF the specified outlet number A comma Switches OFF multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets outlets For example to specify 7 outlets 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 439 440 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description A range of Switches OFF multiple consecutive outlets outlets with an For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 en dash in 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 between If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation Example The following command turns off the outlet 6 power outlets 6 off Power Cycling the Outlet s This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax power cycles one or multiple outlets power outlets numbers cycle To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the
77. configure the firewall 1 Enable the firewall See Enabling the Firewall on page 129 SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Setthe default policy See Changing the Default Policy on page 129 3 Create firewall rules specifying which addresses to accept and which ones to discard See Creating Firewall Rules on page 130 Changes made to firewall rules take effect immediately Any unauthorized IP activities cease instantly Note The purpose of disabling the firewall by default is to prevent users from accidentally locking themselves out of the device Enabling the Firewall The firewall rules if any take effect only after the firewall is enabled gt To enable the PX firewall 1 Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 To enable the IPv4 firewall click the IPv4 tab and select the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox 3 Toenable the IPv6 firewall click the IPv6 tab and select the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox 4 Click OK to save the changes Changing the Default Policy After enabling the firewall the default policy is to accept traffic from all IP addresses This means only IP addresses discarded by a specific rule will NOT be permitted to access the PX You can change the default policy to Drop or Reject in which case traffic from all IP addresses is discarded except the IP addresses accepte
78. deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the pole 2 L2 current of the inlet 1 to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config f sensor inletpole 1 L2 current hysteresis 0 2 T sis Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet Pole s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an inlet pole config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified inlet pole sensor See What
79. determine how long the login is blocked select the desired length of time from the drop down list in the Block timeout field The following describes available options Infinite This option sets no time limit on blocking the login X min This type of option sets the time limit to X minutes where X is a number X h This type of option sets the time limit to X hours where X is a number 1d This option sets the time limit to 1 day Tip If the desired time option is not listed you can manually type the desired time in this field For example you can type 4 min to set the time to 4 minutes 6 Click OK to save the changes S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Enabling Login Limitations Login limitations determine whether more than one person can use the same login name at the same time and how long users are permitted to stay idle before being forced to log out gt To enable login limitations 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Login Settings The Login Settings dialog appears Locate the Login Limitations section To prevent more than one person from using the same login at the same time select the Prevent concurrent login with same username checkbox 4 To adjust how long users can remain idle before they are forcibly logged out by the PX select a time option in the Idle Timeout Period field The default is 10 minutes X min This type of option sets the
80. device consumes by retrieving the Active Energy for the outlet this IT device is plugged into The Active Energy values are included in the outletSensorMeasurementsTable along with other outlet sensor readings A Note about Enabling Thresholds When enabling previously disabled thresholds via SNMP make sure you set a correct value for all thresholds that are supposed to be enabled prior to actually enabling them Otherwise you may get an error message SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface This section explains how to use the command line interface CLI to administer a PX device In This Chapter About the Interface ord ee a e a 273 Logging in toC El D 274 Help Commandes soiin riesana e a AEE 277 Querying Available Parameters for a Command ssuss 278 Showing IrfOrmatiOlt oe eere ren oett vanced caved e EORR ae paa 279 Clearing InfOFtueatiOn ci sir coder ee n cupa axe egu ste ieu ue REA 304 Configuring the PX Device and Network eene 305 Load Shedding Configuration Commands sss 437 Power Control Operatioris reiten eite ee cte ga 438 Unblocking RUE Rt 441 Resetting the EX iirinn dant desde ie ee ron Md aiai eaaa da iiaa Rd 442 Network Troubleshooting ciini ricette eaten ba seen orent 442 Retrieving Previous Commands sse 446 Automatically Completing a Command sssssseeeee 446 Logging o
81. each mode AMS M2 Z in the chain is 2 meters names begin with PX2 EMX2 111 e Upto 2 AMS M2 Z can be daisy chained e The maximum cable length between each AMS M2 Z in the chain is 2 meters EMX2 888 e Upto 6 AMS M2 Z can be daisy chained The maximum cable length between each AMS M2 Z in the chain is 3 meters 55 56 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Tip To increase the maximum number of AMS M2 Z units to be daisy chained for PX2 PDUs or EMX2 111 you can use Raritan s X cable to strengthen the AMS M2 Z signals in the chain See Using an X Cable on page 56 Using an X Cable For Raritan s PX and EMX2 111 products the number of AMS M2 Z units to be daisy chained is limited to a maximum of two units per chain See AMS M2 Z Daisy Chain Limitations on page 55 To break the daisy chain limitation use Raritan s X cable to connect AMS M2 Z The number of AMS M2 Z units to be daisy chained can be expanded from two up to six units An X cable is a combination of RJ 45 connectors Raritan designed phone connector and sensor port The X cable offers 12V voltage from the SENSOR port of the PX or EMX2 111 to the connected AMS M2 Z units enhancing the AMS M2 Z signals Note An X cable does not help enhance the AMS M2 Z signals for Raritan s EMX2 888 so usually it is not necessary to use this cable with the EMX2 888 gt To connect AMS M2 Z units via an X cable 1 Plug the RJ 45 connector at the shorter end
82. emails to be sent when an event occurs and can customize the message Messages consist of a combination of free text and PX placeholders The placeholders represent information is pulled from the PX and inserted into the message A supported modem such as the Cinterion GSM MC52i modem must be plugged in to the PX in order to send SMS messages Note The PX cannot receive SMS messages For example USERNAME logged into the device on TIMESTAMP translates to JOPublic logged into the device on 2012 January 30 21 00 See Email and SMS Message Placeholders on page 206 for a list and definition of available variables gt To configure SMS message 1 Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 5 Inthe Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Send SMS message 6 In the Recipients Phone Number field specify the phone number of the recipient 7 Selectthe Use Custom Log Message checkbox then create a custom message in the provided field Click the Information icon to open the Event Context Information dialog which contains a list of placeholders and their definitions See Email and SMS Message Placeholders on page 206 for more details
83. enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time s Raritan config sensor Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command disables the Lower Warning threshold of the environmental humidity sensor with the ID number 3 config sensor externalsensor 3 humidity lowerWarning disable Setting the Sensor s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of a numeric environmental sensor Raritan xternalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and lt sensortype gt is the cor
84. enable both the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols or only the IPv6 protocol for your PX device An IP protocol configuration command begins with network ip Enabling IPv4 or IPv6 This command syntax determines which IP protocol is enabled on the PX config f network ip proto protocol Variables e protocol is one of the options v4Only v6Only or both Mode Description v4Only Enables IPv4 only on all interfaces This is the default v6Only Enables IPv6 only on all interfaces both Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 on all interfaces Example The following command determines that both of IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are enabled config f network ip proto both Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 Addresses This command syntax determines which IP address is used when the DNS server returns both of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses You need to configure this setting only after both of IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are enabled on the PX config f network ip dnsResolverPreference resolver Variables e resolver is one of the options preferV4 or preferV6 Option Description preferV4 Use the IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server 315 316 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description preferV6 Use the IPv6 addresses returned by the DNS server Example The following command determines that only IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server are used config network ip dnsResolverPreference preferV4 Setting the Wireless
85. end of the command which confirms the operation power outlets numbers cycle y Variables e numbers is one ofthe options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Power cycles all outlets A specific outlet Power cycles the specified outlet number S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description A comma Power cycles multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets outlets For example to specify 7 outlets 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 A range of Power cycles multiple consecutive outlets outlets with an on dashin For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 between 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation Example The following command power cycles these outlets 2 6 7 8 10 13 14 15 and 16 power outlets 2 6 8 10 13 16 cycle Unblocking a User zie Raritan If any user is blocked from accessing the PX you can unblock them at the local console gt To unblock a user 1 Login to the CLI interface using any terminal program via a local connection See With HyperTerminal on page 274 2 When the Username prompt appears type unblock and press Enter Username unblock 3 When the Userna
86. firewall rules 139 140 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Action Add a rule to the end of the rules list Insert a rule between two existing rules Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab Create specific rules Do this Click Append The Append new Rule dialog appears Type a starting IP address in the Starting IP Address field Type an ending IP address in the Ending IP Address field Select a role from the drop down list in the Role field This rule applies to members of this role only Select Allow or Deny from the drop down list in the Policy field Allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Click OK to save the changes The system automatically numbers the rule Select the rule above which you want to insert a new rule For example to insert a rule between rules 3 and 4 select 4 Click Insert The Insert new Rule dialog appears Type a starting IP address in the Starting IP Address field Type an ending IP address in the Ending IP Address field Select a role from the drop down list in the Role field This rule applies to members of this role only Select Allow or Deny
87. following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold of the outlet 5 RMS current to 18A It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor outlet 5 current upperCritical 18 zie Raritan di Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor acti
88. from the drop down list in the Policy field Allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role S Raritan Action Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Do this Click OK to save the changes The system inserts the rule and automatically renumbers the following rules 5 Click OK to save the changes Editing Role Based Access Control Rules You can modify existing rules when these rules do not meet your needs gt To modify a role based access control rule 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 To modify the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To modify the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab Select the rule to be modified in the rules list Click Edit or double click the rule The Edit Rule dialog appears Make changes to the information shown pee ow Click OK to save the changes Sorting Role Based Access Control Rules Similar to firewall rules the order of role based access control rules determines which one of the rules matching the sa
89. how to use the web interface to administer a PX In This Chapter Supported Web BrowSels ccccceeeseeeseceececeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeneneeee 77 Logging in to the Web Interface 0 0 2 eescceeceeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeaaesteneeeeaes 78 eom T 80 Introduction to the Web Interface sesssessseeeeee 81 Viewing the Dashboard is unu cider erede dpi Ea 93 Device Managelment necne rex ete en ue esce lei ep enda 94 User Management tonser seuneu e ae Rp Pa ep esc YR Eai 119 Setting Up Rol Siiicisccosstivccccieta cee 125 ACCESS Security Contro eto eene oie rn TE a 128 Setting Up an SSL Gertiflcale tete p dienai 142 Setting Up External Authentication sse 147 Outlet Management uiscera sedata area o RD redu Miesanuherdassens 155 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management sse 170 Setting Power Threshold 2 niriuiciec cede tie tarte aba eroe a Res 173 Event Hules and Acton iuis uicit etian ea db u Feb x Ya ba adds 180 Managing Event Logging coitus iecit aicut ikna kae c ba see nnper cena 215 Viewing Connected DS6rs erret eive rir canada 216 Monitoring Server Accessibility eeseeeeneeee 217 Environmental Sensors 2 nei aas tin ede LEE ane Feb EE XE Ta Rd uc ELE E dena 221 Asset Managements esie itid o aet ien es katcba ode Le H xe Cla e ER
90. in an Email or Instant Message 242 244 Sensor Measurement Accuracy xvi 229 Sensor RJ 12 Port Pinouts 461 Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands 374 Serial Port Configuration Commands 433 Serial Port Settings 297 Serial RS 232 Port Pinouts 461 Setting a Circuit Breaker s Thresholds 176 177 Setting an LED Color for a Rack Unit 431 432 Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit 431 433 Setting an Outlet s Cycling Power Off Period 368 Setting an Outlet s Thresholds 173 174 Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors 234 Setting Data Logging 116 311 Setting Default Measurement Units 413 416 Setting Inlet Thresholds 175 Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags 429 431 432 Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags 429 431 432 Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode 167 190 310 Setting Power Thresholds 90 173 271 Setting the Authentication Method 317 Raritan Index Setting the Automatic Daylight Savings Time 342 Setting the BSSID 322 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Assertion Timeout e 398 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Deassertion Hysteresis 398 Setting the Data Logging Measurements Per Entry 311 Setting the Date and Time 110 272 Setting the Default Outlet State 160 Setting the EAP Identity 319 Setting the EAP Parameters 318 Setting the EAP Password 319 Setting the EnergyWise Configuration 118 Setting the History Buffer Leng
91. inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Warning threshold for the pole 3 L3 L1 voltage of the inlet 1 to 190V It also enables the lower warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inletpole 1 L3 voltage lowerWarning 190 Setting the Inlet Pole s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an inlet pole 391 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e p is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified inlet pole sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 for the function of the
92. interface CLI The information in parentheses following CLI indicates how this user was connected to the CLI Serial Represents the local connection serial or USB SSH Represents the SSH connection Telnet Represents the Telnet connection n sis Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Column Description Idle Time The length of time for which a user remains idle The unit min represents minutes 2 To disconnect any user click the corresponding Disconnect button a Adialog appears prompting you to confirm the operation b Click Yes to disconnect the user or No to abort the operation If clicking Yes the connected user is forced to log out 3 You may change the sorting order of the list if necessary See Changing the Sorting on page 91 4 Click Close to quit the dialog Monitoring Server Accessibility zie Raritan You can monitor whether specific IT devices are alive by having the PX device continuously ping them An IT device s successful response to the ping commands indicates that the IT device is still alive and can be remotely accessed Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring You can have the PX monitor the accessibility of any IT equipment such as DB servers remote authentication servers or any power distribution unit PDU The PX supports monitoring a maximum of 8 devices The default ping settings may not be suitable for monitoring devices that require high connection reliability
93. interface using an SSH or Telnet client such as PuTTY Note PuTTY is a free program you can download from the Internet See PuTTY s documentation for details on configuration gt To log in using SSH or Telnet 1 Ensure SSH or Telnet has been enabled See Modifying the Network Service Settings on page 105 in the PX User Guide 2 Launch an SSH or Telnet client and open a console window A login prompt appears login as 3 Type a name and press Enter The name is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters Note If using the SSH client the name must NOT exceed 25 characters Otherwise the login fails Then you are prompted to enter a password login as admin adminBR192 168 84 88 s password 4 Typea password and press Enter The password is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters Raritan i Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 5 After properly entering the password the or gt system prompt appears See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 in the PX User Guide for details Tip The Last Login information including the date and time is also displayed if the same user profile was once used to log in to the PX web interface or CLI 6 You are now logged in to the command line interface and can begin administering the PX device Different CLI Modes and Prompts Depending on the login name you use and the mode you enter the
94. is displayed Follow the procedure suitable for your model In This Chapter Rackmount Safety Guidelines esses 5 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation 5 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets ssssssss 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount sssesss 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons 10 Mounting TU or 2U Models rete veined acticin 11 Rackmount Safety Guidelines In Raritan products which require rack mounting follow these precautions Operation temperature in a closed rack environment may be greater than room temperature Do not exceed the rated maximum ambient temperature of the Power Distribution Units See Specifications on page 460 in the User Guide Ensure sufficient airflow through the rack environment Mount equipment in the rack carefully to avoid uneven mechanical loading Connect equipment to the supply circuit carefully to avoid overloading circuits Ground all equipment properly especially supply connections to the branch circuit Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation zie Raritan Usually a PDU can be mounted in any orientation However when mounting a PDU with circuit breakers you must obey these rules e Circuit breakers CANNOT face down For example do not horizontally mount a
95. lt description gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e description is a string comprising up to 64 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command gives the description humidity detection to the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config externalsensor 4 description humidity detection Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands A sensor configuration command begins with sensor You can use the commands to configure the threshold hysteresis and assertion timeout values for any sensor associated with the following items Outlets Inlets Inlet poles for three phase PDUs only Circuit breakers Environmental sensors It is permitted to assign a new value to the threshold at any time regardless of whether the threshold is being enabled Commands for Outlet Sensors A sensor configuration command for outlets begins with sensor outlet Setting the Outlet s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an outlet S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the
96. method select one of the checkboxes Allow password authentication only Enables the password based login only Allow public key authentication only Enables the public key based login only Allow password and public key authentication Enables both the password and public key based login This is the default 5 Click OK to save the changes If the public key authentication is selected you must type a valid SSH public key for each user profile to log in over the SSH connection See Creating a User Profile on page 120 Changing the Telnet Settings You can enable or disable the Telnet access to the command line interface or change the default TCP port for the Telnet service gt To change the Telnet service settings 1 Choose Device Settings Network Services Telnet The Telnet Settings dialog appears 2 Touse adifferent port type a new port number in the field Valid range is 1 to 65535 3 Toenable the Telnet application select the Enable Telnet Access checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox 4 Click OK to save the changes S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Configuring the SNMP Settings You can enable or disable SNMP communication between an SNMP manager and the PX device Enabling SNMP communication allows the manager to retrieve and control the power status of each outlet Besides you may need to configure the SNMP destination s if the built in Sy
97. monitor the following at the circuit breaker level Status closed open Current drawn A Current remaining A e The ability to monitor environmental factors such as external temperature and humidity e User specified location attributes for environmental sensors e Anaudible alarm beeper and a visual alarm blinking LED to indicate current overload e The ability to reset the PDU or perform the firmware upgrade without interrupting the operation of connected equipment e Configurable alarm thresholds and hysteresis e Configurable assertion timeout for thresholds e The ability to remotely track the locations of IT devices on the rack through connected asset sensors e The ability to turn off non critical outlets and keep critical outlets turned on when the connected UPS enters the battery powered mode outlet switching capable models only e Support for SNMP v1 v2 and v3 e The ability to send traps and informs using the SNMP protocol e The ability to retrieve outlet specific data using SNMP including outlet state current voltage and power e The ability to store a data log of all sensor measurements and retrieve it via SNMP Note Raritan s Power IQ or other external systems can retrieve the stored data samples from the PX S Raritan Raritan Chapter 1 Introduction The ability to configure and set values through SNMP including power threshold levels The ability to save one PX device s conf
98. must modify the authentication settings on the PX device accordingly or the authentication fails gt To modify the external authentication configuration 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the remote authentication server that you want to edit Click Edit 153 154 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 4 5 Make necessary changes to the information shown Click OK to save the changes Deleting the Authentication Server Settings You can delete the authentication settings of a specific authentication server when that server is not available or not used for remote authentication gt 1 To remove one or multiple authentication servers Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the remote authentication server that you want to remove To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Click OK to save the changes Disabling External Authentication When the remote authentication service is disabled the PX authenticates users against the local database stored on the PX device gt 1 To disable the external authentication service Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authenticat
99. n details show sensor inlet n sensor type details show sensor inletpole n p sensor type details show sensor ocp n sensor type details Y show sensor outlet n sensor type details Y Y show sensor outletpole n p sensor type details show serial show time details show user user name details show user defaultPreferences show network wireless details zie Raritan 2 Appendix F Additional PX Information Notes 1 After performing the show outlets lt n gt command the following outlet information is not available for PX2 3000 and PX2 4000 series State on device power up Cycling power off period 2 After performing the show pdu details command the following PDU information is not available for PX2 3000 and PX2 4000 series Default outlet state on startup Outlet power sequence Outlet power sequence delay Configuration Commands This table indicates the configuration commands applicability e Y applicable e N NOT applicable CLI commands PX2 3k PX2 4k PX2 5k All network commands Y Y Y All security commands All inlet commands All ocp commands All externalsensor commands All sensor outlet commands All sensor inlet commands All sensor inletpole commands All sensor ocp commands All sensor externalsensor commands All serial commands All time commands All user commands All role comm
100. network services ssh port lt n gt Variables e lt n gt isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default SSH port is 22 Example The following command syntax sets the TCP port for SSH to 555 config network services ssh port 555 Setting the SNMP Configuration You can enable or disable the SNMP v1 v2c or v3 agent configure the read and write community strings or set the MIB II parameters such as sysContact using the CLI commands An SNMP command begins with network services snmp S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling SNMP v1 v2c This command syntax enables or disables the SNMP v1 v2c protocol config network services snmp vl v2c option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The SNMP v1 v2c protocol is enabled disable The SNMP v1 v2c protocol is disabled Example The following command enables the SNMP v1 v2c protocol config f network services snmp vl v2c enable Enabling or Disabling SNMP v3 This command syntax enables or disables the SNMP v3 protocol config f network services snmp v3 option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The SNMP v3 protocol is enabled disable The SNMP v3 protocol is disabled Example The following command enables the SNMP v3 protocol config f network services snmp v3 enable zie Raritan 33
101. not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold for the outlet 5 RMS current to 10A It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor outlet 5 current lowerCritical 10 zie Raritan ii Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value
102. of 8 to 32 ASCII printable characters Re type the same authentication pass phrase for confirmation This checkbox is configurable only if AuthPriv is selected When the checkbox is selected the privacy pass phrase is identical to the authentication pass phrase To specify a different privacy pass phrase disable the checkbox Type the privacy pass phrase in this field if the Use Authentication Pass Phrase as Privacy Pass Phrase checkbox is disabled The pass phrase must consist of 8 to 32 ASCII printable characters Re type the same privacy pass phrase for confirmation 121 122 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface he Field Description Authentication Click the drop down arrow and select the desired Protocol authentication protocol from the list Two protocols are available MD5 SHA 1 default Privacy Protocol Click the drop down arrow and select the desired privacy protocol from the list Two protocols are available DES default AES 128 Click the SSH tab to enter the public key if the public key authentication for the SSH service is enabled See Changing the SSH Settings on page 106 a Open the SSH public key with a text editor b Copy and pasie all contents in the text editor into the Public Key field on the SSH tab Click the Roles tab to determine the permissions of the user Select one or multiple roles by selecting corresponding checkboxes The Admin role provides full permis
103. of an IP address There are different types of access clients S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Web GUI Refers to the PX web interface CLI Refers to the command line interface CLI The information in parentheses following CLI indicates how this user was connected to the CLI Serial Represents the local connection serial or USB SSH Represents the SSH connection Telnet Represents the Telnet connection System date and time Current date year and time are displayed to the right of the bar If positioning the mouse pointer over the system date and time the time zone information is also displayed A 3 24 11 10 13 PM Sometimes a flag icon 7 may appear to the far right of the bar when a communication error between the PX device and the graphical user interface GUI occurs When the icon appears you can click the icon to view the communications log See Viewing the Communication Log on page 249 Add Page Icon The Add Page icon ie located on the top of the data pane lets you open data pages of multiple tree items without overriding any opened page 1 To open new data pages Click the Add Page icon ie A new tab along with a blank data page appears Click a tree item whose data page you want to open The data of the selected tree item is then displayed on the blank page To open more data pages repeat Steps 1 to 2 All tabs representing opened p
104. of it meets a certain condition For example the inlet s voltage exceeds the warning threshold e Action This is the response to the event For example the PX notifies the system administrator of the event and records the event in the log Creating an Event Rule The best way to create a new set of event rules in sequence is to e Create actions for responding to one or multiple events e Create rules to determine what actions are taken when these events occur is Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Creating Actions The PX comes with two built in actions System Event Log Action This action records the selected event in the internal log when the event occurs System SNMP Notification Action This action sends SNMP notifications to one or multiple IP addresses after the selected event occurs Note No IP addresses are specified for the System SNMP Notification Action by default so you must specify IP addresses before applying this action to any event rule The default actions cannot be deleted gt 1 To create new actions Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired a
105. only be performed by a licensed electrician 2 Make sure the line cord is disconnected from power before physically mounting or moving the location of this product 3 This product is intended to be located in an equipment rack in an information technology room In the United States installation must comply and be done in accordance with NEC 2011 Article 645 Information Technology Equipment 4 This product is designed to be used within an electronic equipment rack The metal case of this product is electrically bonded to the line cord ground wire A threaded grounding point on the case may be used as an additional means of protectively grounding this product and the rack 5 Examine the branch circuit receptacle that will supply electric power to this product Make sure the receptacle s power lines neutral and protective earth ground pins are wired correctly and are the correct voltage and phase Make sure the branch circuit receptacle is protected by a suitably rated fuse or circuit breaker 448 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors 6 If the product is a model that contains receptacles that can be switched on off electric power may still be present at a receptacle even when it is switched off Flexible Cord Installation Instructions zie Raritan The following instructions are for Raritan products manufactured to accept user installed flexible cords These products are visually identified by the cable gland used to hold the flexib
106. only if the automatic installation fails gt Automatic driver installation in Windows 1 Make sure the PX device is NOT connected to the computer via a USB cable 2 Run dominion serial setup 2 0 exe A Dominion Serial Console Driver Setup Wizard appears Note If any Windows security warning appears accept it to continue the installation 3 Click Install to install the driver Click Finish when the installation is complete S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 5 Connect the PX device s USB cable back to the computer The driver is automatically installed gt Manual driver installation in Windows 1 Make sure the PX device has been connected to the computer via a USB cable 2 The computer detects the new device and the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears If this dialog does not appear choose Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager right click the xxx Serial Console where xxx represents the product name and choose Update Driver 3 Select the option of driver installation from a specific location and then specify the location where both the dominion serial inf and dominion serial cat are stored Note If any Windows security warning appears accept it to continue the installation 4 Wait until the installation is complete Note If the PX enters the disaster recovery mode when the dominion serial driver is not installed yet it may be shown as a G
107. openly and is thus insecure In addition the PX also supports the SNMP and Modbus TCP protocols Changing the HTTP S Settings HTTPS uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL technology to encrypt all traffic to and from the PX device so it is a more secure protocol than HTTP By default any access to the PX device via HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS See Forcing HTTPS Encryption on page 128 gt Tochange the HTTP or HTTPS port settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt HTTP The HTTP Settings dialog appears 2 To use a different port for HTTP or HTTPS type a new port number in the corresponding field Valid range is 1 to 65535 Warning Different network services cannot share the same TCP port 3 Click OK to save the changes 105 106 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the SSH Settings You can enable or disable the SSH access to the command line interface or change the default TCP port for the SSH service In addition you can decide to log in using either the password or the public key over the SSH connection gt To change the SSH service settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SSH The SSH Settings dialog appears 2 To use a different port type a new port number in the field Valid range is 1 to 65535 3 To enable the SSH application select the Enable SSH checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox 4 To select a different authentication
108. outletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n is the number of the outlet whose pole sensors you want to query e lt p gt is the label of the outlet pole whose sensors you want to query Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor xdi SE Raritan zie Raritan Sensor type powerFactor activeEnergy Displayed information Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Description Power factor sensor Active energy sensor e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified outlet pole sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range e If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed Inlet Sensor Threshold Information This command is not available for an in line monitor PX2 3nnn series This command syntax shows the specified inlet sensor s threshold related information show sensor inlet n sensor type To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command
109. page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane Click Setup The Overcurrent Protector Setup dialog appears In the Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold Configuration table to trigger this dialog 6 Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box 7 Toenable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 8 Toenable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 9 Click OK to save the changes Bulk Configuration for Circuit Breaker Thresholds The PX allows you to set the power thresholds for multiple circuit breakers at a time so that you can save time when configuring a number of circuit breaker thresholds Note To set the power thresholds for an individual circui
110. password After successfully logging in you can create user profiles for your other users These profiles define their login names and passwords See Creating a User Profile on page 120 Login The web interface allows a maximum of 16 users to log in simultaneously You must enable JavaScript in the web browser for proper operation gt To log in to the web interface 1 Open a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox and type this URL http s lt ip address where ip address is the IP address of the PX device 2 Ifa security alert message appears click OK or Yes to accept The Login page then opens 3 Type your user name in the User Name field and password in the Password field A Login User Name Password Login Clear Note Both the user name and password are case sensitive so make sure you capitalize them correctly Click Clear to clear either the inputs or any error message that appears 4 Ifa security agreement is displayed on the Login page accept it SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Note If you do not accept the security agreement you cannot log on to the PX 5 Click Login or press Enter The PX page opens Note Depending on your hardware configuration elements shown on the PX page may appear slightly different from this image TC Raritan Dominion PX OQ boost Use Uasegemesi e Deve
111. protrude inside the Raritan product The wires will have ring terminals crimped onto them In the finished assembly the wires should have some slack and not be taught In the finished assembly if the flexible cord slips in the cable gland placing a strain on the cord s wires the ground wire must be the last wire to take the strain 3 Crimp an insulated ring terminal onto each wire A non insulated ring terminal may be used for the ground wire Inspect each crimp to insure itis secure and verify no exposed wire protrudes from the rear of an insulated ring terminal 4 Loosen the cable gland nut and push the flexible cord assembly through the gland zie Raritan T Chapter 9 In Line Monitors Temporarily hand tighten the gland nut and verify the cord cannot be twisted or pushed or pulled in the gland Do not proceed if hand tightening results in a loose cord In some models especially in line monitors the flexible cord s diameter may be too small for the cable gland A sealing ring for smaller diameter line cords may have been included with the Raritan product or can be requested from Raritan to reduce the inside diameter of the cable gland 5 Fasten the ring terminal of the green or green yellow ground wire to the chassis s threaded ground stud in this order a Place the lock washer on the stud b Place the ground wire ring terminal on the stud c Place the nut on the stud and tighten with a torqu
112. removal operation for servicing ON V Note Some NEMA sockets on PSE certified PDUs for Japan have integral locking capability and do not need cable retention clips gt To install and use a cable retention clip on the outlet 1 Locate two tiny holes adjacent to the outlet 2 Install the cable retention clip by inserting two ends of the clip into the tiny holes 31 32 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 3 Plug the power cord into the outlet and press the clip toward the power cord until it holds the cord firmly The clip s central area holding the plug should face downwards toward the ground like an inverted U This allows gravity to keep the clip in place 4 Repeat the same steps to install clips and power cords on the other outlets Tip Raritan also provides other mechanisms to securely hold the power cords in place See Locking Outlets and Cords on page 496 S Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment More features are available in addition to remotely monitoring and managing this PX if you connect Raritan s or third party external equipment to your PX In This Chapter Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional susssse 33 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional 47 Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional ssssssssss 58 Connecting a GSM Modem Optional sse 5
113. role modify lt name gt addPrivileges lt privilegel gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e privilege1 lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 418 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege Separate a privilege and its argument s with a colon and separate arguments with a comma if there are more than one argument for a privilege gt To remove specific privileges from a role config role modify lt name gt removePrivileges privilegel privilege2 privilege3 If a specific privilege contains any arguments add a colon and the argument s after that privilege zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config role modify lt name gt removePrivileges lt privilegel gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Note When removing privileges from a role make sure the specified privileges and arguments if any exactly match those assigned to the role Otherwise the command fails to r
114. row will cycle through the selected inlet number and that inlet s line or active power For example When showing L1 of Inlet 1 the two digit row cycles through i1 and L1 When showing L1 of Inlet 2 the two digit row cycles through i2 and L1 When showing active power of Inlet 1 the two digit row cycles through i1 and AP When showing active power of Inlet 2 the two digit row cycles through i2 and AP Current of the selected component is shown in the three digit row Simultaneously the CURRENT A LED is lit See LEDs for Measurement Units on page 67 When selecting an outlet or a line you can press the Up and Down buttons simultaneously to switch between voltage active power and current readings When the voltage is displayed the VOLTAGE V LED is lit It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is lit It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears 69 70 Chapter 5 Using the PDU 4 When selecting AP it displays the selected inlet s active power reading When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is lit Note The LED display returns to the Automatic Mode after 20 seconds elapse since the last time any button was pressed Reset Button The reset button is located inside the small hole near the two digit row The PX device can be reset to i
115. sensor gt To configure a specific rack unit 1 If the Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder 2 Click the asset sensor in the left pane The asset sensor s page opens in the right pane Note The asset sensor is named Asset Strip 1 by default The name changes after being customized Tip The same asset sensor s page can be also opened by clicking Feature Port in the left pane and then double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane Select the rack unit whose LED settings you want to change Click Configure Rack Unit or double click the selected rack unit The setup dialog for the selected rack unit appears In the Name field type a name for identifying this rack unit Select either Auto or Manual Override as this rack unit s LED mode Auto based on Tag This is the default setting With this option selected the LED follows the global LED color settings Manual Override This option differentiates this LED s behavior After selecting this option you must select an LED mode and or an LED color for the selected rack unit LED Mode Select On to have the LED stay lit Off to have it stay off Slow blinking to have it blink slowly or Fast blinking to have it blink quickly LED Color If you select On Slow blinking or Fast blinking in the LED Mode field select an LED color by either clicking a color in the color palette or typing the hexad
116. setup worksheet e Check the branch circuit rating Unpacking the Product and Components 1 Remove the PX device and other equipment from the box in which they were shipped See Package Contents on page 4 for a complete list of the contents of the box 2 Compare the serial number of the equipment with the number on the packing slip located on the outside of the box and make sure they match 3 Inspect the equipment carefully If any of the equipment is damaged or missing contact Raritan s Technical Support Department for assistance 4 Verify that all circuit breakers on the PX device are set to ON If not turn them ON For a PDU with fuses ensure that all fuses are inserted and seated properly If there are any fuse covers ensure that they are closed Note Not all PX devices have overcurrent protection mechanisms Preparing the Installation Site 1 Make sure the installation area is clean and free of extreme temperatures and humidity 13 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Note If necessary contact Raritan Technical Support for the maximum operating temperature for your model See Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature on page 460 2 Allow sufficient space around the PX device for cabling and outlet connections 3 Review the Safety Instructions on page iii listed in the beginning of this user guide Checking the Branch Circuit Rating This section describes the rating of the branch cir
117. sis Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Entering the Diagnostic Mode Diagnostic commands function in the diagnostic mode only gt To enter the diagnostic mode 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type diag and press Enter The diag gt prompt appears indicating that you have entered the diagnostic mode 3 Now you can type any diagnostic commands for troubleshooting Diagnostic Commands The diagnostic command syntax varies from command to command Querying the DNS Servers This command syntax queries Internet domain name server DNS information of a network host diag gt nslookup lt host gt Variables e host is the name or IP address of the host whose DNS information you want to query Example The following command checks the DNS information regarding the host 192 168 84 222 diag nslookup 192 168 84 222 zie Raritan m Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Showing the Network Connections This command syntax displays network connections and or status of ports diag gt netstat lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options ports or connections Option Description ports Shows TCP UDP ports connections Shows network connections Example The following command displays the server connections to your PX device diag netstat connections ads SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line I
118. specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor ocp 3 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Environmental Sensors A sensor threshold configuration command for environmental sensors begins with sensor externalsensor Setting the Sensor s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of a numeric environmental sensor config f sensor externalsensor n sensor type upperCritical option Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type zie Raritan m Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 400 config sensor e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Se
119. switch on off or power cycle any outlet s Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Switch outlets SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface From the Operation drop down select an operation for the selected outlet s Turn Outlet On Turns on the selected outlet s Turn Outlet Off Turns off the selected outlet s Cycle Outlet Cycles power to the selected outlet s To select the outlet where this action will be applied select it from the Available Outlets list and click to add it to the Switched Outlets list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To move all outlets to the Switched Outlets list box at a time click ej To remove any outlet from the Switched Outlets list select it from the Switched Outlets list and click to move it to the Available Outlets list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To remove all outlets at a time click ej Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog Record Snapshots to Webcam Storage This option allows you to define an action that starts or stops a specific webcam from taking snaps
120. takes for the outlets to turn back on after they are switched OFF during the power cycle The power off period of power cycle can be set for all outlets or for an individual outlet Note that the value set for an individual outlet always overrides the value set for all outlets 161 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs The PDU defined power off period determines how long it takes for all outlets to turn on after they are turned OFF during the power cycle The default PDU defined power off period is 10 seconds 10 s Note To set a different power off period on a particular outlet see Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period on page 163 gt To set the power off period for all outlets 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Power off period during power cycle field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is zero second to one hour Time units in the list are explained below S second s min minute s h hour s You can also type a value if the desired time is not listed For example type 15 s if you want a 15 second delay 4 Click OK to save the changes T
121. target PDU becomes inaccessible Select the System SNMP Notification Action from the Available actions list box and click to add it to the Selected actions list box Note If you have not configured the System SNMP Notification Action to specify the SNMP destination s see Configuring SNMP Notifications on page 265 Editing Ping Monitoring Settings You can edit the ping monitoring settings for any IT device whenever it requires changes gt 1 To modify the ping monitoring settings for an IT device Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Select the IT device whose settings you want to modify by clicking it Click Edit or double click the IT device The Edit Server XXX dialog appears where XXX is the IP address or host name of the IT device Make changes to the information shown Click OK to save the changes Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings When it is not necessary to monitor the accessibility of any IT device just remove it gt 1 To delete ping monitoring settings for an IT device Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Select the IT device whose ping monitoring settings you want to remove by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to
122. that the configuration copy is complete Backup and Restore of PX Device Settings Different from the Bulk Configuration file the backup file contains device specific data like network settings To back up or restore the PX device settings you should perform the Backup Restore feature All PX information is captured in the XML backup file except for the device logs and SSL certificate gt To download a backup PX XML file 1 Choose Maintenance Backup Restore The Backup Restore of Device Settings dialog opens S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Inthe Save Device Settings section click Download Device Settings Save the file to your computer The file is saved in the XML format and its content is encrypted using the AES 128 encryption algorithm gt To restore the PX using a backup XML file 1 Choose Maintenance gt Backup Restore The Backup Restore of Device Settings dialog opens In the Copy Device Settings section click Browse to locate the file Click Upload amp Restore Device Settings to upload the file A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation and enter the admin password 4 Enter the admin password then click Yes to confirm the operation Wait until the PX device resets and the Login page re appears indicating that the restore is complete Note To do the bulk configuration among multiple PX devices perform the Bulk Configuration feature instead
123. the Category 5e 6 cable All LEDs on the asset sensor assembly may cycle through different colors during the power on process if the asset sensor s firmware is being upgraded by the PX device After the power on or firmware upgrade process completes the LEDs show solid colors Note that the LED color of the tag ports with asset tags connected will be different from the LED color of the tag ports without asset tags connected Q gt Letter _ i a jid on a M C 3c o Item The PX device Asset sensors Asset tags IT devices such as servers Note The PX cannot detect how many rack units the connected asset sensor s has You must provide the information to it manually See Configuring the Asset Sensor on page 233 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting Blade Extension Strips For blade servers which are contained in a single chassis you can use a blade extension strip to track individual blade servers Raritan s blade extension strip functions similar to a Raritan asset sensor but requires a tag connector cable for connecting to a tag port on the regular asset sensor or AMS M2 Z The blade extension strip contains 4 to 16 tag ports depending on which model you purchased The diagram illustrates a tag connector cable and a blade extension strip with 16 tag ports Tag connector cable A C Item Description A Barcode ID number for the tag connector
124. the IP configuration mode config f network ipv4 ipConfigurationMode mode Variables e mode is one of the modes dhcp or static Mode Description dhcp The IPv4 configuration mode is set to DHCP static The IPv4 configuration mode is set to static IP address SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command enables the Static IP configuration mode config network ipv4 ipConfigurationMode static Setting the IPv4 Preferred Host Name After selecting DHCP as the IPv4 configuration mode you can specify the preferred host name which is optional The following is the command syntax config network ipv4 preferredHostName lt name gt Variables e lt name gt is a host name which Consists of alphanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Example The following command sets the IPv4 preferred host name to my v4host config f network ipv4 preferredHostName my v4host Setting the IPv4 Address After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to assign a permanent IP address to the PX device config f network ipv4 ipAddress ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address being assigned to your PX device The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 zie Raritan a Chapter
125. the Network Service Parameters 331 Setting the Networking Mode 314 Setting the NTP Parameters 340 Setting the Outer Authentication 318 Setting the Outlet Initialization Delay 310 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence 165 306 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence Delay 307 Setting the Outlet s Assertion Timeout 380 Setting the Outlet s Deassertion Hysteresis 379 Setting the Outlet s Lower Critical Threshold 377 Setting the Outlet s Lower Warning Threshold 378 Setting the Outlet s Upper Critical Threshold 374 Setting the Outlet s Upper Warning Threshold 376 Setting the Outlet Specific Default State 160 161 Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay 166 Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period 309 368 Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State 308 367 Setting the PDU Defined Default State 160 161 Setting the Polling Interval 425 Setting the PSK 317 Setting the Sensor s Assertion Timeout 403 Setting the Sensor s Deassertion Hysteresis 403 Setting the Sensor s Lower Critical Threshold e 401 Setting the Sensor s Lower Warning Threshold 402 Setting the Sensor s Upper Critical Threshold e 399 Setting the Sensor s Upper Warning Threshold 400 Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate 434 Setting the SNMP Configuration 334 Setting the SNMP Read Community 336 Setting the SNMP Write Community 336 512 Setting the SSID 316 Setting the sysC
126. the Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold Configuration table to trigger this dialog Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Click OK in the threshold setup dialog to retain the changes To set the thresholds for other sensors repeat Steps 4 to 9 Click OK to save the changes Important The final step is required or the threshold changes are not saved Bulk Configuration for Outlet Thresholds The PX allows you to set the power thresholds for multiple outlets at a time so that you can save time when configuring a number of outlet thresholds Note To set the power thresholds for an individual outlet you can either fol
127. the monitored Unsuccessful Pings equipment is declared Unreachable Valid for Failure range is 1 to 100 Wait Time in The wait time before the PX resumes seconds before pinging after the monitored equipment is Resuming Pinging declared unreachable Valid range is 1 to 1200 seconds 5 Click OK to save the changes 6 Toadd more IT devices repeat Steps 2 to 5 7 Click Close to quit the dialog In the beginning the status of the monitored equipment shows Waiting for reliable connection which means the requested number of consecutive successful or unsuccessful pings has not reached before the PX can declare that the monitored device is reachable or unreachable SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Example Ping Monitoring and SNMP Notifications In this illustration it is assumed that a significant PDU IP address 192 168 84 95 shall be monitored by your PX to make sure that PDU is properly operating all the time and the PX must send out SNMP notifications trap or inform if that PDU is declared unreachable due to power or network failure The prerequisite for this example is that the power source for your PX is different from the power source for that PDU This requires two steps set up the PDU monitoring and create an event rule 1 Step 1 Set up the ping monitoring for the target PDU Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Ty
128. time limit to X minutes where X is a number X h This type of option sets the time limit to X hours where X is a number 1d This option sets the time limit to 1 day Tip If the desired time option is not listed you can manually type the desired time in this field For example you can type 4 min to set the time to 4 minutes 5 Click OK to save the changes Tip Keep the idle timeout to 20 minutes or less if possible This reduces the number of idle sessions connected and the number of simullaneous commands sent to the PX Enabling Strong Passwords Use of strong passwords makes it more difficult for intruders to crack user passwords and access the PX device By default strong passwords should be at least eight characters long and contain upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters such as or amp gt To force users to create strong passwords 1 Choose Device Settings Security Password Policy The Password Policy dialog appears 2 Select the Strong Passwords checkbox to activate the strong password feature The following are the default settings 135 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Minimum length 8 characters Maximum length 32 characters At least one lowercase character Required At least one uppercase character Required At least one numeric character Required At least one special character Required Number of restricted passwords in history 5 Note Th
129. to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified inlet sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the inlet 1 RMS current to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor inlet 1 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Inlet Pole Sensors A sensor configuration command for inlet poles begins with sensor inletpole This type of command is available on a three phase PDU only S Raritan config sensor zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an inlet pole inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inle
130. to the specified user profile Example The following command assigns two roles to the user May config user modify May roles admin tester Results e The user May has the union of all privileges of admin and tester S SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Measurement Units You can change the measurement units displayed for temperatures length and pressure for a specific user profile Different measurement unit commands can be combined so that you can set all measurement units at atime To combine all commands see Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface Tip To set the default measurement units applied to the PX user interfaces for all users via CLI see Setting Default Measurement Units on page 416 gt To set the preferred temperature unit config user modify name preferredTemperatureUnit optionl Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option is one of the options C or F Option Description C This option displays the temperature in Celsius F This option displays the temperature in Fahrenheit gt To set the preferred length unit config user modify lt name gt preferredLengthUnit lt option2 gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt op
131. type of events only show eventlog limit lt n gt class lt event_type gt Variables n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays all entries in the event log An integer Displays the specified number of last entries in the number event log The number ranges between 1 to 10 000 event type is one of the following event types Event type Description all Displays all types of events device Displays device related events only such as System starting or firmware upgrade event userAdministration Displays user management events only such as creation of a new user profile or a new role userActivity Displays user activities only such as user login or logout events pdu Displays PDU related events only such as entry or exit of the load shedding mode Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Event type Description sensor Only displays events regarding internal or external sensors such as state changes of any sensors serverMonitor Displays server monitoring records only For example a server being monitored by the PX is declared reachable or unreachable energywise Displays Cisco EnergyWise related events such as enabling the support of the EnergyWise function assetManagement X Only displays events regarding Raritan s asset management sensor if connected For example connection or disconnection of asset management tags rfCode Displ
132. with the baseplates so that the five screw holes on the baseplates line up through the bracket s slots The rackmount side of brackets should face either the left or right side of the PX device 4 Fasten the brackets in place with at least three screws one through each slot Use additional screws as desired Raritan 10 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Using rack screws fasten the PX device to the rack through the claw foot brackets Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons The following describes how to mount a PDU using two buttons only If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using two buttons 1 Turn to the rear of the PDU 2 Locate two screw holes on the rear panel one near the bottom and the other near the top the side of cable gland S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 3 Screw a button in the screw hole near the bottom The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm 4 Screw a button in the screw hole near the top The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm 5 Ensure that the two buttons can engage their mounting holes in the rack or cabinet simultaneously 6 Press the PX device forward pushing the mounting buttons through the mounting holes then letting the device drop slightly This secures the PX device in place and c
133. you to set temperature or fan speed thresholds for alerts or to customize the name of the LHX device for easy identification Correctly Displaying the LHX Device There are two ways to have the PX show the correct LHX model in the web interface e Auto detection Set the mode of the Feature Port to Auto to let the PX automatically detects the device type e Manual assignment Set the mode of the Feature Port to either LHX 20 or LHX 40 depending on which LHX model is physically connected to the PX For details on how to change the Feature Port mode see Configuring the Feature Port on page 113 After the correct LHX device type is detected or assigned the LHX icon e appears below the Feature Port folder Note that the device icon changes its image when the device changes its states See Device States and Icon Variations on page 255 for details S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting Up an LHX Once an LHX heat exchanger is connected you can setup the device by giving it a name and configuring its setpoint air outlet and default fan speed gt To set up the LHX 1 Ifthe Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder 2 Click the LHX heat exchanger in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that device opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section of the page The Setup dialog opens 4 Typea name for
134. 1 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet 11 page opens in the right pane Click Setup The Inlet 11 Setup dialog appears Type a new name in the Name field Click OK to save the changes Naming Circuit Breakers You can name each circuit breaker for easily identifying them The customized name is followed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the circuit breaker number such as C1 gt Toname acircuit breaker 1 Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup The Overcurrent Protector Setup dialog appears S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Tip This dialog can be also triggered by clicking Setup on the Overcurrent Protectors page when the Overcurrent Protectors folder is selected in the Dominion PX Explorer pane Type a new name in the Name field Click OK to save the changes Monitoring the Inlet You can view the inlet s details including its Label number Customized name Inlet sensor readings RMS current per line A RMS voltage per line pair V Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh Unbalanced load percentage Note If a sensor reading row is
135. 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 412 414 415 417 420 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 437 439 440 441 443 444 445 446 Ping Monitoring and SNMP Notifications 219 When Hysteresis is Useful 179 When to Disable Hysteresis 179 Example 1 212 Example 1 Basic Security Information 302 Example 1 Combination of IP Subnet Mask and Gateway Parameters 435 Example 2 212 Example 2 Combination of Upper Critical and Upper Warning Settings 435 Example 2 In Depth Security Information 303 Example 3 212 Example 3 Basic PDU Information 303 Example 3 Combination of SSID and PSK Parameters 436 Example 4 Combination of Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower Warning Settings 436 Example 4 In Depth PDU Information 304 Examples 302 Existing Roles 296 Existing User Profiles e 285 295 Expanding a Blade Extension Strip 236 Expanding the Tree 83 155 156 157 158 159 161 163 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 222 223 224 228 232 254 508 F Feature RJ 45 Port Pinouts 461 Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet 14 Firewall Control 343 Firmware Upgrade 240 258 Flexible Cord Installation Instructions 449 Flexible Cord Selection 449 Floor Water Sensors xvi 43 Forcing a Password Change 408 Forcing HTTPS Encryption 105 128 142 Full Disaster Recovery 260 Fuse
136. 5 273 275 Modifying the Network Settings 86 101 109 472 Modifying the Role Based Access Control Parameters 360 Modifying the SNMPv3 Settings 409 Monitoring All Outlets 156 Monitoring an Outlet 157 Monitoring Circuit Breakers 172 Monitoring Server Accessibility 217 Monitoring the Inlet 171 Monitoring the LHX Device 251 254 More Information 88 More Information about AD Configuration 151 Mounting 1U or 2U Models 11 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons 10 Multi Command Syntax 345 352 355 361 405 407 409 413 416 435 N Naming a Rack Unit 430 Naming an Asset Sensor 426 Naming Circuit Breakers 170 Naming Outlets 155 Naming the Inlet 170 509 Index Naming the PDU 83 85 86 98 115 158 159 160 162 164 165 166 167 169 170 171 174 175 176 177 222 223 224 226 228 232 254 Naming the Rack PDU in the KX II or LX Port Page for Power Strips 481 Network Configuration 279 Network Diagnostics 248 Network Service Settings 281 Network Troubleshooting 248 442 Networking Configuration Commands 314 Networking Mode 280 Numeric Character Requirement 358 O Old and New Contact Closure Sensors 36 Operating Hours 256 Other Commands 503 Outlet Configurat
137. 5 Nammo OUITBIS corr renes caer racer sendet rase E A E E te UR LE 155 OutleP MONNOMO sssini ekarna inane per citer e dettes cretus tts ethos EAEE 156 Ouer SWCNT A etse u Ea rU IE 158 Setting the Default Outlet State sssssssssssssseseeeeneen enne enne 160 Changing the Cycling Power Off Period ssssssssseeeeeee nnns 161 Setting the Initialization Delay ssessssssseseseeeeeeenee enne entrent 164 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay ssssssssssseseeeseeenne entente ennt nnns 165 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence ssssssessssses esee enne enne 165 Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay sssssssseeeenmene 166 Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode sss 167 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management sssssssssssssssee eee nnne nnne 170 Na ming the nlet EE 170 Naming Circuit BIeakets itn reete nae eben ie Une aaaea OEE KENE ATESA ETES 170 Monitoring trie Inlet iue corriente xen Ep cay Sexe tba o e ced eene caet xa ex RR DR RR cagexe 171 Monitoring Circuit Breakers cales tt te ree tabe en etta tu a an tok bec kae ERR ENR RR teens 172 Setting Power ThresholdS iniecit Ente EE A N ERE MARK V Fede cuta ut ux lee d enu E 173 Setting an Outlets Thresholds itineri re Peut eed worsted xU NER R ERE uS aua 173 Bulk Configuration for Outlet Thresholds
138. 6 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the SNMP Read Community This command syntax sets the SNMP read only community string config f network services snmp readCommunity lt string gt Variables e string is a string comprising 4 to 64 ASCII printable characters e The string CANNOT include spaces Example This command syntax sets the SNMP read only community string to public config ft network services snmp readCommunity public Setting the SNMP Write Community This command syntax sets the SNMP read write community string config f network services snmp writeCommunity lt string gt Variables e lt string gt is a string comprising 4 to 64 ASCII printable characters e The string CANNOT include spaces Example The following command sets the SNMP read write community string to private config network services snmp writeCommunity private Setting the sysContact Value This command syntax sets the SNMP MIB II sysContact value config network services snmp sysContact lt value gt Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sysContact to John Krause config ft network services snmp sysContact John Krause Setting the sysName Value This command syntax sets the SNMP MIB II sysName value config f network services snm
139. 6 Ifyou installed the self signed certificate in Step 5 after the installation completes the PX device resets and the login page re opens Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files If the SSL certificate and private key files are already available you can install them directly without going through the process of creating a CSR or a self signed certificate Note If you are using a SSL certificate that is part of a chain of certificates each part of the chain is signed during the validation process gt To install the existing key and certificate files 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab Select the Upload Key and Certificate checkbox The Key File and Certificate File fields appear In the Key File field click Browse to select the private key file In the Certificate File field click Browse to select the certificate file Click Upload The selected files are installed on the PX device Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successfully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later 7 Click Close to quit the dialog d Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Downloading Key and Certificate Files You can download the key and certificate files currently installed on the PX device for backup or other operations For example you can install the files on a replacement PX device a
140. 8 Enabling or Disabling SNMP v1 v2c 335 Enabling or Disabling SNMP v3 335 Enabling or Disabling SSH 334 Enabling or Disabling Strong Passwords 356 Enabling or Disabling Telnet e 333 Enabling or Disabling the Read Only Mode 338 Enabling or Disabling the Restricted Service Agreement 350 Enabling or Disabling the Service Advertisement 339 Enabling Password Aging 136 Enabling Service Advertisement 109 339 Enabling SNMP 116 263 Enabling Strong Passwords 135 Enabling the Feature 138 Enabling the Firewall e 128 129 Enabling User Blocking 134 EnergyWise Configuration Commands 423 EnergyWise Settings 297 Entering the Configuration Mode 276 305 320 406 415 Entering the Diagnostic Mode 276 443 Environmental Sensor Configuration Commands 370 Environmental Sensor Information 286 507 Index Environmental Sensor Threshold Information 293 Environmental Sensors 221 Equipment Setup Worksheet 14 463 Event Log 300 Event Rules and Actions 107 117 173 180 217 265 Example 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 345 347 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 361 363 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 388 389 390 391 392
141. 8 Setting Up User login Controls ccc iret eonun Eee tud ee anu ta Ehe ue La does 134 Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules ssssssssseeeeeeee 138 zie Raritan d Contents viii setting Upan SSE Certificate sedi ida aat ope eed Ab edit ded Mod and dees 142 Certificate Signing Heguest iid a ads Ro adhe ddd aa anaiai aa aama a 143 Creating a Self Signed Certificate esses eene nnne 145 Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files esee 146 Downloading Key and Certificate Files ssssessssseeeeennnerenenn 147 Setting Up External Authentication issiran niassa eae rete dad tu ade detnr eau diues 147 Gathering the External Authentication Information ssseeeeese 148 Adding Authentication SO VOrs acce eet aeaa Rok hax na een lde aana 149 Sorting the ACCESS OJE ioo dente nde ete Fete ex nde etn rta ra nde exta rex dign 153 Testing the Server Connetti Manssun te ence trente nete oe ala dud et nex Ri anu puE 153 Editing the Authentication Server Settings sssssseeeenere 153 Deleting the Authentication Server Settings 154 Disabling External AutheriticatiOni ooi oe ettet coeant etaed den 154 Enabling External and Local Authentication Services seeee 155 OutlerNanagemielil sede retro e eres terrace eat cy eer ice er scene peer adina iaaa eide enana iN 15
142. 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command assigns the static IPv4 address 192 168 84 222 to the PX device config network ipv4 ipAddress 192 168 84 222 Setting the IPv4 Subnet Mask After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to define the subnet mask config network ipv4 subnetMask lt netmask gt Variables e netmask is the subnet mask address The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command sets the subnet mask to 192 168 84 0 config f network ipv4 subnetMask 192 168 84 0 Setting the IPv4 Gateway After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the gateway config network ipv4 gateway lt ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the gateway The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command sets the IPv4 gateway to 255 255 255 0 config network ipv4 gateway 255 255 255 0 a Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the IPv4 Primary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the primary DNS server config network ipv4 primaryDNSServer lt ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the primary DNS server The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command
143. 80 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an inlet pole config f sensor inletpole n p sensor type lowerCritical option Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e p is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Sensor type Description apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Lower Critical threshold f
144. 9 Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional 59 Connecting an RF Code PDU Sensor Tag Optional 60 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional zie Raritan To enable the detection of environmental factors around the PX connect one or more Raritan environmental sensors to the PX device The maximum distance for all sensor cabling plugged into the product s sensor port should not exceed 30 meters 100 feet Contact Raritan Technical Support if you have questions You can connect up to 16 environmental sensors to a PX device by using a Raritan sensor hub Note that a Raritan environmental sensor usually contains more than one sensor For example a DPX T2H2 counts as 4 sensors and a DPX T3H1 counts as 4 sensors Warning For proper operation wait for 15 30 seconds between each connection operation or each disconnection operation of environmental sensors gt To directly connect one or multiple environmental sensors e Plug the connector of the environmental sensor into the SENSOR port on your PX device Note Depending on the model you purchased the total number of SENSOR ports varies gt To connect environmental sensors via an optional PX sensor hub 1 Connect a Raritan sensor hub to the PX device a Plug one end of the Raritan provided phone cable 4 wire 6 pin RJ 12 into the IN port Port 1 of the hub 33 34 Chapter 4 Connecting External
145. A Click Upload The certificate is installed on the PX device Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successtully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later Click Close to quit the dialog SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Creating a Self Signed Certificate When appropriate certificate and key files for the PX device are unavailable the alternative other than submitting a CSR to the CA is to generate a self signed certificate gt To create and install a self signed certificate 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab Provide the information requested Field Type this information Country ISO Code The country where your company is located Use the standard ISO country code For a list of ISO codes visit the SO website httpz www iso org iso counitry codes iso 3166 code lists htm State or Province The full name of the state or province where your company is located Locality The city where your company is located Organization The registered name of your company Organizational Unit The name of your department Common Name The fully qualified domain name FQDN of your PX device Email Address An email address where you or another administrative user can be reached Key Length Select the key length bits from the drop down list in this field A larger key length e
146. AD server s domain name is techadssl com and its IP address is 192 168 56 3 The AD protocol is NOT encrypted over SSL The AD server uses the default TCP port 389 Anonymous bind is used To configure LDAP authentication Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the LDAP radio button to activate remote LDAP LDAPS server authentication Click New to add an LDAP LDAPS server for authentication The Create new LDAP Server Configuration dialog appears Provide the PX with the information about the AD server IP Address Hostname Type the domain name techadss1 com or IP address 192 168 56 3 Important Without the SSL encryption enabled you can type either the domain name or IP address in this field but you must type the fully qualified domain name if the SSL encryption is enabled Use settings from LDAP server Leave the checkbox deselected Type of LDAP Server Select Microsoft Active Directory from the drop down list LDAP over SSL Have the checkbox deselected since the SSL encryption is not applied in this example Port Ensure the field is set to 389 SSL Port and Server Certificate Skip the two fields since the SSL encryption is not enabled Use Bind Credentials Do NOT select this checkbox because anonymous bind is used Bind DN Bind Password and Confirm Bind Password Skip the three fields because anonymous
147. AOBgNVBAoTLUShdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uY XVOaWNzIGFuZCBTCcGFjZSBBZG1pbmlz dHJhdGlvbjAmFxESNjA1MjgxMzQSMDUrMDgwMBcROTgwNTI4MTMOOTA1KzA4MDAW ZzELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMXxNjAOBgNVBAOTLUShdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uY XVOaWNZzIGFu ZCBTCcGFjZSBBZG1pbmlzdHJhdGlvbjEgMAkGA1UEBRMCMT Y wEwYDVQQDEwXTdGV2 ZSBTY2hvY2gwWDALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEDSQAwRgJBALrAw y Y dgxmzNP tsOUyf6Bp miJYktU w4NG67ULaN4B5CnEz7k57s903YY3LecETgQ5iQHmkwIYDTL2fTgVfwOC AQOjgaswgagwZAYDVROZAQH BFowWDBWMFQXxCzAJBgNVBAYTAIVTMT YwNAYDVQQK Ey 10YXRpb25hbCBBZXJvbmF 1dGljcyBhbmQgU3BhY 2UgQWRtaW5pc3RyY XRpb24x DTALBgNVBAMTBENSTDEwFwYDVROBAQH BAOwC4AJODMyOTcwODEWMBgGA1UdAgQR MA8ECT gzMjk3MDgyM4ACBSAwDQY DVROKBAY wBAMCBkAwCw Y JKoZIhvcNAQEEA4GB AH2y1VCEw A4zaXzSYZJTTUi3uawbbFiS2yxHvgf28 8Js00HXk1H1w2d6qOHH21 X82tZXd 0JtGOg1T9usFFBDvYK8OOebgz P5ELJnBL2 atObEuJy 1Z2ZZOpBDWINR3 WKkDNLCGITkCKpOF SEWIrVDwh54NNevkCQRZita z4IBO END CERTIFICATE 5 Select and copy the contents excluding the starting line containing BEGIN CERTIFICATE and the ending line containing END CERTIFICATE as illustrated below MIICjTCCAfigAwIBAgIEMaYgRzALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQwRTELMAk GAIUEBhMCVVMXxNjAOBgNVBAoTLU5hdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uYXVOaW NzIGFuZCBTcGFjZzSBBZGlpbmlzdHJhdGlvbjAmFxE5NjA1MjgxM zObMDUrMDgwMBCROTgwNTIAMTMOOTAlKzAA4MDAwZZELMAkGAIUE BhMCVVMxNjAOBgNVBAOoTLU5hdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uYXVOaWNzIGFE uZCBTcGFjZSBBZGlpbmlzdHJhdGlvbjEgMAkGAl1UEBRMCMTYwEw N j YDVOODEwxTdGV2ZSBTY2hvY2gwWDALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEDSQAwR gJBALrAwyYdgxmzNP
148. AP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is generally considered more secure because the user name and password are encrypted while in PAP they are transmitted in the clear By default the PX uses the standard RADIUS port 1812 authentication and 1813 accounting If you prefer to use non standard ports change the ports Type the timeout period in seconds in the Timeout field This sets the maximum amount of time to establish contact with the RADIUS server before timing out Default is 1 second Type the number of retries permitted in the Retries field Default is 3 Type the shared secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Shared Secret fields The shared secret is necessary to protect communication with the RADIUS server To verify if the authentication configuration is set correctly you may click Test Connection to check whether the PX can connect to the remote authentication server successfully Tip You can also do this by using the Test Connection button in the Authentication Settings dialog Click OK to save the changes The new RADIUS server is listed in the Authentication Settings dialog To add additional RADIUS servers repeat Steps 3 to 9 for each additional server S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 13 Click OK to save the changes RADIUS authentication is now in place Sorting the Access Order The order of the authentication server list determin
149. Association Use this page to name the rack PDU and its outlets Names can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include special characters Note When a rack PDU is associated with a target server port the outlet name is replaced by the target server name even if you assigned another name to the outlet gt To name the rack PDU and outlets Note CommandCenter Secure Gateway does not recognize rack PDU names containing spaces 1 Enter the Name of the rack PDU if needed 2 Change the Outlet Name if desired Outlet names default to the outlet 481 482 Appendix E Integration 3 Click OK Home gt Device Settings gt Port Configuration gt Port PowerStrip PCR8 Dutlets Humber Name Port Association Dominion Port7 h LI w da o a 3 g a A o 3 D o X zie Raritan Appendix E Integration Associating Outlets with Target Servers on KX Il and LX The Port page opens when you click on a port on the Port Configuration page From this page you can make power associations change the port name to something more descriptive and update target server settings if you are using the D2CIM VUSB CIM The CIM Type and the Port Name fields are prepopulated note that the CIM type cannot be changed A server can have up to four power plugs and you can associate a different rack PDU power strip with each From this page you can define those associati
150. B for your PX is used by the SNMP manager Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your PX to use with your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Downloading SNMP MIB on page 270 4 Click OK to save the changes On the Notifications tab select the Enable checkbox to enable the SNMP pnotification feature 6 From the Notification Type drop down select the type of SNMP notification e SE Raritan 7 For SNMP INFORM communications leave the resend settings at their default or Chapter 7 Using SNMP a Inthe Timeout sec field enter the interval of time in seconds after which a new inform communication is resent if the first is not received For example resend a new inform communication once every 3 seconds b Inthe Number of Retries field enter the number of times you want to resend the inform communication if it fails For example inform communications are resent up to 5 times when the initial communication fails 8 Inthe Host fields enter the IP address of the device s you want to access This is the address to which notifications are sent by the SNMP system agent You can specify up to 3 SNMP destinations 9 Inthe Port fields enter the port number used to access the device s 10 In the Community fields enter the SNMP community string to access the device s The community is the group representing the PX and all SNMP manageme
151. Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 4 config ft sensor externalsensor 4 temperature upperWarning enable Setting the Sensor s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of a numeric environmental sensor xternalsensor n sensor type lowerCritical option zie Raritan Variables n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the spe
152. Commands sse eene nennen nnne nens 404 Role Configuration Commands ssssssssssssssss esee nnne 417 EnergyWise Configuration Commands sssssssssssseeeeeeee nnne 423 Asset Management Commands sess nennen nnne nnne nnne 425 Serial Port Configuration Commands sssssssssssseseeeeeeeen nennen 433 Setting the History Buffer Length sssssssssesssssssesee enne 434 M lti Commarnd SEA cocer eae aaa medi din th eg te rent d ede utn eod sau n uod eque de nde tia 435 Quitting the Configuration Mode sssssssssseseeeeeeeeeene nennen nennen nnns 436 Load Shedding Configuration Commands seen 437 Enabling or Disabling Load Shedding sisisi ennaii ansaan 437 Power Control Operations cased eset tie neo er sed existence Matte ai aea Cade cxu se lu SENKER 438 Turning On tlie Outlet s iine eu tet Ern eni ta eri eee Eon x GR REM Fade uuu e Laesi 438 Turning Off The OUtlet s cetero teuer E xx XE Ee RR TE uuo Foe ERR REEL AKI Tais 439 Power Cycling the Outlet s uie niat cepe ox as ecuu e ERR RR RE OR R TE ERE REXER iaga 440 UMDIOCKING a US T RERO OE D DOLO LUNO 441 Resetting the PX te cette renes eei citatis c er e SAA EEE uat EEEa eulx e eeu Ru rui AES 442 Restarting the PU x itte eti te ex tesdbc en Ex Ranae ie RR E ux Deu LX D Na ER 442 Resetting to Factory Defaults tice arsi RR te cres e Ex e Sx eruat
153. Depending on where you want to add a new firewall rule in the list the command syntax for adding a rule varies e Pv4 commands gt To add anew rule to the bottom of the IPv4 rules list use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule add lt ip_mask gt lt policy gt gt To add a new IPv4 rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use this command syntax zie Raritan dis Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config config config config config 346 security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule add lt ip_mask gt lt policy gt lt insert gt lt rule_number gt OR security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule add insert rule number ip mask policy IPv6 commands gt To add anew rule to the bottom of the IPv6 rules list use this command syntax security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule add ip mask policy gt To add a new IPv6 rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use this command syntax security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule add ip mask policy insert rule number 0h uc security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule add insert rule number ip mask policy Variables e ip mask is the combination of the IP address and subnet mask values which are separated with a slash For example an IPv4 combination looks like this 192 168 94 222 24 e policy is one of the options accept drop or reject Policy
154. Description accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface e insert is one of the options insertAbove or insertBelow Option Description insertAbove Inserts the new rule above the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number insertBelow Inserts the new rule below the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number 1 e rule number is the number of the existing rule which you want to insert the new rule above or below Example The following command adds a new IPv4 access control rule and specifies its location in the list config f security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule add 192 168 84 123 24 accept insertAbove 5 Hesults e Anew IPv4 firewall control rule is added allowing all packets from the IPv4 address 192 168 84 123 to be accepted e The newly added rule is inserted above the 5th rule That is the new rule becomes the 5th rule and the original 5th rule becomes the 6th rule Modifying a Firewall Rule Depending on what to modify in an existing rule the command syntax varies e Pv4 commands gt The command syntax to modify
155. E port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 rack unit is the index number of the desired rack unit tag port on the selected asset sensor The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface blade slot is one of the options allor a specific number of a tag port on the blade extension strip Option all A specific number Description Displays the information of all tag ports on the specified blade extension strip connected to a particular rack unit Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data Displays the information of the specified tag port on the blade extension strip connected to a particular rack unit The number of each tag port on the blade extension strip is available on the Asset Strip page 299 300 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Event Log The command used to show the event log begins with show eventlog You can add either the imit or class parameters or both to show specific events gt To show the last 30 entries in the event log show eventlog gt To show a specific number of last entries in the event log show eventlog limit lt n gt gt To show a specific type of events only show eventlog class lt event_type gt gt To show a specific number of last entries associated with a specific
156. EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT is no longer alarmed Server I SERVER is no longer being monitored Server I SERVER is reachable User USERNAME from host I USERIP disabled EnergyWise Asset tag with ID TTAGID disconnected at rack unit RACKUNIT slot RACKSLOT of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME Blade extension with ID ITAGID disconnected at rack unit RACKUNIT of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME 203 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Asset Management gt Device Config Changed Asset Management gt Rack Unit Config Changed Asset Management gt Blade Extension Overflow Asset Management gt Composite Asset Strip Composition Changed RF Code Tag gt Connected LHX gt Connected LHX gt Operational State LHX gt Sensor gt Unavailable LHX gt Sensor gt Above upper critical threshold LHX gt Sensor gt Above upper warning threshold LHX gt Sensor gt Below lower warning threshold LHX gt Sensor gt Below lower critical threshold LHX gt Emergency Cooling 204 Config parameter PARAMETER of asset strip STRIPID ISTRIPNAME changed to VALUE by user USERNAME Config of rack unit RACKUNIT of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME changed by user USERNAME to LED Operation Mode LEDOPMODE LED Color LEDCOLOR LED Mode LEDMODE Blade extension overflow occurred on strip STRIPID STRIPNAME Compos
157. Enabling SNMP zie Raritan Using SNMP This SNMP section helps you set up the PX for use with an SNMP manager The PX can be configured to send traps or informs to an SNMP manager as well as receive GET and SET commands in order to retrieve status and configure some basic settings In This Chapter Enabling SNMP ssssssssssssssesee ener nnne nennen 263 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 ssssssseses 264 Configuring SNMP Notifications ssseeeenne 265 SNMP Gets and Sets ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeee eene 269 By default SNMP v1 v2c is enabled on the PX so the PX can communicate with an SNMP manager If you have disabled the SNMP it must be enabled to communicate with an SNMP manager Note that read only access is enabled and the community string is public gt To enable SNMP 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings x General Notifications SNMP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 v2c 7 enable Read Community String pubic Write Community String SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 F enable MIB II System Group sysContact sysame sysLocation Download MB OK Cancel 263 264 Chapter 7 Using SNMP 2 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v1 v2c field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v1 or v2c protocol Type the S
158. Environmental Sensors 222 224 227 Configuring IP Protocol Settings 315 Configuring KSX II Ports 486 Configuring NTP Server Settings xvi 272 Configuring Rack PDU Power Strip Targets 480 Configuring SNMP Notifications 208 209 220 265 506 Configuring Temperature and Fan Thresholds 253 Configuring the Asset Sensor 50 233 Configuring the Feature Port 113 252 Configuring the Firewall e 128 Configuring the IPv4 Parameters 322 Configuring the IPv6 Parameters 326 Configuring the LHX Device 251 252 Configuring the PX 16 101 Configuring the PX Device and Network 305 Configuring the Serial Port 114 Configuring the SMTP Settings 117 185 186 Configuring the SNMP Settings 107 121 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 107 264 Configuring Webcam Storage 245 247 Configuring Webcams 242 243 247 Connecting a GSM Modem Optional 59 Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional xvi 58 83 242 243 Connecting a Rack PDU 480 Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional 59 113 251 Connecting AMS M2 Z Asset Sensors Optional 54 57 Connecting an RF Code PDU Sensor Tag Optional 60 Connecting Asset Sensors to the PX 49 54 Connecting Blade Extension Strips 51 Connecting Detectors Switches to DPX CC2 TR 36 37 Connecting Detectors Switches to New DPX CC2 TR xvi 36 38 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional 93 58 221
159. Equipment b Plug the other end into the SENSOR port on the PX device 2 Connect Raritan environmental sensors to any of the four OUT ports on the hub Raritan sensor hubs CANNOT be cascaded so at most a sensor hub can be connected to each SENSOR port on the PX device This diagram illustrates a configuration with a sensor hub connected The PX device Raritan provided phone cable Raritan PX sensor hub O 00o Raritan environmental sensors gt To connect environmental sensors via a Raritan Y cable 1 Plug the connector of a Y cable into the SENSOR port on your PX device a SENSOR 2 AY cable has two sensor ports Plug Raritan environmental sensors into the Y cable s sensor ports S Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 3 Repeat the above steps if there are additional SENSOR ports on your PX model If there are any Raritan air flow sensors attached make sure that sensor faces the source of the wind such as a fan in the appropriate orientation as indicated by the arrow on that sensor Contact Closure Sensors Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR can detect the open and closed status of the connected detectors switches This feature requires the integration of at least a discrete on off detector switch to work properly The types of discrete detectors switches that can be plugged into DPX CC2 TR include those for e Door open closed detection e Door l
160. External sensor EXTSENSORNAME External sensor in slot EXTSENSORSLOT asserted below lower warning External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOT asserted below lower critical External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOTT unavailable External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOTT is closed External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOT is on External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOTT is alarmed Server SERVER is now being monitored Server SERVER is unreachable User USERNAME from host USERIP enabled EnergyWise State of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME changed to STATE Asset tag with ID TAGID connected at rack unit RACKUNIT slot RACKSLOT of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME Blade extension with ID TAGID connected at rack unit RACKUNIT of asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME Firmware update for asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME status changed to STATE EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT deasserted below lower warning External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT deasserted below lower critical External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT available External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT is open External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOTT is off External sensor
161. Index Changing the Sensor Name 370 Changing the Sorting 91 217 221 Changing the SSH Configuration 333 Changing the SSH Port 334 Changing the SSH Settings 106 122 Changing the Telnet Configuration 332 Changing the Telnet Port 333 Changing the Telnet Settings 106 Changing the UDP Port 425 Changing the User List View 124 Changing the View of a List 90 124 128 247 Changing Your Own Password 415 Changing Your Password 80 Checking Power Strip Status 492 Checking Server Monitoring States 221 Checking the Branch Circuit Rating xvi 14 Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands 369 Circuit Breaker Information 284 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation 5 6 7 9 10 11 Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information 291 Circuit Breakers 71 Clearing Event Entries 216 Clearing Event Log 304 Clearing Information 304 CLI Command Applicability 500 Closing a Local Connection 276 Collapsing the Tree 85 Combining Asset Sensors 47 Command History 301 Commands for Circuit Breaker Sensors 394 Commands for Environmental Sensors 399 Commands for Inlet Pole Sensors 386 Commands for Inlet Sensors 380 Commands for Outlet Sensors 374 Components of an Event Rule 180 Configuration Commands 502 Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor 41 43 230 231 Configuring a PX on Dominion SX 490 Configuring a Specific Rack Unit 234 235 Configuring
162. Installation and Configuration For the static IPv4 configuration configure these parameters To set Use this command Static IPv4 network ipv4 ipAddress ip address address where ip address is the IP address you want to assign Subnet mask network ipv4 subnetMask lt netmask gt where netmask is the subnet mask Gateway network ipv4 gateway ip address where ip address is the IP address of the gateway Primary DNS network ipv4 primaryDNSServer server lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the primary DNS server Secondary network ipv4 DNS server secondaryDNSServer lt ip optional address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the secondary DNS server f If you enabled IPv6 in the earlier step configure the IPv6 network parameters To set Use this command IP network ipv6 configuration ipConfigurationMode mode method where mode is either automatic for auto configuration default or static for specifying a static IP address For the IPv6 DHCP automatic configuration configure this parameter 2 Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Use this command Preferred host network ipv6 name preferredHostName lt name gt optional where lt name gt is the preferred host name Tip To override the DHCP assigned IPv6 DNS servers with those you specify manually type this command networ
163. LAN USB B USB A USB B USB A USB B Q Ser Number Device role 1 Master device e Slave 1 e Slave 2 o Slave 3 Note On a master device the networking mode shows Wired On a slave device the networking mode shows Wired USB See Identifying the Cascaded Devices on page 95 S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Tip The USB cascading configuration can be a mixture of diverse Raritan products that support the USB cascading feature such as Raritan PX and EMX Note that it requires the EMX firmware version 2 2 or later to support this USB cascading function The limit of up to four Raritan devices in one USB cascading configuration remains unchanged Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional zie Raritan If your PX device is designed to use a cable retention clip install the clip before connecting a power cord A cable retention clip prevents the connected power cord from coming loose or falling off The use of cable retention clips is highly recommended for regions with high seismic activities and environments where shocks and vibrations are expected These optional clips come in various sizes to accommodate diverse power cords used on IT equipment which are connected to C13 or C19 outlets You can request a cable retention kit containing different sizes of clips from you reseller Make sure you use a clip that fits the power cord snugly to facilitate the installation or
164. LE added by user USERNAME from host USERIP Role TTARGETROLE modified by user USERNAME from host 199 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Event Context User Administration gt Role deleted User Activity gt gt User logon state User Activity gt gt Authentication failure User Activity gt gt User accepted the Restricted Service Agreement User Activity gt gt User blocked User Activity gt gt Session timeout 200 PDU gt Load Shedding gt Enabled Inlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Unavailable Inlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper critical threshold Inlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper warning threshold Inlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower warning threshold Inlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower critical threshold Inlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt gt Unavailable Inlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper critical threshold Inlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper warning threshold Default Assertion Message when the Event TRUE USERIP Role TARGETROLE deleted by user USERNAME from host USERIP User USERNAME from host USERIP logged in Authentication failed for user USERNAME from host USERIP User USERNAME from host F USERIP accepted the Restricted Service Agreement User USERNAME f
165. LHX heat exchanger on the PX See Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support on page 252 Configure the connected heat exchanger See Configuring the LHX Device on page 252 Now you can remotely monitor or control the connected LHX heat exchanger via the PX To monitor the heat exchanger see Monitoring the LHX Device on page 254 To control the heat exchanger see Turning the LHX On or Off on page 257 251 252 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support By default Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger support is disabled As such support needs to be enabled before the device appears in the navigation tree or on the dashboard Additionally Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger support must be enabled in order for the LHX MIB to be accessible through SNMP gt To enable the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger 1 Select Device Settings gt Features and then select the Schroff Heat Exchanger checkbox on the menu Click Yes to confirm Reboot the PX Configuring the LHX Device After enabling the LHX support on the PX the PX should automatically detect the connected LHX device and display it under the Feature Port folder unless the Feature Port is set to a mode different than the Auto mode If so change the Feature Port mode so that the LHX device is correctly displayed in the web interface See Configuring the Feature Port on page 113 Besides the PX allows
166. Line Interface Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker to 5A It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor ocp 3 current lowerCritical 5 Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarn
167. Location 225 227 Determining the Time Setup Method 340 Device Management 94 Device States and Icon Variations 252 255 257 Diagnostic Commands 443 Different CLI Modes and Prompts 275 276 279 304 305 437 438 Differential Air Pressure Sensors 46 Disabling External Authentication 154 Displaying the Asset Sensor Information 237 Displaying the PDU Information 94 Dominion KSX II 484 Dominion KSX II or SX Configuration xvii 113 484 Dominion KX II Configuration 113 480 Dominion PX Explorer Pane 82 Dominion SX 489 Downloading Diagnostic Information 250 Downloading Key and Certificate Files 147 Raritan Index Downloading SNMP MIB 108 264 265 266 268 270 E Editing Firewall Rules 132 Editing Ping Monitoring Settings 220 Editing Role Based Access Control Rules 141 Editing the Authentication Server Settings 153 Email and SMS Message Placeholders 186 187 191 206 Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support 184 192 251 252 Enabling and Editing the Security Banner xvi 137 Enabling Data Logging 116 Enabling External and Local Authentication Services 155 Enabling IPv4 or IPv6 315 Enabling Login Limitations 135 Enabling or Disabling a User Profile 408 Enabling or Disabling Data Logging 31 1 Enabling or Disabling EnergyWise 423 Enabling or Disabling Load Shedding 437 Enabling or Disabling Modbus 33
168. MP on page 263 for more details In addition using an NTP time server ensures accurately time stamped measurements Enabling Data Logging By default data logging is disabled Only users having the Administrator or Change Data Logging Settings permissions can enable or disable this feature See Setting Up Roles on page 125 gt To configure the data logging feature 1 Choose Device Settings Data Logging The Data Logging Options dialog appears 2 Toenable the data logging feature select the enable checkbox in the Enable Data Logging field 3 Type a number in the Measurements Per Log Entry field Valid range is from 1 to 600 The default is 60 4 Verify that all sensor logging is enabled If not click Enable All in Page to have all sensors selected 5 Click OK to save the changes Important Although it is possible to selectively enable disable logging for individual sensors on the PX in Step 4 itis NOT recommended and this capability may be removed in the future SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Configuring the SMTP Settings The PX can be configured to send alerts or event messages to a specific administrator by email To do this you have to configure the SMTP settings and enter an IP address for your SMTP server and a sender s email address Note See Event Rules and Actions on page 180 for information on creating event rules to send email notifications 1 9 T
169. Mail on page 186 for information configuring email messages to be sent when specified events occur Default Assertion Message when the Default Assertion Message Event TRUE when the Event FALSE System started System reset performed by user USERNAME from host USERIP Device gt Firmware validation Firmware validation failed by user failed USERNAME from host USERIP Device gt Firmware update Firmware upgrade started from version started OLDVERSION to version VERSIONJ by user USERNAME from host USERIP Device Firmware update Firmware upgraded successfully from completed version OLDVERSION J to version Device Firmware upda VERSION by user USERNAME from host USERIP te failed Firmware upgrade failed from version lOLDVERSION J to version VERSIONJ by user USERNAME from host USERIP Device Device identification Config parameter PARAMETER changed changed to VALUE by user USERNAME from host USERIP S Raritan Event Context Device gt Device settings saved Device gt Device settings restored Device gt Event log cleared Device gt Bulk configuration saved Device gt Bulk configuration copied Device gt Network interface link state is up Device gt Sending SMTP message failed Device gt An LDAP error occurred Device gt An Radius error occurred Device gt USB slave connected Device gt Features gt Schroff LHX
170. NMP read only community string in the Read Community String field Usually the string is public Type the read write community string in the Write Community String field Usually the string is private 3 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v3 field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v3 protocol Tip You can permit or disallow a user to access the PX via the SNMP v3 protocol See Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 on page 264 4 Enter the MIB II system group information if applicable a sysContact the contact person in charge of the system being contacted b sysName the name assigned to the system Cc SysLocation the location of the system 5 Select the MIB to be downloaded The SNMP MIB for your PX is used by the SNMP manager Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your PX to use with your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Downloading SNMP MIB on page 270 6 Click OK to save the changes Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 The SNMP v3 protocol allows for encrypted communication To take advantage of this users need to have an Authentication Pass Phrase and Privacy Pass Phrase which act as shared secrets between them and the PX gt To configure users for SNMP v3 encrypted communication 1 Choose User Management Users The Manage Users dialog appears Select the user by clicking it
171. PS camera in the Device Manager on the computer connected to it gt In Linux No additional drivers are required but you must provide the name of the tty device which can be found in the output of the dmesg after connecting the PX to the computer Usually the tty device is dev ttyACM or dev ttyUSB where is an integer number For example if you are using the kermit terminal program and the tty device is dev ttyACMO perform the following commands gt set line dev ttyACMO gt connect zie Raritan i 20 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Connecting the PX to Your Network To use the web interface to administer the PX you must connect the PX to your local area network LAN The PX can be connected to a wired or wireless network Note If your PDU is not implemented with the wireless networking feature or if it will be used as a master device in the USB cascading configuration make a wired connection gt To make a wired connection 1 Connect a standard Category 5e 6 UTP cable to the ETHERNET port on the PX 2 Connect the other end of the cable to your LAN See this diagram for the ETHERNET port location on Zero U models T 1 ae ep a om au Raritan c o Om atier D mise gum L Co remer inme QQ For 1U 2U models the ETHERNET port is usually located on the back except for a few models This diagram shows the port on the back SENSOR 1 r SENSOR 2 p Warning Acci
172. PX device Outlet sensor readings RMS current A RMS voltage V Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh The outlet readings turn to zero if the associated circuit breaker trips or the fuse blows Note If your PX device is not implemented with any overcurrent protectors the overcurrent protector information is not available Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 157 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Outlet Switching This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs You can change the power status of one or multiple outlets with one click in the web interface To change the power state the PDU must be implemented with the outlet switching function and you must have the Switch Outlet permission Note If your PX device does not support outlet switching no outlets can be switched on off regardless of the permissions you have Switching Multiple or All Outlets This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs The power state can be changed regardless of each outlet s current state That is you can turn the outlets on or off or power cycle them even if they are already in the selected state Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on gt To turn on or off mul
173. PX prompts you to log in Note that both of user name and password are case sensitive a At the Username prompt type admin and press Enter b Atthe Password prompt type raritan and press Enter You are prompted to change the password if this is the first time you log in to the PX Follow the onscreen instructions to type your new password The prompt appears when you log in successfully Type config and press Enter To configure network settings type appropriate commands and press Enter All commands are case sensitive a Toset the networking mode type this command network mode mode S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration where mode is either wired for wired connection default or wireless for wireless connection b Forthe wired network mode you may configure the LAN interface settings In most scenarios the default setting auto works well and should not be changed unless required To set Use this command LAN interface network interface speed LANInterfaceSpeed option where option is auto 10Mbps or 100Mbps LAN interface network interface duplex mode LANInterfaceDuplexMode lt mode gt where mode is half full or auto Tip You can combine multiple commands to configure multiple parameters at a time For example network interface LANInterfaceSpeed option LANInterfaceDuplexMode mode c Forthe wireless network mode you must con
174. PX takes the action only when e d the event occurs This means the status of SO CCIEU OVOME WME the described event transits from FALSE to or false TRUE Deasserted The PX takes the action only when the event condition disappears This means the status of the described event transits from TRUE to FALSE Both The PX takes the action both when the event occurs asserts and when the event condition disappears deasserts e For connection state for USB cascading and auxiliary RS 485 devices assertion is displayed as connected and deassertion as disconnected Discrete on off Available radio buttons include Alarmed No sensor state change longer alarmed and Both Alarmed The PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor enters the alarmed state that is the abnormal state No longer alarmed The PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor returns to normal Both The PX takes the action both when the chosen sensor enters or quits the alarmed state Sensor availability Available radio buttons include Unavailable Available and Both Unavailable The PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor is NOT detected and becomes unavailable Available The PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor is detected and becomes available Both The PX takes the action both when the chosen sensor becomes unavailable or available zie Raritan es Chapter 6 Using the Web Inte
175. Parameters You must configure wireless parameters including Service Set Identifier SSID authentication method Pre Shared Key PSK and Basic Service Set Identifier BSSID after the wireless networking mode is enabled A wireless configuration command begins with network wireless Note If current networking mode is not wireless the SSID PSK and BSSID values are not applied until the networking mode is changed to wireless In addition a message appears indicating that the active network interface is not wireless The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Setting the SSID This command syntax specifies the SSID string config f network wireless SSID ssid Variables e ssid is the name of the wireless access point which consists of Up to 32 ASCII characters No spaces ASCII codes 0x20 Ox7E SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command assigns myssid as the SSID config network wireless SSID myssid Setting the Authentication Method This command syntax sets the wireless authentication method to either PSK or Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP config network wireless authMethod lt method gt Variables e method is one of the authentication methods PSK or EAP Method Description PSK The wireless authentication method is set to PSK EAP The wireless authentication method is set to EAP Example Th
176. R on outlet OUTLET deasserted below lower warning Sensor OUTLETSENSOR on outlet OUTLET deasserted below lower critical Outlet OUTLET state changed to off Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet OUTLET available Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet OUTLET deasserted above upper critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet 201 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Event Context Above upper warning threshold Outlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt Below lower warning threshold Outlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt Below lower critical threshold Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt gt Unavailable Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt Above upper critical threshold Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper warning threshold Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower warning threshold Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower critical threshold Overcurrent Protector gt gt Sensor gt gt Open Closed External Sensor Slot gt gt Numeric Sensor gt Unavailable External Sensor Slot gt gt Numeric Sensor gt Above upper critical threshold External Sensor Slot gt gt Numeric Sensor gt Above upper warning threshold 202 Default Assertion Message when the Event TRUE ass
177. RIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 10 OUTLET 11 OUTLET 12 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 13 OUTLET 14 OUTLET 15 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER Raritan Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 16 OUTLET 17 OUTLET 18 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 19 OUTLET 20 OUTLET 21 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER zie Raritan 465 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 22 OUTLET 23 OUTLET 24 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER 466 Types of adapters Types of cables Name of software program SE Raritan Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults For security reasons the PX device can be reset to factory defaults only at the local console Important Exercise caution before resetting the PX to its factory defaults This erases existing information and customized settings such as user profiles threshold values and so on Only active energy data and firmware upgrade history are retained forever You can use either the reset button or the command line interface CLI to reset the PX In This Chapter Using the Reset B
178. Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Rebooting the PX Device You can remotely reboot the PX device via the web interface Resetting the PX does not interrupt the operation of connected servers because there is no loss of power to outlets Outlets that have been powered on prior to the reset remain powered on and outlets that have been powered off prior to the reset remain powered off during and after the reset gt To reboot the device 1 Choose Maintenance gt Unit Reset The Reset Device dialog appears Reset Device gx Do you really want to reset the device Click Yes to reset the PX A message appears with a countdown timer showing the remaining time of the operation It takes about one minute to complete 4 When the reset is complete the Login page opens Now you can log back in to the PX device Note If you are not redirected to the Login page after the reset is complete click the underlined text this link in the message The PX is shipped with one built in user profile admin which is used for initial login and configuration This profile has full permissions and should be reserved for the system administrator It cannot be deleted and its permissions are not user configurable except for the SNMP v3 permission All users must have a user profile which specifies a login name and password and contains additional optional information about the user Every user profile must have at
179. S current is set to 20A and enabled at the same time zie Raritan T Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 436 config Example 3 Combination of SSID and PSK Parameters This multi command syntax configures both of SSID and PSK parameters simultaneously for the wireless feature config network wireless SSID myssid PSK encryp_key Results e The SSID value is set to myssid e The PSK value is set to encryp_key Example 4 Combination of Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower Warning Settings The following multi command syntax configures Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower Warning thresholds for the outlet 5 RMS current simultaneously sensor outlet 5 current upperCritical disable upperWarning enable lowerWarning 1 0 Results e The Upper Critical threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is disabled e The Upper Warning threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is enabled e The Lower Warning threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is set to 1 0A and enabled at the same time Quitting the Configuration Mode Both of apply and cancel commands let you quit the configuration mode The difference is that apply saves all changes you made in the configuration mode while cancel aborts all changes gt To quit the configuration mode use either command config apply ORs config cancel The prompt appears after pressing Enter indicating that you have entered the administrator mode S Raritan
180. ST lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Mode Description enable Daylight savings time is enabled disable Daylight savings time is disabled S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command enables the daylight savings time config time autoDST enable Security Configuration Commands A security configuration command begins with security Firewall Control You can manage firewall control features through the CLI The firewall control lets you set up rules that permit or disallow access to the PX device from a specific or a range of IP addresses e An IPv4 firewall configuration command begins with security ipAccessControl ipv4 e AnIPv6 firewall configuration command begins with security ipAccessControl ipv6 zie Raritan xin Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Modifying the Firewall Control Parameters There are different commands for modifying firewall control parameters IPv4 commands gt To enable or disable the IPv4 firewall control feature use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl ipv4 enabled lt option gt gt To determine the default IPv4 firewall control policy use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl ipv4 defaultPolicy lt policy gt e IPv6 commands gt To enable or disable the IPv6 firewall control feature use this command syntax config security ipAcces
181. Settings Maecenance Help Dominios PX Explorer Dashboard O W Osstisard i iinit smn Gren L1 RNS Current aml Se a Clostets 12 RNS Current Clovescarrert Proieriors LJ RNS Current MP E Unbatanced Current o or ino LLA42 1243 L341 Votage 426V 428V 430 V 4 CI Webcam Managerent ow Acie Poner ay Snapanats ti webean Apparent Power OVA Power Factor 100 Active Enesgy 10688 Wh Merted Sensors Sensor Reading State Ostlets Nureber of Outlets On 35 Warrbe of Outlets OF o Overcurrent Protectors 6 3 Nerve Level Curert Drawn CurertReranrg Status Protected Cusen Overcurrent Protector Ct opa 204 coso 1 6 2 Overcurrent Protector C2 00A moa cesse 7 12 3 Overcurreti Protector C3 004 moa teses 33 18 4 Overcurrest Pratecter Ca 004 moa teses 15 24 E Overcorrect Ivotecter CS 004 nia Ld 25 30 E Overssirett Protector C8 00A maa eset EE External Sensors 0 managed 0 unmanaged name Res ng State I A my PX 13210253216 E Adremerstor atom Dy Last Loge MITZ 4 14 AU Q sinat au zie Raritan n 80 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Logout Changing Your Password Normal users can change their own passwords if they have the Change Own Password permission See Setting Up Roles on page 125 If you are the administrator admin the PX web interface automatically prompts you to change the password if this is your first time to log in to the PX If you have the Admin
182. Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab Provide the information requested In the Subject section Field Type this information Country ISO Code The country where your company is located Use the standard ISO country code For a list of ISO codes visit the SO website httpz www iso org iso counitry codes iso 3166 code lists htm State or Province The full name of the state or province where your company is located Locality The city where your company is located Organization The registered name of your company Organizational Unit The name of your department Common Name The fully qualified domain name FQDN of your PX device Email Address An email address where you or another administrative user can be reached Note All fields in the Subject section are mandatory except for the Organization Organizational Unit and Email Address fields If you generate a CSH without values entered in the required fields you cannot obtain third party certificates Inthe Key Creation Parameters section Field Do this Key Length Select the key length bits from the drop down list in this field A larger key length enhances the security but slows down the PX device s response Self Sign For requesting a certificate signed by the CA ensure this checkbox is NOT selected zie Raritan n 144 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Field Cha
183. Support User Administration gt User added User Administration gt User modified User Administration gt User deleted User Administration gt Password changed User Administration gt Password settings changed User Administration gt Role added User Administration gt Role modified zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Default Assertion Message when the Default Assertion Message Event TRUE when the Event FALSE Device settings saved from host USERIP Device settings restored from host USERIP Event log cleared by user USERNAME from host USERIP Bulk configuration saved from host USERIP Bulk configuration copied from host USERIP The IFNAME network interface link is The IFNAME network interface now up link is now down Sending SMTP message to RECIPIENTS using server SERVER failed An LDAP error occurred LDAPERRORDESC An Radius error occurred RADIUSERRORDESC USB slave connected USB slave disconnected Schroff LHX support enabled Schroff LHX support disabled User TTARGETUSER added by user USERNAME from host USERIP User TARGETUSER modified by user USERNAME from host USERIPJ User TTARGETUSER deleted by user USERNAMET from host USERIP Password of user TARGETUSER changed by user USERNAME from host USERIP Password settings changed by user USERNAME from host USERIP Role TARGETRO
184. This field indicates whether the PX detects the Connected connection to a slave device on its USB A port yes The connection to a slave device is detected po The connection to a slave device is NOT detected A master device shows Wired in the Networking Mode field and yes in the Cascaded Device Connected field Device Information x eve Infomation Met wo wo mu Interface Networkng Mode Wred Cascaded Device Connected yes IPv4 Address 192 168 X X Gateway 192 168 X X DNS Servers 192 168 X X 192 168 X X Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface AgSlave device in the middle of the cascaded configuration shows Wired USB in the Networking Mode field and yes in the Cascaded Device Connected field The final slave device shows Wired USB in the Networking Mode field and no in the Cascaded Device Connected field zie Raritan i Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Device Information x Device information Netwark DO X l Interface Networkng Mode Wired USB Cascaded Device Connected no IPv4 Address 192 168 X X Gateway 192 168 X X DNS Servers 192 168 X X 192 168 X X IPv6 Address Routes Naming the PDU The default name for PX is my PX You may give it a unique device name gt To change the device name 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name cha
185. X supports Network type 802 11 A B G N Protocol WPA2 RSN Key management WPA PSK or WPA EAP with PEAP and MSCHAPv2 authentication Encryption CCMP AES Important Raritan only supports specific wireless LAN adapters Supported 802 11 network protocols vary according to the wireless LAN adapter being used with the PX See USB Wireless LAN Adapters on page 21 zie Raritan 22 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Initial Network Configuration After the PX device is connected to your network you must provide it with an IP address and some additional networking information This section describes the initial configuration via a serial or USB connection Note To configure the PX via the LAN see Using the Web Interface on page 77 for using the web interface gt 1 To configure the PX device Go to the computer that you connected to the PX and open a communications program such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY Select the appropriate COM port and make sure the port settings are configured as follows Bits per second 115200 115 2Kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None Flow control None Tip For a USB connection you can find out which COM port is assigned to the PX by choosing Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager and locating the XXX Serial Console under the Ports group where XXX represents this product s name Press Enter The
186. You can change an existing role s settings except for the name gt To modify a role 1 Choose User Management gt Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Select the role you want to modify by clicking it Click Edit or double click the role The Edit Role XXX dialog appears where XXX is the role name Tip You can also access the Edit Role XXX dialog by clicking the Edit Role button in the Edit User XXX dialog Modify the text shown in the Description field if necessary To change the permissions click the Privileges tab Note You cannot change the Admin role s permissions 6 Todelete any permissions do this a Select the permission you want to remove by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones b Click Delete i Raritan Raritan 7 9 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To add any permissions do this a Click Add The Add Privileges to Role XXX dialog appears where XXX is the role name b Select the permission you want from the Privileges list c Ifthe permission you selected contains any argument setting the Arguments list is shown to the right Then select one or multiple arguments For example if the Switch Outlet permission is selected the Arguments list shows all outlets for you to determine whi
187. a connected asset tag by changing its color You can configure or change the color settings for all LEDs on the connected asset sensor s by following the procedure below This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges 1 2 3 6 To configure all LED colors Connect the asset sensor to the PX if it is not already Click on the Feature Ports folder in the navigation tree to expand it Click the desired asset sensor The page specific to that asset sensor opens in the right pane showing the asset sensor settings and information of all rack units tag ports Note You can also access this dialog by double clicking the asset sensor shown on the Dashboard page Click Setup on the asset sensor page The setup dialog for that asset sensor appears To change the LED color denoting the absence of a connected tag either click a color in the color palette or type the hexadecimal RGB value of the color in the Color without connected Tag field Click OK to save the changes Tip To make a specific LED s color settings different from other LEDs see Configuring a Specific Rack Unit on page 235 234 S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Configuring a Specific Rack Unit Inthe PX web interface a rack unit refers to a tag port on the asset sensor You can name a specific rack unit or change its LED color settings so that this LED behaves differently from others on the same asset
188. a cadre 232 Bulk Contiguravion ai ec 238 Backup and Restore of PX Device Settings ssssssssse 240 Webcam Mahagemieli us dauerte ett rnnt ern ona ahanda 242 INetwoflciDIagroSliCs oae dee v re rer pex pde oneri ta ste eu ade rusa nu 248 Viewing the Communication Log sse 249 Downloading Diagnostic Information sseeeese 250 Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger s es 251 Firmware UpOrade drop eene nt ud e entera et sace Rue ER La dees 258 Accessing the Help doaoocen detener brut vun tht eire ttu Ea cede 261 Supported Web Browsers zie Raritan The following web browsers can be used to access the PX web interface based on the firmware version 2 4 e Internet Explorer 8 and 9 e Firefox 10 e Safari 5 x MacOS Lion e Google Chrome 12 and 17 e Android 3 standard browser e OS 5 0 for both iPhone and iPad 77 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Logging in to the Web Interface To log in to the web interface you must enter a user name and password The first time you log in to the PX use the default user name admin and password raritan You are then prompted to change the password for security purposes Exception If you already changed the password for the admin account during the Initial Network Configuration on page 22 use the new password instead to log in to the web interface and the PX will NOT prompt you to change the
189. able the PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Modifying the IPv6 Settings You must enable the IPv6 protocol before you can modify the IPv6 network settings See Selecting the Internet Protocol on page 102 gt To modify the IPv6 settings 1 Choose Device Settings Network The Network Configuration dialog appears 103 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Click the IPv6 Settings tab 3 Inthe IP Auto Configuration field click the drop down arrow and select the desired option from the list Option Description Automatic To auto configure PX select Automatic With this option selected you can enter a preferred host name which is optional Type the host name in the Preferred Hostname field The host name Consists of alphanumeric characters and or hyphens a Cannot begin or end with a hyphen a Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Select the Specify DNS server manually checkbox if necessary Then type the address of the primary DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field The secondary DNSG server and DNS suffix are optional Static To manually assign an IP address select Static and enter the following information in the corresponding fields IP address Gateway a Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional DNS Suffix optional 4 Click OK to save the changes Note The PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS s
190. able on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section httpz www raritan com support firmware and documentation e Dominion KSX Il or SX Online Help Available on the Product Online Help section http www raritan com support online help Dominion KSX II After connecting a Dominion KSX II to the PX you can monitor the PDU and even control its outlets if the PDU is an outlet switching capable model S Raritan Appendix E Integration Overview The KSX II allows you to control Raritan PX and RPC series rack PDU power strip outlets Once a PX or RPC series is setup and then attached to the KSX II the rack PDU and its outlets can be controlled from the Powerstrip page in the KSX II interface This page is accessed by clicking on the Power menu at the top of the page The Powerstrip page will display rack PDUs attached to the KSX II for which the user has been granted appropriate port access permissions Note For information on setting up a PX see the Raritan PX User Guide From the Powerstrip page you are able to turn the outlets on and off as well as cycle their power You are also able to view the following power strip and outlet information e Powerstrip Device Information Name Model Temperature Current Amps Maximum Amps Voltage Power in Watts Power in Volts Ampere e Outlet Display Information Name Named assigned to the outlet when it was configured State On or Off s
191. acters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces ee Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command assigns the name Win XP to outlet 8 config outlet 8 name Win XP Changing an Outlet s Default State This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines the initial power condition of an outlet after the PDU powers up config outlet lt n gt stateOnDeviceStartup lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e option is one of the options off on lastKnownState and pduDefined Option Description off Switches OFF the outlet when the PX device powers up on Switches ON the outlet when the PX device powers up lastKnownState Restores the outlet to the previous status before the PX device powered down when powering up the PDU pduDefined Determines the outlet s default state according to the PDU defined setting Note Setting the outlet s default state to an option other than pduDefined overrides the PDU defined default state on that outlet See Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State on page 308 Example The following command makes the outlet 8 return to the last power state before powering down the PDU after you power it up again config outlet 8 stateOnDeviceStartup lastKnownState 367 368 Chapter 8 Usin
192. addresses regardless of the user s role deny Drops traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the user s role Tip You can combine both commands to modify all role based access control parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Example The following command sets two parameters of the role based IPv4 access control feature config ft security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 enabled true defaultPolicy allow zie Raritan Hesults e The role based IPv4 access control feature is enabled e The default policy is set to allow Managing Role Based Access Control Rules You can add delete or modify role based access control rules e An IPv4 role based access control command for managing rules begins with security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule e An IPv6 role based access control command for managing rules begins with security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule 361 362 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config config config config Adding a Role Based Access Control Rule Depending on where you want to add a new rule in the list the command syntax for adding a rule varies e Pv4 commands gt To add a new rule to the bottom of the IPv4 rules list use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule add lt start_ip gt lt end_ip gt lt role gt lt policy gt gt To add anew IPv4 rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use thi
193. age 89 You can view the summary of all circuit breakers at a time or the status of individual circuit breakers gt To view all circuit breakers status You can check the status of all circuit breakers at a time via either the Dashboard or Overcurrent Protectors page Using the Dashboard page a Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboard page opens in the right pane b Locate the Overcurrent Protectors section on the Dashboard page Using the Overcurrent Protectors page a Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 b Click Overcurrent Protectors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Overcurrent Protectors page opens in the right pane ue Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface gt To view a circuit breaker s details 1 Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane Setting Power Thresholds zie Raritan Setting and enabling the thresholds causes the PX to generate alert notifications when it detects that any component s power state crosses the thresholds There are four thresholds for each sensor Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Up
194. agement gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears 2 Select the user you want to delete by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Changing the User List View You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data See Changing the View of a List on page 90 Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units The measurement units used in your PX user interfaces can be changed according to your own preferences regardless of the permissions you have Tip Preferences can also be changed by administrators for specific users from the Preferences tab of the Manage Users dialog See Creating a User Profile on page 120 Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface Setting your preferences does not change the default measurement units which apply to all users before any individual user or the administrator sets preferred measurement units on a per user basis See Setting Up Default Measurement Units on page 112 for information on changing default measurement units If your preferences are different from the default measurement units your preferences rather than the defaults apply to your own PX user interfaces gt To change the measurement units apply to your PX graphical
195. ages are shown across the top of the page The following diagram shows a multi tab example Dashboard 3 my PX 192 168 84 68 Inlet 11 Outlets amp 9 Overcurrent Protectors amp External Sensors amp 4 With multiple pages opened you can take these actions To switch to one of the opened data pages click the corresponding tab If there are too many tabs to be all shown two arrows jel and gt appear at the left and right borders of the pane Click either arrow to navigate through all tabs 87 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To close any data page click the Close button a on the corresponding tab Logout Button Click the logout button when you want to log out of the web interface G logout Data Pane The right pane shows the data page of the selected tree item The data page includes the item s current status settings and a Setup button if available All tabs above the pane represent the opened data pages The highlighted tab indicates the current selection You can change the width of the pane to make the area larger or smaller gt To adjust the pane s width 1 Move the mouse pointer to the left border of the right pane 2 When the mouse pointer turns into a two way arrow drag the border horizontally to widen or shrink the pane More Information This section explains additional web interface elements or operations that are useful Warning Icon If the value yo
196. all PDUs added to Power IQ Select Validate and wait for discovery to complete before proceeding to check credentials and view the discovery process status as you add this PDU Optional See Validating PDU Credentials in the Power IQ User Guide Click Add 479 Appendix E Integration Note PDU discovery is complete once the PDU model type is determined SNMP fields such as contact or location values are not determined until this device is polled for the first time Once added the PDU appears in the PDU list Power IQ begins polling the PDU for sensor data You can configure how often Power IQ polls PDU See Configuring Polling Intervals in the Power IQ User Guide Dominion KX II Configuration 480 PX2 series PDUs can be connected to the Raritan s Dominion KX II device a digital KVM switch to provide one more alternative of power control Note that this integration requires the following firmware versions e Dominion KX Il 2 4 or later e PX2 series 2 2 or later Dominion KX II integration requires D2CIM PWR and straight CAT5 cable For more information on Dominion KX Il see either of the following e Dominion KX Il User Guide Available on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section http www raritan com support firmware and documentation e Dominion KX Il Online Help Available on the Product Online Help section http www raritan com supporvonline help Configuring Rack PDU Po
197. ame May Turner telephoneNumber 123 4567 Results e May s full name is specified as May Turner e May s telephone number is set to 123 4567 zie Raritan t Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 408 Enabling or Disabling a User Profile This command syntax enables or disables a user profile A user can log in to the PX device only after that user s user profile is enabled config user modify lt name gt enabled lt option gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the specified user profile false Disables the specified user profile Example The following command enables the user profile May config user modify May enabled true Forcing a Password Change This command syntax determines whether the password change is forced when a user logs in to the specified user profile next time user modify lt name gt forcePasswordChangeOnNextLogin lt option gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true A password change is forced on the user s next login false No password change is forced on the user s next login Example The following command enforces a password change on May s next login S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface
198. an customize the message Messages consist of a combination of free text and PX placeholders The placeholders represent information is pulled from the PX and inserted into the message For example USERNAME logged into the device on TIMESTAMP translates to JQPublic logged into the device on 2012 January 30 21 00 See Email and SMS Message Placeholders on page 206 for a list and definition of available variables gt 1 To configure sending emails Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Send SMTP message In the Recipients email addresses field specify the email address es of the recipient s Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses To use the SMTP server specified in the SMTP Server Settings dialog select the Use Default SMTP Server checkbox To use a different SMTP server select the Use Custom SMTP Settings checkbox If the SMTP server settings are not configured yet click Configure See Configuring the SMTP Settings on page 117 for the information of each field Default messages are sent based on the event See Default Log Messages on page 198 for a list
199. anagement system see Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional on page 47 a SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Configuring the Asset Sensor The PX cannot detect how many rack units tag ports a connected asset management sensor supports so you must provide this information manually When you add an asset management sensor you name it 1 To configure an asset sensor asset strip If the Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder Click the asset sensor in the left pane The asset sensor s page opens in the right pane Note The asset sensor is named Asset Strip 1 by default The name changes after being customized Tip The same asset sensor s page can be also opened by clicking Feature Port in the left pane and then double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane Click Setup The setup dialog for the asset sensor appears Tip You can also trigger the same dialog by clicking Asset Management in the left pane and then clicking Asset Strip Setup or double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane To rename the asset sensor type a new name in the Name field In the Number of Rack Units field type the total number of rack units supported by the AMS Default is 48 Here rack units are the number of asset management tag ports on the asset management strip For example if the AMS has 48 asset mana
200. and Line Interface Setting the IPv6 Address After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to assign a permanent IP address to the PX device config network ipv6 ipAddress ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address being assigned to your PX device This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command assigns the static IPv6 address 3210 4179 0 8 0 800 200 417 128 to the PX device config network ipv6 ipAddress 3210 4179 0 8 0 800 200 417 128 Setting the IPv6 Gateway After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the gateway config f network ipv6 gateway ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the gateway This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command sets the gateway to 500 0 330 0 4 9 3 2 config f network ipv6 gateway 500 0 330 0 4 9 3 2 ud SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the IPv6 Primary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the primary DNS server It is required to enable overriding the auto assigned DNS server before you can specify the DNS servers manually See Overriding the IPv6 DHCP Assigned DNS Server on page 330 config f network ipv6 primaryDNSServer ip address gt Variables e ip address is th
201. and then clicking Setup In the Non Critical field select an option from the drop down list True This option marks the outlet as a non critical outlet False This option marks the outlet as a critical outlet Click OK to save the changes S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Activating or Deactivating the Load Shedding Mode This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs When entering the load shedding mode PX turns OFF all non critical outlets When exiting from the load shedding mode PX turns ON all non critical outlets that were ON before entering the load shedding mode You can activate or deactivate this mode from the PDU or Outlets page gt To enter or exit from the load shedding mode from the PDU page 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Inthe Load Shedding section click Enable Load Shedding to enter the load shedding mode or Disable Load Shedding to deactivate the mode You are then prompted to confirm this operation If you chose to activate the mode in the previous step click Yes to turn off all non critical outlets If you chose to deactivate the mode click Yes to turn on all non critical outlets that were previously ON prior to the load shedding mode gt Toenter or exit from the load shedding mode from the Outlets page 1
202. ands All energywise commands i xxx lt lt lt lt x xx Xxx lt gt lt gt x x lt lt lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x x lt x lt x lt x x x lt x All assetStrip commands dis 3ie Raritan Appendix F Additional PX Information CLI commands PX2 3k PX2 4k PX2 5k All 1oadshedding commands N N Y history length lt n gt Y Y Y network mode lt mode gt Y Y Y outlet n cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing N N Y outlet n name name Y Y Y outlet n stateOnDeviceStartup option N N Y pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing Y Y Y pdu dataRetrieval option Y Y Y pdu deviceAltitude altitude Y Y Y pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat Y Y Y option pdu inrushGuardDelay timing N N Y pdu measurementsPerLogEntry number Y Y Y pdu name lt name gt Y Y Y pdu nonCriticalOutlets N N Y outletsl false outlets2 true pdu displayOrientation orientation Y 1 Y 1 Y 1 pdu N N Y outletInitializationDelayOnDeviceStartup timing pdu outletSequence option N N Y pdu outletSequenceDelay N N Y outleti delayl outlet2 delay2 lt outlet3 gt lt delay3 gt pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup lt option gt N N Y Notes 1 The pdu displayOrientation orientation command only applies to Zero U models Other Commands This table indicates the applicability of CLI commands o
203. ard page only displays critical or warning conditions detected by internal or external sensors so that you are alerted to take actions This section is labeled Alerted Sensors The Alerted Sensors section lists any or all of the following Any sensor that crosses the upper or lower thresholds if the thresholds are enabled Discrete on off sensors that enter the alarmed state The tripped circuit breakers m 4 Alerted Sensors Sensor Reading State zie Raritan d 94 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface For the background color meanings in this section see The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 Device Management Using the web interface you can retrieve basic hardware and software information give the PX a new device name set the system date and time and modify network settings that were entered during the initial configuration process Displaying the PDU Information To display information specific to the PX device that you are using such as inlet or outlet types trigger the Device Information dialog gt To display the PDU specific information 1 Choose Maintenance gt Device Information The Device Information dialog appears 4 Device Information x Device Information I Network Outlets Overcurrent Protectors Controllers l Asset Strips Model Serial Number Rating Device MAC Address Firmware Version Board ID Board Revision PDU2
204. aritan is Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command makes the Zero U PDU reverses the direction of the value shown on the LED display config pdu displayOrientation flipped Networking Configuration Commands A network configuration command begins with network A number of network settings can be changed through the CLI such as the IP address transmission speed duplex mode and so on Setting the Networking Mode If your PX device is implemented with both of the wired and wireless networking mechanisms you must determine which mechanism is enabled for network connectivity before further configuring networking parameters This command syntax enables the wired or wireless networking mode config network mode lt mode gt Variables e lt mode gt is one of the modes wired or wireless Mode Description wired Enables the wired networking mode wireless Enables the wireless networking mode Note If you enable the wireless networking mode and the PX does not detect any wireless USB LAN adapter or the connected wireless USB LAN adapter is not supported the message Supported Wireless device not found is displayed Example The following command enables the wired networking mode config network mode wired Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Configuring IP Protocol Settings By default only the IPv4 protocol is enabled You can
205. arty software and hardware mentioned in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of and are the property of their respective holders FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential environment may cause harmful interference VCCI Information Japan CORES HARLBLESE RRS AEREAS VCC OR SEDC VFAZAGRRHRECT COREE RER CHEATS CBR MEES SMCFCEPHVET TNA 5B 3E I BELDBKENSCEPHVETF Raritan is not responsible for damage to this product resulting from accident disaster misuse abuse non Raritan modification of the product or other events outside of Raritan s reasonable control or not arising under normal operating conditions If a power cable is included with this product it must be used exclusively for this product CE bs s LISTED Contents Safety Guidelines ii Safety Instructions iii Applicable Models xiv What s New in the PX User Guide xvi Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Product Models oa 1 PLOCUCt FO AtUIOS E
206. as available for your PX This is the Automatic Mode For each line reading the PX always displays i1 for Inlet 1 or 12 for Inlet 2 in the two digit row of the LED display as described below When showing L1 of Inlet 1 the two digit row cycles through i1 and L1 When showing L1 of Inlet 2 the two digit row cycles through i2 and L1 Note The point of the alphabet i cannot be displayed on the LED display so i1 looks like 1 and i2 looks like 2 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU Manual Mode You can press the Up or Down button to enter the Manual Mode so that a particular outlet line or circuit breaker can be selected to show specific readings In addition you can select a particular inlet if your PDU has more than one inlet Each inlet is indicated as i1 i2 or the like in the two digit row of the LED display Note The point of the alphabet i cannot be displayed on the LED display so i1 looks like 1 and i2 looks like 2 gt To operate the LED display 1 Press the Up or Down button until the desired outlet line or circuit breaker number is selected in the two digit row Or you can press either button to select the inlet s active power which is shown as AP Pressing the A UP button moves up one selection Pressing the V DOWN button moves down one selection If your PDU is a multi inlet PDU and you select a specific inlet s line or active power AP the two digit
207. atama Sensors x I Featwee Port 4 Alerted Sensors 4 I Webcam Manazenent i Snaestote Webcam Sensor Rasing Stave lt l External Sensors 0 managed 0 unmanaged liane Bening Sur A myPX 18216854100 dj Atmaatatetiatre Gh Lest Lege Sint 751 PU C ESETERE Outlet Page An inline monitor s Outlet page displays more information than a regular PX device s Outlet page including e Current per outlet Current per line for a three phase model e Voltage per outlet Voltage per line for a three phase model e Power related readings per outlet Power related readings per line for a three phase model S Raritan Raritan e Threshold settings per outlet Threshold settings per line for a three phase model appear slightly different from this image 2ERaritan Dominion PX Leer Mirngiment 7i Oewies Suris Mahlenanca z Dominion PX Explorer Outlet Ml dorod Settiogs 4 Deny PX 192 168 85 80 Labet Som Name IN tema Sensors I Feste Pon D 4 I Webcam Mansgenerit Salve 2 vA Current gt Tyee Qatet L1 AYS Current L2 AMS Current L3 RUS Current Current ntaa ce Voltage Tre Oster 114 2 RNS Vetaze 1243 RUS Vetage LILI ANS Vetaze Power A my FX 182158 5420 G Aoneistratr somia G Last cope 32 11 1 04 PM Li 12 L3 NEUTRAL Vate 04 204 204 204 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors Note Depending on your model elements shown on the same page may egit Hep
208. ate A small LED is adjacent to each outlet to indicate the outlet state Outlet LEDs always light red indicating that the outlet power is ON PX2 5000 Series These models are outlet switching capable PDUs A small LED is adjacent to each outlet to indicate the outlet or PDU state The PDU is shipped from the factory with all outlets turned ON The table below explains how to interpret different outlet LED states Outlet status What it means The outlet is not connected to power or the control PON AN circuitry s power supply is broken ON and LIVE LIVE power The outlet is on and power is available The current flowing through the outlet is greater GN and EINE than the upper warning non critical threshold OFF and LIVE The outlet is turned off and power is available when the outlet is turned on The outlet is turned off and power is not available OFE ROA NOT UNE because the circuit breaker has tripped The outlet is turned on but power is not available ON and NOT LIVE because a circuit breaker has tripped na The PX device has just been plugged in and its management software is loading Note When a PX device powers up it proceeds with the power on self test and software loading for a few moments At this time the outlet LEDs cycle through different colors When the software has completed loading the outlet LEDs show a steady color and the LED display illuminates SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU Conn
209. ate and time of the firmware upgrade event Previous firmware version Update firmware version Firmware upgrade result 2 You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data 3 To view the details of any firmware upgrade event select it and click Details or simply double click the event The Firmware Update Details dialog appears showing detailed information of the selected event 4 Click Close to quit the dialog Full Disaster Recovery If the firmware upgrade fails causing the PX device to stop working you can recover it by using a special utility rather than returning the device to Raritan Contact Raritan Technical Support for the recovery utility which works in Windows XP Vista 7 and Linux In addition an appropriate PX firmware file is required in the recovery procedure i SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware After connecting the asset sensor to the PX device it automatically checks its own firmware version against the version of the asset sensor firmware stored in the PX firmware If two versions are different the asset sensor automatically starts downloading the new firmware from the PX device to upgrade its own firmware During the firmware upgrade the following events take place e The asset sensor is completely lit up with the blinking LEDs changing the color from red to green e A firmware upgrade pr
210. ate the update 5 To view the certificate of the uploaded firmware click View Certificate Optional 6 To proceed with the update click Update Firmware The update may take several minutes Warning Do NOT power off the PX device during the update During the firmware update S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface A progress bar appears in the web interface indicating the update status The display on the PX device shows three digits FUP The outlet LEDs flash when the relay boards are being updated Exception If the firmware update does not include the update of the relay board firmware outlet LEDs do NOT flash No users can successfully log in to the PX The user management operation if any is forced to suspend 7 When the update is complete a message appears indicating the update is successful 8 The PX device resets and the Login page re appears You can now log in and resume your operation Note 1 The other logged in users are also logged out when the firmware update is complete Note 2 If you are using the PX with an SNMP manager download the PX MIB again after the firmware update to ensure your SNMP manager has the correct MIB for the latest release you are using See Using SNMP on page 263 in the PX User Guide A Note about Firmware Upgrade Time The PDU firmware upgrade time varies from unit to unit depending on various external and internal factors External facto
211. ation dialog Choose Maintenance Device Information The Device Information dialog appears Click the PDU2 MIB or ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB link to download the desired SNMP MIB file PDU2 MIB The SNMP MIB file for PX s power management ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB The SNMP MIB file for asset management The USB Console INF file link lets you download the USB to serial driver that may be required only when the PX is connected to a computer via an USB cable for configuration See Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional on page 18 for details Click Save to save the file onto your computer Note If the LHX support has been enabled LHX MIB is available for download in either dialog 270 S Raritan Chapter 7 Using SNMP Layout Opening the MIB reveals the custom objects that describe the PX system at the unit level as well as at the individual outlet level As standard these objects are first presented at the beginning of the file listed under their parent group The objects then appear again individually defined and described in detail P MiB Notepad Fie Edi Fermo View eb neasurenentsGroup OBJECT GROUP ONJECTS 4 measurenentsUnitSensorisnvailable mneasurenentsUnitSensorState neasurenentsUnitSensorvalue neasurenentstinitSensorTimeStamp measurements inletSensorishvailable neasurenentsinlekSensorState measuremnentsInletSensorlalue neasurenentsInletSensorTimeStamp neasurenentsInletPoleSensori
212. ation only such as LAN interface speed duplex mode and current LAN interface status show network interface Networking Mode This command shows whether the current networking mode is wired or wireless show network mode Note If the PX is a slave device connected to the LAN via the master PX device the show network mode command displays wired USB instead of wired Wireless Configuration This command only shows the wireless configuration of the PX device such as the SSID parameter show network wireless To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show network wireless details SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Network Service Settings This command shows the network service settings only including the Telnet setting TCP ports for HTTP HTTPS and SSH services and SNMP settings show network services lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options all http https telnet ssh snmp and zeroconfig Option Description all Displays the settings of all network services including HTTP HTTPS Telnet SSH and SNMP Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data http Only displays the TCP port for the HTTP service https Only displays the TCP port for the HTTPS service telnet Only displays the settings of the Telnet service ssh Only displays the settings
213. auses the LED of the rack unit whose index number is 25 on the asset sensori to blink quickly config f rackUnit 1 25 LEDMode blinkFast Serial Port Configuration Commands A serial port configuration command begins with serial zie Raritan iij Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 434 Setting the Serial Port Baud Rate The following command syntax sets the baud rate bps of the serial port labeled CONSOLE MODEM on the PX device Change the baud rate before connecting it to any Raritan device such as Raritan s P2CIM SER through the serial port or there are communications errors If you change the baud rate dynamically after the connection has been made you must reset the PX or power cycle the other Raritan device for proper communications config serial baudRate lt baud_rate gt Variables e lt baud_rate gt is one of the baud rate options 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note The serial port setting is especially useful when the PX works in conjunction with Raritan s Dominion LX KVM switch The Dominion LX only supports 19200 bps for communications over the serial interface Example The following command sets the baud rate of the PX device s serial port to 9600 bps config serial baudRate 9600 Setting the History Buffer Length This command syntax sets the history buffer length which determines the amount of history commands that can be retained in the buffer The
214. ayed click the Store Snapshot to Webcam Storage icon ld See Saving Snapshots on page 246 3 To switch to the video mode do the following a Click Setup b In the Webcam Mode field select Video In the video mode a video mode icon Ed appears on the top left corner of the image To change the video resolution click Setup and select a different resolution from the Resolution drop down list 4 Toreturn to the snapshot mode do the following a Click Setup b In the Webcam Mode field select Snapshot Sending Snapshots or Videos in an Email or Instant Message You are able to email or instant message up to two 2 recipients a link to webcams attached to the PX Users can then click on the links and view snapshots or videos Note For remote Live Preview sessions such as those accessed via link in an email or instant message a total of up to three 3 simultaneous Live Preview sessions are supported at a time One 1 from the originator in the PX interface and up to two 2 remote sessions Note For the purposes of this topic the message sender is User A and the recipient is User B The recipient is able to access the snapshot or video image via the link so long as either e The snapshot or video remains open in Live Preview mode in the User A s PX interface and User A does not log out of the interface and the session does not time out Or SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface e The sna
215. ays RF Code related events only such as connection or disconnection of RF Code tags Ihx Only displays events about Schroff LHX heat exchanger if this device is connected For example the fan on the LHX device fails Note You can ignore the powerLogic event type in the CLI because the PX does not support it Command History This command syntax shows the command history for current connection session show history Displayed information e A list of commands that were previously entered in the current session is displayed History Buffer Length This command syntax shows the length of the history buffer for storing the history commands show history bufferlength Displayed information e The current history buffer length is displayed 301 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Reliability Data This command shows the reliability data show reliability data Reliability Error Log This command shows the reliability error log show reliability errorlog lt n gt Variables e n is one of the options 0 zero or any other integer number Option Description 0 Displays all entries in the reliability error log Tip You can also type the command without adding this option 0 to get all data A specific Displays the specified number of last entries in the integer number reliability error log Examples This section provides examples of the show com
216. b interface and command line interface Tip To change the preferred measurement units displayed in the PX user interfaces for a specific user via CLI see Changing the Measurement Units on page 413 gt To set the default temperature unit user defaultpreferences preferredTemperatureUnit optionl Variables e option is one of the options C or F Option Description C This option displays the temperature in Celsius F This option displays the temperature in Fahrenheit gt To set the default length unit user defaultpreferences preferredLengthUnit lt option2 gt Variables e lt option2 gt is one of the options meter or feet Option Description meter This option displays the length or height in meters feet This option displays the length or height in feet gt To set the default pressure unit S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config user defaultpreferences preferredPressureUnit lt option3 gt Variables e lt option3 gt is one of the options pascal or psi Option Description pascal This option displays the pressure value in Pascals Pa psi This option displays the pressure value in psi Example The following command sets all default measurement units at a time config user defaultpreferences preferredTemperatureUnit F preferredLengthUnit feet preferredPressureUnit psi Results e The default temperature unit is set to Fahrenheit e The d
217. bAccess command thatis security enf Then press Tab or Ctrl i to complete the second word Logging out of CLI After completing your tasks using the CLI always log out of the CLI to prevent others from accessing the CLI gt To log out of the CLI 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type exit and press Enter zie Raritan ud Chapter 9 Overview Safety Instructions zie Raritan In Line Monitors The model name of a PX in line monitor follows this format PX2 3nnn where n is a number such as PX2 3172 Unlike most of PX devices each inlet of an in line monitor is connected to an outlet only so an inlet s rating is the same as an outlet s rating In This Chapter ed 448 Safety Instructions nnne 448 Flexible Cord Installation Instructions esee 449 In Line Monitor s LED Display eeeee 456 In Line Monitor s Web Interface eeessseeene 457 An in line monitor is implemented with the same number of inlets and outlets An inlet is connected to a power source for receiving electricity Such as electric distribution panels or branch circuit receptacles An outlet is connected to a device that draws power such as a cooling or IT device Inlets are located at the side labeled Line and outlets are located at the side labeled Load 1 Installation of this product should
218. be a good choice if they are available in your country or region Step by Step Flexible Cord Installation The following items are required to complete the installation e Flexible cord s e Insulated ring terminals one for each wire and appropriate crimp tool e Plug s and receptacle s for in line monitors e Torque screwdriver torque nut driver and torque wrench to tighten the wiring terminal block screws ground nut and cable gland nut gt To install a flexible cord 1 Open the PDU s access panel or in line monitor top panel to expose the power wiring terminal block s 451 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors One channel in line monitor Zero U PDU Make sure to locate the ground wire mounting stud s There is a separate ground wire mounting stud for each terminal block Each flexible cord MUST have its green or green yellow ground wire bonded to a ground wire mounting stud us Raritan Chapter 9 In Line Monitors For in line monitors make sure to identify the inlet terminal blocks rear of monitor and outlet terminal blocks front of monitor Each inlet terminal block has a corresponding outlet terminal block Number Description 1 Inlets labeled LINE Outlets labeled LOAD 2 Strip off the outer jacket of the flexible cord and remove any jute paper or other fillers Use the following to help determine how much jacket to remove In the finished assembly the outer jacket should
219. bed below e The old sensor uses tiny buttons to secure or loosen wires of the connected detectors switches while the new sensor uses tiny screws e The new sensor has a separate terminal module so that it is more convenient to connect or disconnect all connected detectors switches from the contact closure sensor Both old and new contact closure sensors share the same part number DPX CC2 TH New type of DPX CC2 TR is supported as of release 2 4 so make sure you are running the firmware version 2 4 or later when using new DPX CC2 TR The latest PX firmware continuously supports old type of DPX CC2 TR e For instructions on old contact closure sensors see Connecting Detectors Switches to DPX CC2 TR on page 37 e For instructions on new contact closure sensors see Connecting Detectors Switches to New DPX CC2 TR on page 38 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting Detectors Switches to DPX CC2 TR A DPX CC2 TR unit provides two channels for connecting two discrete on off detectors switches There are four spring loaded termination points on the body of DPX CC2 TR the two to the right are associated with one channel as indicated by the LED number and the two to the left are associated with the other You must plug discrete detectors switches into these termination points gt Toconnect third party or Raritan s discrete detectors switches 1 Stripthe insulation around 12mm from
220. before creating the rule gt Step 1 create a new action for enabling the load shedding mode 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Click New Action In the Action Name field type a name to identify this action In this illustration type Enable Load Shedding In the Action field select Change load shedding state In the Operation field select Enable load shedding Click Save to save this action ii Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface After the new action for enabling the load shedding mode is created you can create an event rule that can trigger the load shedding mode when the contact closure sensor enters the alarmed state This sample event rule looks like this Event External Sensor Slot gt Slot 1 gt State Sensor gt Alarmed Trigger condition Alarmed Actions Enable Load Shedding Step 2 create the contact closure triggered load shedding event rule Click the Rules tab Click New Rule In the Rule name field type a name to identify this event rule In this illustration type Contact Closure Triggered Load Shedding Select the Enabled checkbox Otherwise the new event rule will not be carried out Select Events External Sensor Slot to indicate we are specifying an event related to the environmental sensor Select the ID number of the desired contact closure sensor In this illustration the ID number of the desire
221. ber is always 1 297 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 298 Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor For the Raritan asset sensor a rack unit refers to a tag port This command shows the settings of a specific rack unit or all rack units on an asset sensor such as a rack unit s LED color and LED mode show rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e rack unit is one of the options all or a specific rack unit s index number Option Description all Displays the settings of all rack units on the specified asset sensor Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific Displays the settings of the specified rack unit on number the specified asset sensor Use the index number to specify the rack unit The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Raritan Blade Extension Strip Settings This command shows the information of a blade extension strip including the total number of tag ports and if available the ID barcode number of any connected tag show bladeSlot n rack unit blade slot Variables n is the number of the FEATUR
222. bind is used SE Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Base DN for Search Type dc techadss1 dc comas the starting point where your search begins on the AD server Login Name Attribute Ensure the field is set to sAMAccountName because the LDAP server is Microsoft Active Directory User Entry Object Class Ensure the field is set to user because the LDAP server is Microsoft Active Directory User Search Subfilter The field is optional The subfilter information is also useful for filtering out additional objects in a large directory structure In this example we leave it blank Active Directory Domain Type techadssl com p Create new LDAP Server Configuration x IP Address Hostname 192 168 56 3 _ Use settinas from LDAP Server Select LDAP Server Iv Type of LDAP Server Microsoft Active Directory C LDAP over SSL Port 385 aI SSL Port 535 Use anly trusted LDAP Server Certificates Server Cerc icate not set Shows Re mava select new certificate ij Browse _ Anonymous Bind O Use Bind Credentials Bind DN s Bind Password Confirm Bind Password m Base DN for Search dc techadssl dc com Login Name Attribute s amp MAccountName User Entry Object Class user User Search Subfiter Active Directory Domain techadssl com Test Connection 5 Click OK to sa
223. cal condition only after a specified number of consecutive samples that cross a particular threshold are generated This prevents a number of threshold alerts from being generated if the measurements return to normal immediately after rising above any upper threshold or dropping below any lower threshold 179 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Event Rules and Actions A benefit of the product s intelligence is its ability to notify you of and react to a change in conditions This event notification or reaction is an event rule The PX is shipped with two built in event rules which cannot be deleted e System Event Log Rule This causes ANY event occurred to the PX to be recorded in the internal log It is enabled by default e System SNMP Notification Action This causes SNMP traps or informs to be sent to specified IP addresses or hosts when ANY event occurs to the PX It is disabled by default If these two do not satisfy your needs you can create additional rules to respond to different events Note Internet Explorer 8 IE8 does not use compiled JAVA script When using IE8 to create or change event rules the CPU performance may be degraded resulting in the appearance of the connection time out message When this occurs click Ignore to continue Components of an Event Rule An event rule defines what the PX does in certain situations and is composed of two parts e Event This is the situation where the PX or part
224. cam Storage 182 193 Reliability Data 302 Reliability Error Log 302 Request LHX Maximum Cooling 181 184 Requesting Maximum Cooling for an LHX 256 257 Reserving IP Addresses in Windows DHCP Servers xvii 504 Reset Button 70 Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker 71 Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker 72 Resetting the PX 442 Resetting to Factory Defaults 70 442 467 Resizing a Dialog 92 Restarting the PDU 442 Restricted Service Agreement 350 Retrieving Energy Usage 272 Retrieving Previous Commands 446 Retrieving Software Packages Information 261 RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution 60 495 Role Configuration Commands 417 Role of a DNS Server 105 472 S Raritan Role Based Access Control 360 S Safety Guidelines ii Safety Instructions iii 14 448 Sample Environmental Sensor Level Event Rule 210 Sample Event Rules 208 Sample Inlet Level Event Rule 209 Sample Outlet Level Event Rule 208 Sample PDU Level Event Rule 208 Saving a PX Configuration 239 Saving Snapshots 242 244 246 SecureLock Outlets and Cords 497 Security Configuration Commands 343 Security Settings 294 Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 Addresses 315 Selecting the Internet Protocol 102 103 Send a Snapshot via Email 181 184 Send an SNMP Notification 182 187 Send EMail 181 186 198 Send SMS Message 182 191 Sending Snapshots or Videos
225. ccess control rules that are based on both IP addresses and users roles e An IPv4 role based access control command begins with security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 e An IPv6 role based access control command begins with security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 Modifying the Role Based Access Control Parameters There are different commands for modifying role based access control parameters e Pv4 commands gt To enable or disable the IPv4 role based access control feature use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 enabled lt option gt gt To determine the IPv4 role based access control policy use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 defaultPolicy lt policy gt e Pv6 commands gt To enable or disable the IPv6 role based access control feature use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 enabled lt option gt gt To determine the IPv6 role based access control policy use this command syntax Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 defaultPolicy policy Variables e option is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the role based access control feature false Disables the role based access control feature e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from all IP
226. ccumulated per log entry config pdu measurementsPerLogEntry lt number gt Variables e number is an integer between 1 and 600 The default is 60 samples per log entry For more information see Setting Data Logging on page 116 311 312 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command determines that 66 measurements are accumulated per log entry for sensors that is 66 seconds config pdu measurementsPerLogEntry 66 Specifying the Device Altitude This command syntax specifies your PX device s altitude above sea level in meters You must specify the PX device s altitude above sea level if a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached This is because the device s altitude is associated with the altitude correction factor See Altitude Correction Factors on page 499 config pdu deviceAltitude lt altitude gt Variables e lt altitude gt is an integer between 1 and 3000 meters Example The following command determines that the PX device is located at 1500 meters above sea level config f pdu deviceAltitude 1500 Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors This command syntax enables or disables the use of rack units for specifying the height Z coordinate of environmental sensors config f pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat option Variables e option is one of the options rackUnits or freeForm Option Description
227. ce Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears To determine the default policy for IPv4 addresses a Click the IPv4 tab if necessary b Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox is selected c Select the action you want from the Default Policy drop down list Allow Accepts traffic from all IPv4 addresses regardless of the user s role Deny Drops traffic from all IPv4 addresses regardless of the user s role To determine the default policy for IPv6 addresses a Click the IPv6 tab b Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox is selected c Select the action you want from the Default Policy drop down list Allow Accepts traffic from all IPv6 addresses regardless of the user s role Deny Drops traffic from all IPv6 addresses regardless of the user s role Click OK to save the changes Creating Role Based Access Control Rules Role based access control rules accept or drop traffic based on the user s role and IP address Like firewall rules the order of rules is important since the rules are executed in numerical order 1 To create role based access control rules Choose Device Settings Security Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears Click the IPv4 tab for creating firewall rules or click the IPv6 tab for creating IPv6
228. ch outlets this role can control Select the desired outlets checkboxes or select the checkbox labeled all if you want to select all outlets d Click Add to add the selected permission and arguments if any e Repeat Steps ato d until you add all necessary permissions To change a specific permission s arguments do this a Select the permission by clicking it b Click Edit The Edit arguments of privilege XXX dialog appears where XXX is the privilege name Note If the permission you selected does not contain any arguments the Edit button is disabled c Select the argument you want You can make multiple selections d Click OK Click OK to save the changes Deleting a Role You can delete any role other than the Admin role Ae To delete a role Choose User Management gt Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Select the role you want to delete by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion 127 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the Role List View You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data See Changing the View of a List on page 90 Acc
229. cified environmental sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time 401 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold of the environmental humidity sensor with the ID number 1 to 15 It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor externalsensor 1 humidity lowerCritical 15 Setting the Sensor s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of a numeric environmental sensor config sensor externalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type e option is one of the options
230. communication is resent if the first is not received For example resend a new inform communication once every 3 seconds b Inthe Number of Retries field enter the number of times you want to resend the inform communication if it fails For example inform communications are resent up to 5 times when the initial communication fails In the Host fields enter the IP address of the device s you want to access This is the address to which notifications are sent by the SNMP system agent In the Port fields enter the port number used to access the device s 187 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 5 Inthe Community fields enter the SNMP community string to access the device s The community is the group representing the PX and all SNMP management stations gt Tosend SNMP v3 notifications 1 From the Notification Type drop down select SNMP v3 Trap or SNMP v3 Inform For SNMP TRAPs the engine ID is prepopulated For SNMP INFORM communications leave the resend settings at their default or a In the Timeout sec field enter the interval of time in seconds after which a new inform communication is resent if the first is not received For example resend a new inform communication once every 3 seconds In the Number of Retries field enter the number of times you want to resend the inform communication if it fails For example inform communications are resent up to 5 times when the initial communication fails
231. confirm the deletion Click Close to quit the dialog SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Checking Server Monitoring States Server monitoring results are available in the Server Reachability dialog after specifying servers for the PX device to monitor gt 1 To check the server monitoring states and results Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears The column labeled Ping Enabled indicates whether the monitoring for the corresponding server is activated or not S This icon denotes that the monitoring for the corresponding server is enabled X This icon denotes that the monitoring for the corresponding server is disabled The column labeled Status indicates the accessibility of each monitored server Status Description Reachable The server is accessible Unreachable The server is inaccessible Waiting for reliable The connection between the PX device and the connection server is not established yet You may change the sorting order of the list if necessary See Changing the Sorting on page 91 Click Close to quit the dialog Environmental Sensors zie Raritan The PX can monitor the environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity where environmental sensors are placed gt 1 To add environmental sensors Physically connect environmental sensors to the PX device See Connecting Environmental Sensors Optiona
232. ction Action Function Execute an action Creates a group of actions comprising existing group actions See Action Group on page 183 Log event message Records the selected events in the internal log See Log an Event Message on page 184 Request LHX Applies the maximum cooling to the LHX Maximum Cooling device See Request LHX Maximum Cooling on page 184 This option is available only when the Schroff LHX support has been enabled Send Snapshots via Emails the snapshots captured by a connected SMTP Logitech webcam if available See Send a Snapshot via Email on page 184 Send SMTP message Emails a textual message See Send EMail on page 186 181 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Action Function Send SNMP Sends SNMP traps or informs to one or multiple notification SNMP destinations See Send an SNMP Notification on page 187 Syslog message Makes the PX automatically forward event messages to the specified syslog server See Syslog Message on page 189 Send SMS message Sends an English message to a mobile phone See Send SMS Message on page 191 Switch LHX Switches on or off the LHX device See Switch LHX on page 192 This option is available only when the Schroff LHX support has been enabled Record Snapshots to Starts or stops a connected webcam from Webcam Storage taking snapshots See Record Snapshots to Webcam Storage on page 193 Change load Enters or quits the load shedding mod
233. cuit supplying power to the PDU The rating of the branch circuit shall be in accordance with national and local electrical codes For North American the rating of the branch circuit may be up to 125 greater than the rating of the PDU unless prohibited by national or local electrical codes n North America external overcurrent protectors shall be certified by UL CSA or equivalent certification In other regions or countries make sure they comply with national and local electrical codes Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet An Equipment Setup Worksheet is provided in this guide See Equipment Setup Worksheet on page 463 Use this worksheet to record the model serial number and use of each IT device connected to the PDU As you add and remove devices keep the worksheet up to date Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional If your PX device is designed to use a cable retention clip install the clip before connecting a power cord A cable retention clip prevents the connected power cord from coming loose or falling off The use of cable retention clips is highly recommended for regions with high seismic activities and environments where shocks and vibrations are expected ex b S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To install and use a cable retention clip on the inlet Locate two tiny holes adjacent to the inlet Install the cable retention clip by inserting
234. d CONSOLE MODEM on the PX 2 Connectthe other end of the null modem cable to the serial port COM on the computer gt To make a USB connection 1 The USB to serial driver is required in Windows for a USB connection If using a computer running Windows it is recommended to perform automatic driver installation before connecting the USB cable See Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional on page 18 for details Connect one end of a regular USB cable to the USB B port on the PX Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB A port on the computer Note If you plan to use the serial connection to log in to the command line interface leave the cable connected after the configuration is complete Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional The PX can emulate a serial port over a USB connection A USB to serial driver named Dominion Serial Console is required for Microsoft Windows operating systems including Windows XP Vista 7 and 8 Download the dominion serial driver file which contains dominion serial inf dominion serial cat and dominion serial setup 2 0 exe files from the PX 2 4 0 section on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section httpz www raritan com support firmware and documentation There are two ways to install this driver in Windows automatic and manual installation Automatic driver installation is highly recommended You should perform manual driver installation
235. d by a specific rule gt To change the default policy 1 Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Todetermine the default policy for IPv4 addresses a Click the IPv4 tab if necessary b Ensure the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox is selected c The default policy is shown in the Default Policy field To change it select a different policy from the drop down list 129 130 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Accept Accepts traffic from all IPv4 addresses Drop Discards traffic from all IPv4 addresses without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from all IPv4 addresses and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification 3 Todetermine the default policy for IPv6 addresses a Click the IPv6 tab b Ensure the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox is selected c The default policy is shown in the Default Policy field To change it select a different policy from the drop down list Accept Accepts traffic from all IPv6 addresses Drop Discards traffic from all IPv6 addresses without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from all IPv6 addresses and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification 4 Click OK to save the changes The new default policy is applied Creating Firewall Rules Firewa
236. d contact closure sensor is 1 so select Slot 1 in the submenu Select State Sensor because the contact closure sensor is a discrete sensor which indicates the environmental changes through the status changes Select Alarmed in the submenu since we want the action Enable Loading Shedding to be taken when the selected contact closure sensor changes its state related to the alarmed state In the Trigger condition field select the Alarmed radio button because we want the PX to respond to the event only when the contact closure sensor enters the Alarm state A Note about Infinite Loop You should avoid building an infinite loop when creating event rules The infinite loop refers to a condition where the PDU keeps busy because the action or one of the actions taken for a certain event triggers an identical or similar event which will result in an action triggering one event again Raritan 211 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Example 1 This example illustrates an event rule which continuously causes the PDU to send out SMTP messages Event selected Action included Device gt Sending SMTP message Send SMTP message failed Example 2 This example illustrates an event rule which continuously causes the PDU to send out SMTP messages when one of the selected events listed on the Device menu occurs Note that the lt Any sub event gt under the Device menu includes the event Sending SMTP message failed Event se
237. d is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 10 Click OK to save the changes Setting Inlet Thresholds You can set the inlet thresholds so that the alerts are generated when the inlet current and or voltage crosses the thresholds 1 To set the inlet thresholds If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Inlet 1 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet l1 page opens in the right pane Click Setup The Inlet 1 Setup dialog appears In the Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure 175 176 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold 9 10 T1 Configuration table to trigger this dialog Configure the Lower Crit
238. d rack unit follow the global LED color settings See Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags on page 429 and Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags on page 429 This is the default This option enables selection of a different LED color and LED mode for the specified rack unit When this option is selected see Setting an LED Color for a Rack Unit on page 432 and Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit on page 433 to set different LED settings The following command allows the rack unit whose index number is 25 on the asset sensor 1 to have a different LED color and mode config zie Raritan rackUnit 1 25 LEDOperationMode manual 431 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 432 Setting an LED Color for a Rack Unit This command syntax sets the LED color for a specific rack unit on the specified asset sensor You need to set a rack unit s LED color only when the LED operation mode of this rack unit has been set to manual config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDColor lt color gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e rack unit is the index number of the desired rack unit The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface e color is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The color
239. d select the desired action Send Snapshots via SMTP 6 Inthe Recipients email addresses field specify the email address es of the recipient s Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses 7 Touse the SMTP server specified in the SMTP Server Settings dialog select the Use Default SMTP Server checkbox 8 Touse a different SMTP server select the Use Custom SMTP Settings checkbox If the SMTP server settings are not configured yet click Configure See Configuring the SMTP Settings on page 117 for the information of each field 9 Select the webcam that is capturing the images you want sent in the email 10 Use the slide bars to increase or decrease the following Number of Snapshots the number of snapshots to be included in the sequence of images that are taken when the event occurs For example you can specify 10 images be taken once the event triggers the action Snapshots Mail field the number of snapshots from the sequence to be sent at one time in the email Time before first Snapshot s the amount of time in seconds between when the event is triggered and the webcam begins taking snapshots Time between Snapshots s the amount of time between when each snapshot is taken 11 Click OK to save the new action 12 Click Close to quit the dialog zie Raritan s 186 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Send EMail You can configure emails to be sent when an event occurs and c
240. dd the certificate to your browser and so on gt To download the certificate and key files from an PX device 1 Choose Device Settings Security SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears The Active SSL Certificate tab should open If not click it Click Download Key to download the private key file installed on the PX device You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer 4 Click Download Certificate to download the certificate file installed on the PX device You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Setting Up External Authentication zie Raritan For security purposes users attempting to log in to the PX must be authenticated The PX supports the access using one of the following authentication mechanisms e Local database of user profiles on the PX device e Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP e Remote Access Dial In User Service RADIUS protocol By default the PX is configured for local authentication If you stay with this method you do not need to do anything other than create user profiles for each authorized user If you prefer external authentication you must e Provide the PX with information about the external authentication server e Create user profiles for users who are authenticated externally because a user profile determines the role s applied to the us
241. default length is 25 config history length lt n gt Variables e n is an integer number between 1 and 250 e f you leave the n variable blank when using the command the history buffer is set to 25 by default S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Multi Command Syntax To shorten the configuration time you can combine various configuration commands in one command and perform all of them at a time A multi command syntax looks like this setting 1 lt value 1 setting 2 value 2 setting 3 gt value 3 Example 1 Combination of IP Subnet Mask and Gateway Parameters The following multi command syntax configures IPv4 address subnet mask and gateway for the network connectivity simultaneously config f network ipv4 ipAddress 192 168 84 225 subnetMask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 84 0 Results e The IP address is set to 192 168 84 225 e The subnet mask is set to 255 255 255 0 e The gateway is set to 192 168 84 0 Example 2 Combination of Upper Critical and Upper Warning Settings The following multi command syntax simultaneously configures Upper Critical and Upper Warning thresholds for the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker config sensor ocp 3 current upperCritical disable upperWarning 20 Results e The Upper Critical threshold of the 3rd circuit breaker s RMS current is disabled e The Upper Warning threshold of the 3rd circuit breaker s RM
242. dentally plugging an RS 232 RJ 45 connector into the ETHERNET port can cause permanent damages to the Ethernet hardware gt To make a wireless connection Do one of the following Plug a supported USB wireless LAN adapter into the USB A port on your PX Connect a USB docking station to the USB A port on the PX and plug the supported USB wireless LAN adapter into the appropriate USB port on the docking station See USB Wireless LAN Adapters on page 21 for a list of supported wireless LAN adapters SE Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration USB Wireless LAN Adapters The following table lists USB wireless LAN adapters that the PX supports Wi Fi LAN adapter Supported 802 11 protocols Proxim Orinoco 8494 A B G Zyxel NWD271N B G Edimax EW 7722UnD A B G N to an 802 11n wireless network the handshake timeout setting must be changed to 500 or greater or the wireless connection will fail Built in Wireless LAN Adapters If the Raritan product you purchased has been implemented with the following 802 11 wireless LAN adapter when shipping out of the factory no USB wireless LAN adapters are required to make a wireless connection Wi Fi LAN adapter Supported 802 11 protocols HD Wireless B G Supported Wireless LAN Configuration If a wireless connection is preferred ensure that the wireless LAN configuration of your PX matches the access point The following is the wireless LAN configuration that the P
243. der and the Outlets page opens in the right pane showing all outlets with the following information Outlet number Outlet name Outlet status on off Outlet sensor readings RMS current A Active power W Power factor Non critical outlet settings True False if the PDU is outlet switching capable Tip If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Monitoring an Outlet To view a particular outlet s detailed information follow this procedure 1 To monitor an outlet If the Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the outlet s details are shown in the right pane including Outlet label number a Outlet name Outlet status on off Note The outlet status is only available on a outlet switching capable PX device Line pair associated with this outlet Overcurrent protector that protects this outlet such as a circuit breaker Outlet state on device startup Power off period during power cycle Non critical outlet settings False True Note The above three pieces of information is only available on a outlet switching capable
244. desired action from the Available actions list box and click the Add button to move the selected action to the Selected actions list box To make multiple selections press Cirl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To add all actions at a time simply click the Add All button uel If the desired action is not available yet click Create New Action to immediately create it Upon complete the newly created action is moved to the Selected actions list box zieRaritan 197 198 Chapter 6 Using the Web Inte Event Context Device gt System started Device gt System reset rface To remove any action select it from the Selected actions list box and click the Remove button to move it back to the Available actions list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To remove all actions at a time simply click the Remove All button ej 2 Click Save to save the new event rule Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort or Cancel to return to the current settings page 3 Repeat Steps 2 to 10 to create additional event rules 4 Click Close to quit the dialog Default Log Messages Following are default log messages triggered and emailed to specified recipients when PX events occur are TRUE or in some cases do not occur are FALSE See Send E
245. determines that the primary DNS server is 192 168 84 30 config network ipv4 primaryDNSServer 192 168 84 30 Setting the IPv4 Secondary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the secondary DNS server config network ipv4 secondaryDNSServer lt ip address gt Variables e ip address gt is the IP address of the secondary DNS server The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Note The PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available the PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Example The following command determines that the secondary DNS server is 192 168 84 33 config f network ipv4 secondaryDNSServer 192 168 84 33 zie Raritan Ne Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Overriding the IPv4 DHCP Assigned DNS Server After specifying the primary secondary DNS server you can use this command to override the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config network ipv4 overrideDNS lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable This option overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the primary secondary DNS server you assign disable This option resumes using the DHCP assigned DNS server Example The following command overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified conf
246. dun eu ra en 284 Default Measurement Units eda icc tenero tonus a de onn i pas vn xa aon a ed re a ua eu o iu oid eu n 285 Environmental Sensor Information eee 286 Outlet Sensor Threshold Information ssse nnns 287 Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information esee nnn 288 Inlet Sensor Threshold Information ssssssssssn en 289 Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information c c cccsesssssssssssessesssceeseseeeeceeeeeesereeeseeeeeees 290 Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information sss 291 Environmental Sensor Threshold Information sees 293 Security Settings sssssssssssesessseesse seen einen ennt innen ensi nnns intres nnns 294 EXISTING USEF Profiles ecce eet pete de der eet tale dee ult deste teta epe 295 Existing Roles esssssssssesesseeeeese ener sees en nnn nnns sn trn sen tene nensis kaa nida tenni 296 Load Shedding Settings sse nennen enne nennen 296 Serial Port Settings essssssssessssesss essen entente tenentis intres 297 EnergyWise Settings ssssssssssssssssesesesennene enses nnn en rente sistens 297 Asset Sensor Settings sssssssssssssssssseeeeeee eene tnnt enne nnn nennen en 297 Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor ssssssssssssssssee eene 298 Blade Extension Strip Settings
247. e details Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker whose sensors you want to query e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor zie Raritan id 292 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold and deassertion hysteresis settings of the specified circuit breaker sensor are displayed With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Environmental Sensor Threshold Information This command syntax shows the specified environmental sensor s threshold related information show sensor externalsensor lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor externalsensor lt n gt details External sensor 3 Temperature Reading 31 8 deg C State normal Resolution 0 1 deg C Accuracy t 1 00 3 Tolerance 0 05 deg C Range 55 0 deg C 125 0 deg C Lower critical threshold 15 0 deg C Lower warning threshold 20 0 deg C Upper warning threshold 55 0 deg C Upper critical threshold 60 0 deg C Deassertion hysteresis 1 0 deg C Assertion timeout
248. e It is an integer between 1 and 16 e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name Cabinet humidity to the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 name Cabinet humidity SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Specifying the Sensor Type Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR supports the connection of diverse third party or Raritan s detectors switches You must specify the type of connected detector switch for proper operation Use this command syntax when you need to specify the sensor type config externalsensor lt n gt sensorSubType lt type gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e type is one of these types contact smokeDetection waterDetection or vibration Type Description contact The connected detector switch is for detection of door lock or door closed open status smokeDetection The connected detector switch is for detection of the smoke presence waterDetection The connected detector switch is for detection of the water presence vibration The connected detector switch is for detection of the vibration Example The following indicate
249. e See shedding state Change Load Shedding State on page 190 Switch outlet Switches on off or cycles the power to the specified outlet s See Switch Outlets on page 192 Note The Change load shedding state and Switch outlet options are only available for outlet switching capable PDUs 6 Click Save to save the new action Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort or Cancel to return to the current settings page 7 Tocreate additional actions repeat the above steps 8 Click Close to quit the dialog ee Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Action Group You can create an action group that performs up to 32 actions After creating such an action group you can easily assign this set of actions to an event rule rather than selecting all needed actions one by one per rule Note A supported modem such as the Cinterion GSM MC52i modem must be plugged in to the PX in order to send SMS messages 1 zieRaritan To create an action group Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired actio
250. e acceptable threshold 253 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 6 Click OK to save the changes Monitoring the LHX Device The PX web interface lets you monitor the status of the connected LHX heat exchanger as well as the status of the LHX built in sensor Viewing the Summary Both the Dashboard and Feature Port pages display the summary of the connected LHX heat exchangers including the heat exchanger s name and status if the LHX device is detected or manually assigned to the Feature Port If the LHX heat exchanger is highlighted in red in the summary it indicates that there is LHX sensor failure on that heat exchanger View the State column to identify failed sensors gt To view the LHX summary on the Dashboard page 1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The Dashboard page opens in the right pane 2 Locate the LHX Heat Exchanger section gt To view the LHX summary on the Feature Port page 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the T
251. e Agreement This command syntax activates or deactivates the Restricted Service Agreement config security restrictedServiceAgreement enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the Restricted Service Agreement feature false Disables the Restricted Service Agreement feature If the Restricted Service Agreement feature is enabled the Restricted Service Agreement is displayed when any user logs in to the PX Do either of the following or you cannot successfully log in to the PX e Inthe web interface select the checkbox labeled understand and accept the Restricted Service Agreement e Inthe CLI type y when the confirmation message I understand and accept the Restricted Service Agreement is displayed Example The following command disables the Restricted Service Agreement feature config f security restrictedServiceAgreement enabled false m sis Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Specifying the Agreement Content This command syntax allows you to create or modify the content for the Restricted Service Agreement config security restrictedServiceAgreement bannerContent After performing the above command do the following 1 Type the text comprising up to 10 000 ASCII characters when the PX CLI prompts you to enter the content 2 Toendthe content a Press Enter b Type END
252. e IP address of the primary DNS server This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command determines that the primary DNS server is 2103 288 8201 1 14 config network ipv6 primaryDNSServer 2103 288 8201 1 14 Setting the IPv6 Secondary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the secondary DNS server It is required to enable overriding the auto assigned DNS server before you can specify the DNS servers manually See Overriding the IPv6 DHCP Assigned DNS Server on page 330 config f network ipv6 secondaryDNSServer ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the secondary DNS server This value uses the IPv6 address format Note The PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available the PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Example The following command determines that the secondary DNS server is 2103 288 8201 1 700 config f network ipv6 secondaryDNSServer 2103 288 8201 1 700 329 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Overriding the IPvG DHCP Assigned DNS Server After specifying the primary secondary DNS server you can use this command to override the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config network ipv6 overrideDNS option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Optio
253. e Network Settings The PX was configured for network connectivity during the installation and configuration process See Configuring the PX on page 16 If necessary you can modify any network settings using the web interface 101 102 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Selecting the Internet Protocol The PX device supports two types of Internet protocols IPv4 and IPv6 You can enable either or both Internet protocols After enabling the desired Internet protocol s all but not limited to the following protocols will be compliant with the enabled Internet protocol s e LDAP e NTP e SMTP e SSH e Telnet e FTP e SSL e SNMP e SysLog gt To select the appropriate Internet Protocol 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears Click the IP Protocol tab Select one checkbox according to the Internet protocol s you want to enable Pv4 only Enables IPv4 only on all interfaces This is the default Pv6 only Enables IPv6 only on all interfaces Pv4 and IPv6 Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 on all interfaces 4 Ifyou selected the IPv4 and IPv6 checkbox in the previous step you must determine which IP address is used when the DNS resolver returns both of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses Pv4 Address Use the IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server Pv6 Address Use the IPv6 addresses returned by the DNS server 5 Click OK to save the changes Modifying the IPv4 Sett
254. e black gradient arrow 44 prior to the folder icon All tag ports under the folder are hidden Displaying the Asset Sensor Information The hardware and software information of the connected asset sensor is available through the web interface To display the asset sensor information Connect the asset sensor to the PX if it is not already Click on the Feature Ports folder in the navigation tree to expand it o V w Click the desired asset sensor The page specific to that asset sensor opens in the right pane showing the asset sensor settings and information of all rack units tag ports Note You can also access this dialog by double clicking the asset sensor shown on the Dashboard page Click Extended Device Info where the asset sensor data is displayed Click Close to quit the dialog zie Raritan 238 Chapter 6 Using the Web Inte Bulk Configuration rface The Bulk Configuration feature lets you save the settings of a configured PX device to your PC You can use this configuration file to copy that configuration to other PX devices of the same model and firmware version You must have the administrator privileges to save and copy the PX configurations B Bulk Configuration x Save Bulk Configuration Download Bulk Configuration Copy Bulk Configuration Bulk Configuration File Browse Upload amp Restore Bulk Configuration Note No dev
255. e following command sets the wireless authentication method to PSK config f network wireless authMethod PSK Setting the PSK If the Pre Shared Key PSK authentication method is selected you must assign a PSK passphrase by using this command syntax config f network wireless PSK lt psk gt Variables e lt psk gt is a string or passphrase that consists of 8 to 63 characters No spaces ASCII codes 0x20 Ox7E zie Raritan xx Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example This command assigns encryp key as the PSK config f network wireless PSK encryp key Setting the EAP Parameters When the wireless authentication method is set to EAP you must configure EAP authentication parameters including outer authentication inner authentication EAP identity password and CA certificate Setting the Outer Authentication This command syntax determines the outer authentication protocol for the EAP config f network wireless eapOuterAuthentication outer auth Variables e The value of outer auth is PEAP because PX only supports Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol PEAP as the outer authentication Example The following command determines the outer authentication protocol for the EAP authentication is Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol PEAP config f network wireless eapOuterAuthentication PEAP Setting the Inner Authentication This command syntax determines the i
256. e implemented with fuses instead of circuit breakers A fuse blows to protect associated outlets if it detects the overload If your PDU uses fuses you must replace it with a new one when it blows or malfunctions The rating of the new fuse must be the same as the original one Use of inappropriately rated fuse results in damage to the PDU and connected equipment electric shock fire personal injury or death Depending on the design of your PDU the fuse replacement methods differ Fuse Replacement on Zero U Models This section only applies to a Zero U PDU with replaceable fuses gt To replace a fuse on the Zero U model 1 Lift the hinged cover over the fuse 2 Verify the new fuse s rating against the rating specified in the fuse holder s cover zie Raritan a 74 Chapter 5 Using the PDU 3 Push the cover of the fuse holder to expose the fuse 5 Insert a new fuse into the holder There is no orientation limit for fuse insertion 6 Close the fuse holder and the hinged cover in a reverse order Fuse Replacement on 1U Models On the 1U model a fuse is installed in a fuse knob which fits into the PDU s fuse carrier e eo Number Description 1 Fuse carrier 2 Fuse knob where a fuse is installed S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU gt To replace a fuse on the 1U PDUs 1 Disconnect the PDU s power cord from the power source 2 Remove the desired fu
257. e maximum password length accepted by the PX is 32 characters 3 Make necessary changes to the default settings 4 Click OK to save the changes Enabling Password Aging Password Aging determines whether users are required to change passwords at regular intervals The default interval is 60 days gt To force users to change passwords regularly 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Password Policy The Password Policy dialog appears 2 Select the Password Aging checkbox to enable the password aging feature 3 To determine how often users are requested to change their passwords select a number of days in the Password Aging Interval field Users are required to change their password every time that number of days has passed Tip If the desired time option is not listed you can manually type the desired time in this field For example you can type 9 d to set the password aging time to 9 days 4 Click OK to save the changes nu SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Enabling and Editing the Security Banner Use the PX restricted service agreement security banner if you want to require users to read and accept a security agreement when they log on to the PX A default agreement is provided You can edit or replace the default text as needed by typing directly in the security dialog or pasting text into it A maximum of 10 000 characters can be entered or pasted into the security banner If a
258. e mme ecu Fe nandi de 252 Monitoring the LHX DEVi siirsin seurieus eint e ra Fea tek etre ta ade e Suede 254 Turning the LAX On OF Of nacione oer tede e nente ru Rede regu 257 Requesting Maximum Cooling for an LHX sss 257 Firmware UW PQrade e Y 258 Updating the PX FITTTIWAEG acini eerte terrenae alin ra Epi tee dere xa a Se ae ER ena 258 Viewing Firmware Update History esessssssseseeeeeeeee enne enne nnns 260 Full Disaster RECOVETy C 260 Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware ssssssssssssseeeeeenen nnne 261 Accessing the Help unn carie marec ore ecu te ger xa e Esa ko c ee praua 261 Retrieving Software Packages Information siiis raikan ara 261 Browsing through the Online Help sess 261 zie Raritan Contents Chapter 7 Using SNMP 263 Eriabling SINMB totes teo eene uud entrer Deneuve eia taae aa bad ua sena dee 263 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 sssssssssssssssseee ener enne ns 264 Configuring SNMP Notifications ssssssssssssseees eene nnnren nennen innen ns 265 SNMPv2c Notifications ussssssssesssssesesesee eene naida aiia aen roia Eana sisse 266 SNMPSYS3 INOUfICallOLIS cinta oi don nit ener ani obf roro acr c ae ar ne n a 267 SNMP Gets and Sets cccccccssssececcccececseseeseseeeesesceseeaesesecsceeseeaeaeseseeeseseeaaeaeseeeeseeese
259. e tede d dine arna ueni r ag ia inie thane aiiai 239 Copying a PX Configuration sse eene nnns tnnt nnns 240 Backup and Restore of PX Device Settings sss 240 Webcam Management ssssssssssseseesee eene nennen enters nnns sitet enne sinn intr nsn tenens 242 Te aite Li ATe Webcams RE 242 Adjusting Snapshot or Video Properties sse 243 Viewing the Webcam Snapshots or Videos ssssssssssseeeee 243 Sending Snapshots or Videos in an Email or Instant Message sssssss 244 Snapshot StOLAG Cine icem tiene tentum A ES aR espera adc xs ede exe iet ix Mud Deus autas 245 Network DIagrioStiCS 5 aes iine iran led exerit lae enixe rad Rem E dasa NEKE aAA Tad pcx usu ER RR Keesaan 248 Pinging a OSE EE 248 Tracing the Network ROUIe iecit coececebiand cleccadieerasadvasdcanlyeetdagtexsnactumcumetaeatendi 248 Listing T CP GOrnFeCtlOlS eite enit t eR ERR cedex eei x Paese tu e ento bet Ex ane xu ER Ras 249 Viewing the Communication EQ ecu etna opu erede cinta hedera Ee pU Fed ecu rk aal aee x TERM cates 249 Downloading Diagnostic Information 2 aicut eater tnnt he tL cepe uten anb etn P RE udin 250 Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger ssssssssssssssseseeennnne ennt 251 Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support sssss 252 Gonfiguring the LHX Devi o easier reote nene her
260. e wrench The appropriate torque settings vary according to the nut size Nut size M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 Torque setting N m 0 49 1 27 1 96 2 94 4 9 Tolerance 10 8 5 3 5 2 d Check the ground wire connection It should be secure and not move or rotate 454 S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 9 In Line Monitors 6 Fasten the ring terminals of all remaining wires to the terminal block and tighten each using a torque screwdriver The appropriate torque settings vary according to the screw size Screw size Torque setting Tolerance N m M3 0 49 10 M4 1 27 8 M5 1 96 5 M6 2 94 3 5 M8 4 9 2 Make sure each ring terminal is firmly fastened and cannot be twisted by hand Use the following guidelines to help terminal block wiring In single phase Raritan products with world wide ratings the terminals are labeled L1 and L2 L1 is the phase wire L2 is either the neutral 120 230V installations or another phase wire 208V installations In all 3 phase products L1 is phase A L2 is phase B L3 is phase C and N is neutral For Raritan in line monitors where there is a one to one correspondence between plug and receptacle maintain the same wire colors for inlet and outlet flexible cords 7 Make final adjustments to the cable gland and verify the jacket of the flexible cord extends into the Raritan product Hand tighten the gland nut and finish tightening with a torque wrench Ap
261. ecimal RGB value of a color in the accompanying text box 7 Click OK to save the changes zie Raritan D Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Expanding a Blade Extension Strip A blade extension strip like an asset sensor has multiple tag ports After connecting it to a specific asset sensor it is displayed as a folder on that asset sensor s page Note If you need to temporarily disconnect the tag connector of the blade extension strip wait at least 1 second before connecting it back or the PX may not detect it gt To expand a blade extension strip folder 1 Click the desired asset sensor in the left pane The selected asset sensor s page opens in the right pane 2 Locate the rack unit tag port where the blade extension strip is connected M Rack Units Rack Unit Index Slot Name Asset ID nx 1 1 b D 2 2 00000007CACBR m h 3 3 ur 4 4 3 Double click that rack unit or click the white arrow P prior to the folder icon The arrow then turns into a black gradient arrow 44 and all tag ports appear below the folder Rack Units Rack Unit Index Slot Name Asset ID ur 1 1 sp 2 2 00000007CACB ur 1 ur 2 mj 3 m 4 m E m 6 ms 7 m 8 mr 9 ar 10 m 11 m 12 mi 13 i 14 m 15 m 16 m 3 3 it 4 4 xdi Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface gt To collapse a blade extension strip Double click the blade extension strip folder or click th
262. ect and display the connected device zie Raritan Ms 114 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface A specific device type The PX always displays the selected device type no matter which device is connected or whether the selected device is detected or not Available device types are listed below Device type Description Asset Strip Raritan asset sensors Power CIM Select this type when connecting one of the following Raritan products Raritan power CIM D2CIM PWR This CIM is used to connect the PX to the Raritan digital KVM switch Dominion KX II Dominion KSX II Dominion SX LHX 20 Schroff LHX 20 heat exchanger This device type is available only after the LHX support is enabled LHX 40 Schroff LHX 40 heat exchanger This device is available only after the LHX support is enabled 4 Click OK to save the changes Configuring the Serial Port You can change the bit rate of the serial port labeled CONSOLE MODEM on the PX device The default bit rate is 115200 bps Bit rate adjustment may be necessary only when you integrate the PX with another Raritan product via the serial interface Change the bit rate before connecting it to a Raritan product through the serial port or there are communication problems Note The serial port setting is especially useful when the PX works in conjunction with Raritan s Dominion LX KVM switch The Dominion LX only supports 19200 bps for communications over the serial interface
263. ected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab 4 Create specific rules See the table for different operations Action Procedure Add a rule to the end of Click Append The Append new Rule dialog appears the rules list Type an IP address and subnet mask in the IP Mask field Select Accept Drop or Reject from the drop down list in the Policy field Accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es Drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Click OK to save the changes The system automatically numbers the rule Insert a rule between two Select the rule above which you want to insert a new rule For example existing rules to insert a rule between rules 3 and 4 select 4 Click Insert The Insert new Rule dialog appears Type an IP address and subnet mask in the IP Mask field Select Accept Drop or Reject from the drop down list in the Policy field Accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es Drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host fo
264. ection Ports Depending on the model you purchased the total number of ports available varies e For most of Zero U models there are 6 ports located on the front panel as shown below FOATURG usop SENSOR hos L Jesum ETHERNET B5B CONSOLE MODEM e For most of 1U and 2U models there are 7 ports located on front and back panels respectively Front panel ports 1U 2U x3 asee CONSOLE MODEM E Eo GORSOLE HOQEM D USB A USB 3 Back panel ports SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 The only port difference between Zero U 1U and 2U models is that Zero U models provide only one sensor port while 1U and 2U models provide two ETHERNET FEATURE The table below explains the function of each port Port Used for USB B Establishing a USB connection between a computer and the PX device This port can be used for disaster recovery of the PX device Contact Raritan Technical Support for instructions zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU Port USB A FEATURE CONSOLE MODEM SENSOR ETHERNET 64 Used for Connecting a USB device such as a Logitech webcam This is a host port which is powered per USB 2 0 specifications Connection to some Raritan access products such as Dominion KX II through the use of a power CIM OR Connection to a Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 device through a RJ 45 to RS 232 cable provided by Schroff OR Connection to a Raritan asset management sensor
265. ed and press Enter Type the same new password and press Enter If the password change is completed successfully the config prompt appears S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Modifying a User s Personal Data You can change a user s personal data including the user s full name telephone number and email address gt To change a user s full name use this command syntax config f user modify name fullName lt full_name gt gt To change a user s telephone number use this command syntax config f user modify name telephoneNumber lt phone_number gt gt To change a user s email address use this command syntax config f user modify name eMailAddress email address Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e full name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The full name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces e phone number is the phone number that can reach the specified user The phone number variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces e email address is the email address of the specified user Tip You can combine all commands to modify the parameters of a specific user profile at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Example The following command modifies two parameters for the user profile May config f user modify May fullN
266. eds adjust them in the Webcam Setup dialog gt 1 To adjust the image or video properties Click on the webcam shown on the Webcam Management page or in the navigation tree See Configuring Webcams on page 242 Click Setup Click the Controls tab Adjust the desired property by adjusting the corresponding slide bar Viewing the Webcam Snapshots or Videos With a Logitech webcam connected to the PX device you can visually monitor the environment around the PX via snapshots or videos captured by the webcam The PX allows you to switch between snapshots or live videos being captured by the webcam gt 1 To switch between the snapshot and video mode Click the Webcam icon in the navigation tree Note A Webcam icon appears only when a supported Logitech webcam is connected to the PX See Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional on page 58 243 244 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 By default the PX enters the snapshot mode Wait around one minute for the snapshot to appear In the snapshot mode a snapshot mode icon appears on the top left corner of the image The webcam s location information if available is displayed in the Location pane below the image To change the image resolution click Setup and select a different resolution from the Resolution drop down list The displayed image is updated with the latest snapshot when the resolution changes To save the snapshot being displ
267. ee eene cain Sung eddies ultra d dax tease spo dann ad su nd sd eae 500 GLI Gommana Applicablility iron erected ta reed ted inn t dot spa dux E iaiia 500 SNOW Command S seco edet ae e aa tena tenn tet deel ta edanean da e aiita dt tries 500 Configuiration Comtmarnds cene ett tendente oho ten aian s SA KON Ad crx a NRKS 502 Otlier Commands sessirnar iaa ha entran RR Ra Roe ku au Ee aaa cud rc ke a EERENS 503 Truncated Data iri the Web Interface ctt a dagen dade caste ta arai 504 Reserving IP Addresses in Windows DHCP Servers sse 504 Index 505 zie Raritan d Applicable Models This user guide is applicable to the PX2 3nnn PX2 4nnn and PX2 5nnn series where n is a number Note For information on PX2 1nnn and PX2 2nnn series see the PX 1000 2000 Series User Guide or online help on the Raritan website hitp www raritan com Below is a brief comparison between PDU models that are prefixed with PX2 Features PX2 1nnn PX2 2nnn PX2 3nnn PX2 4nnn PX2 5nnn in line monitors Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Inlet power measurement Yes Yes Yes Outlet power measurement Yes Yes Outlet switching Yes Yes Load shedding Yes Identical number of inlets and outlets Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IPv4 support Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IPv6 support Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Wired networking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Wireless networking Raritan 7 Features PX2 1nnn PX2 2nnn PX2 3nnn in line monitors Yes Yes Yes
268. efault length unit is set to feet e The default pressure unit is set to psi Role Configuration Commands A role configuration command begins with role Creating a Role This command syntax creates a new role with a list of semicolon separated privileges assigned to the role config f role create name lt privilegel gt lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt If a specific privilege contains any arguments that privilege should be followed by a colon and the argument s zie Raritan d Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config 418 role create lt name gt lt privilegel gt lt argumentl1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e privilege1 lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 418 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege Separate a privilege and its argument s with a colon and separate arguments with a comma if there are more than one argument for a privilege All Privileges This table lists all privileges Note that available privileges vary according to the model you purchased For example a PDU withou
269. emove specified privileges that are not available Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e privilege privilege2 lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 418 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege Separate a privilege and its argument s with a colon and separate arguments with a comma if there are more than one argument for a privilege Example The following command modifies the privileges of the role tester config role modify tester addPrivileges changeAuthSettings removePrivileges firmwareUpgrade Results e The changeAuthSettings Change Authentication Settings privilege is added to the role e The firmwareUpgrade Firmware Upgrade privilege is removed from the role Deleting a Role This command syntax deletes an existing role config role delete lt name gt TT SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command deletes an existing role config ft role delete tester EnergyWise Configuration Commands An EnergyWise configuration command begins with energywise Enabling or Disabling EnergyWise This command syntax determines whether the Cisco EnergyWise endpoint implemented on the PX device is enabled conf
270. en certain parameters are exceeded See Setting Power Thresholds on page 173 for a description of how thresholds work Note When configuring the thresholds via SNMP set commands ensure the value of upper critical threshold is higher than that of upper warning threshold zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using SNMP 272 Configuring NTP Server Settings Using SNMP can change the following NTP server related settings e Enable or disable synchronizing the PDU s date and time with NTP servers e Enable or disable the use of DHCP assigned NTP servers if synchronization with NTP servers is enabled e Manually assign the primary NTP server if the use of DHCP assigned NTP servers is disabled e Manually assign the secondary NTP server optional Tip To specify the time zone use the CLI or web interface instead For the CLI see Setting the Time Zone on page 342 For the web interface see Setting the Date and Time on page 110 When using the SNMP SET command to specify or change NTP servers itis required that both the NTP server s address type and address be set in the command line simultaneously For example the SNMP command to change the primary NTP server s address from IPv4 192 168 84 84 to host name looks similar to the following snmpset v2c c private 192 168 84 84 firstNTPServerAddressType dns firstNTPServerAddress angu pep com Retrieving Energy Usage You can discover how much energy an IT
271. ensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified environmental sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 3 to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor externalsensor 3 temperature assertionTimeout 4 User Configuration Commands Most user configuration commands begin with user except for the password change command Creating a User Profile This command syntax creates a new user profile config user create lt name gt lt option gt lt roles gt After performing the user creation command the PX prompts you to assign a password to the newly created user Then 1 Type the password and press Enter 2 Re type the same password for confirmation and press Enter idi SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable CANNOT contain spaces e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the newly created user profile disable Disables the newly created user profile e lt roles gt is a role or a list o
272. er and determines the permissions for the user accordingly When configured for LDAP authentication all PX users must have an account on the LDAP server Local authentication only users will have no access to the PX except for the admin who always can access the PX 147 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Gathering the External Authentication Information No matter which type of external authentication is preferred the first step is to gather the data of all external authentication servers that you want to use Gathering the LDAP Information It requires knowledge of your LDAP server and directory settings to configure the PX for LDAP authentication If you are not familiar with the settings consult your LDAP administrator for help To configure LDAP authentication you need to check e The IP address or hostname of the LDAP server e Whether the Secure LDAP protocol LDAP over SSL is being used f Secure LDAP is in use consult your LDAP administrator for the CA certificate file e The network port used by the LDAP server e The type of the LDAP server usually one of the following options OpenLDAP f using an OpenLDAP server consult the LDAP administrator for the Bind Distinguished Name DN and password Microsoft Active Directory AD f using a Microsoft Active Directory server consult your AD administrator for the name of the Active Directory Domain e Bind Distinguished Name DN and password if
273. er based on your web browser version Back Select All Create Shortcut Add to Favorites View Source Encoding LN Print Refresh Append to Existing PDF Convert to Adobe PDF Export to Microsoft Excel Properties S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Viewing the Dashboard When you log in to the web interface the Dashboard page is displayed by default This page provides an overview of the PX device s status The page is divided into various sections according to the component type such as inlet s outlets circuit breakers and alerted sensors Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 After clicking any other icon in the hierarchical tree the Dashboard page is overridden To return to the Dashboard page click the Dashboard icon When the Dashboard page is opened you can do the following to uncover or hide specific data gt To collapse any section 1 Locate the section you want to collapse 2 Click the upward arrow prior to the section title The data specific to the section is hidden gt To expand a collapsed section 1 Locate the section you want to expand 2 Click the downward arrow prior to the section title The data specific to the section appears Alerted Sensors One of the sections on the Dashbo
274. er to 192 168 80 78 config f time ntp secondServer 192 168 80 78 Overriding the DHCP Assigned NTP Servers This command syntax determines whether the customized NTP server settings override the DHCP specified NTP servers config f time ntp overrideDHCPProvidedServer option Variables e option is one of these options true or false Mode Description true Customized NTP server settings override the DHCP specified NTP servers false Customized NTP server settings do NOT override the DHCP specified NTP servers zie Raritan zi 342 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command overrides the DHCP specified NTP servers with the customized NTP servers including the primary and secondary NTP servers config time ntp overrideDHCPProvidedServer tru Setting the Time Zone In addition to the web interface the CLI also provides a list of time zones for you to configure the date and time for your PX device config time zone Example gt To set the time zone 1 Type the time zone command as shown below and press Enter config time zone 2 The system shows a list of time zones Type the index number of the desired time zone and press Enter 3 Type apply forthe selected time zone to take effect Setting the Automatic Daylight Savings Time This command syntax enables or disables the application of the daylight savings time to the time settings config time autoD
275. ers up config f pdu outletSequence option Variables option is one of the options default or a comma separated list of outlet numbers Option Description default All outlets are switched ON in the ASCENDING order from outlet 1 to the final outlet when the PX device powers up A comma All outlets are switched ON in the order you specify separated list of using the comma separated list outlet numDe S reo list must include all outlets on the PDU SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command causes a 10 outlet PDU to first power on the 8th to 6th outlets and then the rest of outlets in the ascending order after the PDU powers up config pdu outletSequence 8 6 1 5 9 10 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence Delay This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax sets the delays in seconds for outlets when turning on all outlets in sequence config pdu outletSequenceDelay lt outlet1 gt lt delayl gt lt outlet2 gt lt delay2 gt lt outlet3 gt lt delay3 gt Separate outlet numbers and their delay settings with a colon Outlets followed by delays are separated with a semicolon Variables e lt outlet1 gt lt outlet2 gt lt outlet3 gt and the like are individual outlet numbers or a range of outlets e lt delay1 gt lt delay2 gt lt delay3 gt and the like are the delay time in seconds Example
276. erted above upper warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole OUTLETPOLE of outlet OUTLET asserted below lower warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole l OUTLETPOLE J of outlet OUTLET asserted below lower critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP unavailable Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP asserted above upper critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP asserted above upper warning Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP asserted below lower warning Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP asserted below lower critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP is open External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOT unavailable External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT asserted above upper critical External sensor EXTSENSORNAMEJ in slot EXTSENSORSLOT asserted above upper warning Default Assertion Message when the Event FALSE OUTLET deasserted above upper warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole DUTLETPOLET of outlet OUTLET deasserted below lower warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole DUTLETPOLEJ of outlet OUTLET deasserted below lower critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP available Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP deasserted ab
277. ervers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available the PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers d Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Role of a DNS Server As Internet communications are carried out on the basis of IP addresses appropriate DNS server settings are required for mapping domain names host names to corresponding IP addresses or the PX may fail to connect to the given host Therefore DNS server settings are important for external authentication With appropriate DNS settings the PX can resolve the external authentication server s name to an IP address for establishing a connection If the SSL encryption is enabled the DNS server settings become critical since only fully qualified domain name can be used for specifying the LDAP server For information on external authentication see Setting Up External Authentication on page 147 Modifying the Network Service Settings The PX supports these network communication services HTTPS HTTP Telnet and SSH HTTPS and HTTP enable the access to the web interface and Telnet and SSH enable the access to the command line interface see Using the Command Line Interface on page 273 By default SSH is enabled Telnet is disabled and all TCP ports for supported services are set to standard ports You can change default settings if necessary Note Telnet access is disabled by default because it communicates
278. es e host is the name or IP address of the host you want to trace Example The following command displays the existing network routing for the host 192 168 84 222 diag traceroute 192 168 84 222 Quitting the Diagnostic Mode gt To quit the diagnostic mode use this command diag gt exit The prompt appears after pressing Enter indicating that you have entered the administrator mode Retrieving Previous Commands If you would like to retrieve any command that was previously typed in the same connection session press the Up arrow MN on the keyboard until the desired command is displayed Automatically Completing a Command 446 A CLI command always consists of several words You can easily enter a command by typing first word s or letter s and then pressing Tab or Ctrl i instead of typing the whole command word by word gt To have a command completed automatically 1 Type initial letters or words of the desired command Make sure the letters or words you typed are unique so that the CLI can identify the command you want S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 2 Press Tab or Cirl i until the complete command appears Example 1 Type the first word of the reset factorydefaults command that is reset Then press Tab or Cirl i to make the rest of the command appears Example 2 Type the first word and initial letters of the second word of the security enforceHttpsForWe
279. es of PDUs Note that the LED display might slightly vary according to the PDU you purchased Zero U models OUTLET UNE CB Ua O zur A RESET 4 ur BOTH DOWN gt O un iaag sewsck 1U models CURRENT O fA VOLTAGEO nt Power O few UB LOAD O ILL SENSOR O OUTLET LINE CH UB RESET 2U models zie Raritan 65 66 Chapter 5 Using the PDU pet 2 OUTLET LINE CB US CURE O o RESET vecta sawer O un tasai sensor O The LED display consists of e Arow displaying three digits e Arow displaying two digits e Up and Down buttons e Five LEDs for measurement units A Zero U model can detect its own orientation through the built in tilt sensor and automatically changes the direction of the alphanumeric digits shown on the LED display for easy reading To lock the direction of the digits shown on the LED display you can set the display orientation using the command line interface See Changing the LED Display Orientation on page 313 Note When a PX device powers up it proceeds with the power on self test and software loading for a few moments When the software has completed loading the LED display illuminates Three Digit Row The three digit row shows the readings for the selected component Values that may appear include e Current voltage or active power of the selected outlet e Active power or unbalanced load of the inlet e Current of the selected circuit
280. es section To view LHX events associated with the PX click this button Operating Hours Operating hours are the accumulative time since the LHX heat exchanger is first connected to the PX device and turned ON The PX web interface displays the operating hours both for the heat exchanger and its fans Operating hour information is located in the Statistics section of each heat exchanger page Statistics Operating Hours Varistar LHX 41di6h Operating Hours Fan M1 Oh Operating Hours Fan M2 4d4h Operating Hours Fan M3 8d8h Operating Hours Fan M4 12d12h Operating Hours Fan M5 16d16h Operating Hours Fan M6 20 d 20 h Operating Hours Fan M7 25d em Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Below are the time units used for operating hours e h hour s e d day s For example 3d 5h means the total operating time is 3 days and 5 hours Turning the LHX On or Off The PX allows you to remotely turn on or off a connected heat exchanger gt To control the LHX heat exchanger 1 If the Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder 2 Click the LHX heat exchanger in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that device opens in the right pane 3 Locate the Information section To turn off the LHX heat exchanger click Switch Off To turn on the LHX heat exchanger click Switch On 4 If you clicked Switch Off i
281. es the access priority of remote authentication servers The PX first tries to access the top server in the list for authentication then the next one if the access to the first one fails and so on until the PX device successfully connects to one of the listed servers Note After successfully connecting to one external authentication server the PX STOPS trying to access the remaining authentication servers in the list regardless of the user authentication result gt To re sort the authentication server access list 1 Choose Device Settings Security Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Select the remote authentication server whose priority you want to change 3 Click Move up or Move down until the selected server reaches the desired position in the list 4 Click OK to save the changes Testing the Server Connection You can test the connection to any external authentication server to verify the server accessibility or the validity of the authentication settings gt To test the connection to an authentication server 1 Choose Device Settings Security Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the remote authentication server that you want to test Click Test Connection to start the connection test Editing the Authentication Server Settings If the configuration on any external authentication server has been changed such as the port number you
282. eshold as indicated below Upper Critical Threshold lt Reading 231 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Note The symbol lt means smaller than lt or equal to Unmanaging Environmental Sensors When it is unnecessary to monitor a particular environmental factor you can unmanage or release the corresponding environmental sensor so that the PX device stops retrieving the sensor s reading and or state gt To release a managed sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane 3 Select the checkbox of the sensor you want to unmanage on the External Sensors page To release multiple sensors select the checkboxes of all desired sensors To select all environmental sensors listed on the External Sensors page have the checkbox in the header row selected 4 Click Release After a sensor is removed from management the ID number assigned to that sensor is released and can be automatically assigned to any newly detected sensor Asset Management Configure the asset management settings only when an asset sensor is physically connected to the PX device Note To set up an asset m
283. ess Security Control 128 The PX provides tools to control access You can require HTTPS encryption enable the internal firewall and create firewall rules and create login limitations Tip You can also create and install the certificate or set up external authentication servers to control any access See Setting Up an SSL Certificate on page 142 and Setting Up External Authentication on page 147 Forcing HTTPS Encryption HTTPS uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL technology to encrypt all traffic to and from the PX device so it is a more secure protocol than HTTP You can force users to access the PX web interface through the HTTPS protocol only By default this protocol is enabled gt To force HTTPS access to the web interface 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Force HTTPS for Web Access 2 Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to enforce the HTTPS service 3 Choose Device Settings gt Security to verify the Force HTTPS for Web Access checkbox is selected as shown in this diagram Force HTTPS for Web Access If the checkbox is not selected repeat these steps After enabling the HTTPS protocol all access attempts using HTTP are redirected to HTTPS automatically Configuring the Firewall The PX has a firewall that you can configure to prevent specific IP addresses and ranges of IP addresses from accessing the PX device By default the firewall is disabled gt To
284. f comma separated roles assigned to the specified user profile Example The following command creates a new user profile and sets two parameters for the new user config user create May enable admin Results e Anew user profile May is created e The new user profile is enabled e The admin role is assigned to the new user profile Modifying a User Profile A user profile contains various parameters that you can modify Tip You can combine all commands to modify the parameters of a specific user profile at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 zie Raritan iis Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 406 Changing a User s Password This command syntax allows you to change an existing user s password if you have the Administrator Privileges config user modify lt name gt password After performing the above command PX prompts you to enter a new password Then 1 Type a new password and press Enter 2 Re type the new password for confirmation and press Enter Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change Example The following procedure illustrates how to change the password of the user May 1 Verify that you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 305 2 Typethe following command to change the password for the user profile May config user modify May password Type a new password when prompt
285. f the cycling power off period in seconds which is an integer between 0 and 3600 Example The following command sets the power off period of the power cycling operation to 5 seconds config f pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod 5 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay Time This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax sets the inrush guard delay config f pdu inrushGuardDelay timing Variables e timing is a delay time between 100 and 100000 milliseconds Example The following command sets the inrush guard delay to 1000 milliseconds that is 1 second config f pdu inrushGuardDelay 1000 zie Raritan id Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet Initialization Delay This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines the outlet initialization delay timing on device startup See Setting the Initialization Delay on page 164 for information on outlet initialization delay config pdu outletInitializationDelayOnDeviceStartup timing Variables e timing is a delay time between 1 and 3600 seconds Example The following command sets the outlet initialization delay timing to 5 seconds config pdu outletInitializationDelayOnDeviceStartup 5 Specifying Non Critical Outlets This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines critical and non critical outlets It is assoc
286. face Determining the Time Setup Method This command syntax determines the method to configure the system date and time config time method lt method gt Variables e method is one of the time setup options manual or nip Mode Description manual The date and time settings are customized ntp The date and time settings synchronize with a specified NTP server Example The following command sets the date and time settings by using the NTP servers config time method ntp Setting the NTP Parameters A time configuration command that is used to set the NTP parameters begins with time ntp Specifying the Primary NTP Server This command syntax specifies the primary time server if synchronization with the NTP server is enabled config time ntp firstServer lt first_server gt Variables e The first server is the IP address or host name of the primary NTP server Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the primary time server to 192 168 80 66 config time ntp firstServer 192 168 80 66 Specifying the Secondary NTP Server This command syntax specifies the primary time server if synchronization with the NTP server is enabled config time ntp secondServer lt second_server gt Variables e he second server is the IP address or host name of the secondary NTP server Example The following command sets the secondary time serv
287. face Setting the Inlet s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an inlet config f sensor inlet n sensor type lowerCritical option Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command disables the Lower Critical threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current config f sensor inlet 1 current lowerCritical disable 383 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 384 Setting the Inlet s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an i
288. figure the Service Set Identifier SSID parameter To set Use this command SSID network wireless SSID ssid where lt ssid gt is the SSID string If necessary configure more wireless parameters shown in the following table To set Use this command BSSID network wireless BSSID bssid where bssid is the AP MAC address or none if not available 23 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Use this command Authentication network wireless authMethod method lt method gt where method is psk for Pre Shared Key or eap for Extensible Authentication Protocol PSK network wireless PSK psk where lt psk gt is the PSK string EAP outer network wireless authentication eapOuterAuthentication outer auth where outer auth is PEAP EAP inner network wireless authentication eapInnerAuthentication inner auth where inner auth is MSCHAPVv2 EAP identity network wireless eapIdentity identity where identity is your user name for EAP authentication EAP password network wireless eapPassword When prompted to enter the password for EAP authentication type the password EAP CA network wireless certificate eapCACertificate When prompted to enter the CA certificate open the certificate with a text editor copy and paste the content into the communications program Note The content to be copied from the CA certificate does NOT include the first line contain
289. for Multiple Sensors You can configure thresholds for multiple environmental sensors of the same type at a time For example if you want all temperature sensors to have identical upper and lower thresholds follow the procedure below to set up all temperature sensors together gt To configure thresholds of multiple environmental sensors 1 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane 2 Select the checkboxes of those environmental sensors whose threshold settings should be the same Make sure the selected sensors belong to the same type To select all environmental sensors listed on the External Sensors page have the checkbox in the header row selected 3 Click Setup Note that the Setup button is disabled if any of the selected sensors belongs to a different type 4 Configure the thresholds as described in Configuring Environmental Sensors on page 224 227 228 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Viewing Sensor Data Readings of the environmental sensors will display in the web interface after these sensors are properly connected and managed The Dashboard page shows the information for managed environmental sensors only while the External Sensors page shows the information for both of managed and unmanaged ones If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tr
290. g the Command Line Interface Setting an Outlet s Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax determines the power off period of the power cycling operation for a specific outlet config f outlet n cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e timing is the time of the cycling power off period in seconds which is an integer between 0 and 3600 Note This setting overrides the PDU defined cycling power off period on a particular outlet See Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period on page 309 Example The following command sets the power off period of outlet 8 to 3 seconds when the power cycling operation is performed config ft outlet 8 cyclingPowerOffPeriod 3 Inlet Configuration Commands An inlet configuration command begins with inlet You can configure an inlet by using the inlet configuration command SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Inlet Name This command syntax names an inlet config inlet lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 The value is an integer between 1 and 50 e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contai
291. ge button to insert it into the customized message Definition The label of the newly activated inlet AMSBLADESLOTPOSITION The horizontal slot position an action applies to AMSLEDCOLOR The RGB LED color AMSLEDMODE The LED indication mode AMSLEDOPMODE The LED operating mode AMSNAME The name of an asset strip AMSNUMBER The numeric ID of an asset strip AMSRACKUNITPOSITION The vertical rack unit position an action applies to AMSSTATE The human readable state of an asset strip AMSTAGID The asset tag ID CONFIGPARAM The name of a configuration parameter CONFIGVALUE The new value of a configuration parameter DATETIME The human readable timestamp of the event occurrence DEVICEIP The IP address of the device the event occurred on DEVICENAME The name of the device the event occurred on EXTSENSORNAME The name of an external sensor EXTSENSORSLOT The ID of an external sensor slot IFNAME The human readable name of a network interface INLETPOLE The inlet power line identifier INLETSENSOR The inlet sensor name SE Raritan Placeholder INLET ISASSERTED LDAPERRORDESC LHXFANID LHXPOWERSUPPLYID LHXSENSORID LEDCOLOR LEDMODE LEDOPMODE MONITOREDHOST OCPSENSOR OCP OLDVERSION OUTLETPOLE OUTLETSENSOR OUTLET PDUPOLESENSOR PORTID PORTTYPE SENSORREADINGUNIT SENSORREADING SMTPRECIPIENTS SMTPSERVER TIMESTAMP TRANSFERSWITCHREASON
292. gement tag ports it supports up to 48 rack units on a cabinet Determine how to number all rack units on the asset sensor by selecting an option in the Numbering Mode Top Down The rack units are numbered in the ascending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit Bottom Up The rack units are numbered in the descending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit In the Numbering Offset field select the starting number For example if you select 3 the first rack unit is numbered 3 the second is numbered 4 the third is numbered 5 and so on until the final number Indicate how the asset sensor is mounted on the rack in the Orientation field The rack unit that is most close to the RJ 45 connector of the asset sensor will be marked with the index number 1 in the web interface 233 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface For the latest version of asset sensors with a built in tilt sensor it is NOT necessary to configure the orientation setting manually The PX device can detect the orientation of the asset sensors and automatically configure it Top Connector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located on the top Bottom Connector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located at the bottom Click OK to save the changes Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors Each LED on the asset sensor indicates the presence and absence of
293. ger and the PX device Note that only the PDUs whose model names begin with PX2 support the LHX heat exchangers For more information on the LHX heat exchanger see the user documentation accompanying that product To establish a connection between the PDU and LHX heat exchanger an RJ 45 to RS 232 adapter cable provided by Schroff is required gt Toconnect an LHX heat exchanger 1 Plug the RS 232 DB9 end of the adapter cable into the RS 232 port on the Schroff LHX heat exchanger 2 Plug the RJ 45 end of the cable into the port labeled FEATURE on your PX device See Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger on page 251 for enabling the support of the LHX heat exchanger 59 60 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting an RF Code PDU Sensor Tag Optional If you have the RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag you can have the power data of the PX sent to the RF Code management software for monitoring the energy utilization status See RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution on page 495 for more information gt To send the power data of the PX to RF Code software Plug an RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag into the SENSOR port of the PX S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU This chapter explains how to use the PX device It describes the LEDs and ports on the PDU and explains how to use the LED display panel It also explains how the circuit breaker overcurrent protector works and when the beeper sounds In Thi
294. gs in for the first time after this checkbox is enabled Click the SNMPv3 tab to set the SNMPv3 access permission The permission is disabled by default a To permit the SNMPv3 access by this user select the Enable SNMPv3 access checkbox Otherwise leave the checkbox disabled S Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Note The SNMPv3 protocol must be enabled for SNMPv3 access See Configuring the SNMP Settings on page 107 b Setup SNMPv3 parameters if enabling the SNMPv3 access permission Field Security Level Use Password as Authentication Pass Phrase Authentication Pass Phrase Confirm Authentication Pass Phrase Use Authentication Pass Phrase as Privacy Pass Phrase Privacy Pass Phrase Confirm Privacy Pass Phrase Description Click the drop down arrow to select a preferred security level from the list NoAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and no privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy This is the default This checkbox is configurable only if AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv is selected When the checkbox is selected the authentication pass phrase is identical to the user s password To specify a different authentication pass phrase disable the checkbox Type the authentication pass phrase in this field if the Use Password as Authentication Pass Phrase checkbox is disabled The pass phrase must consist
295. gt To modify all contents of an existing IPv4 rule use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule modify rule number startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip role role policy policy e Pv6 commands gt To modify a rule s IPv6 address range use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip gt To modify an IPv6 rule s role use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number role role gt To modify an IPv6 rule s policy use this command syntax Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number policy policy gt To modify all contents of an existing IPv6 rule use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule modify rule number startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip role role policy policy Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to modify e lt start_ip gt is the starting IP address e end ip is the ending IP address e role is one of the existing roles e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role deny Drops t
296. he PX Admin role in the Description field In this example we type The role includes all privileges to describe the role 4 Click the Privileges tab to select the Administrator permission The Administrator permission allows users to configure or change all PX settings a Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears b Select the permission named Administrator Privileges from the Privileges list c Click Add aa Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 5 Click OK to save the changes The PX_Admin role is created Description System defined administrator role including all privileges Predefined operator role lin The role includes all privileges The role can only views PX settings A new xt Delete 5 6 Click Close to quit the dialog zie Raritan id Appendix E Integration The PX device can work with certain Raritan or non Raritan products to provide diverse power solutions In This Chapter Power IQ Configuration jx edente etn xtate eee a 478 Dominion KX Il Configuratio sssrini 480 Dominion KSX II or SX Configuration sssessss 484 olee e E E E A E EEE 492 RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution sssssssss 495 Power IQ Configuration Raritan s Power IQ is a software application that collects and manages the data from different PDUs installed in your server room or data center Wi
297. he Webcam Management folder The Snapshots page opens Click on the Setup Storage icon The Storage Setup dialog opens By default Local meaning the PX is the designated default storage Select CIFS Samba as the storage location Enter the server on which to store the images If needed enter the share drive folder to store the images in LY 29 pi coe 9 Enter the username and password needed to access the server the images are stored on 8 Enter or use the slide bar to set the number of images that can be saved to the storage location 9 Click OK 247 248 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Network Diagnostics The PX provides the following tools in the web interface for diagnosing potential networking issues e Ping e Trace Route e List TCP Connections Tip These network diagnostic tools are also available through CLI See Network Troubleshooting on page 442 Pinging a Host The Ping tool is useful for checking whether a host is accessible through the network or Internet gt To ping a host 1 Choose Maintenance gt Network Diagnostics gt Ping The Ping Network Host dialog appears 2 Inthe Host Name field type the name or IP address of the host that you want to check 3 In the Number of Requests field type a number up to 10 or adjust the value by clicking either arrow This number determines how many packets are sent for pinging the host 4 Click Run Ping to start pinging the h
298. he ability to display temperatures in Celsius or Fahrenheit height in meters or feet and pressure in Pascal or psi according to user credentials A combination of outlet types for example C13 and C19 outlets in select models A combination of outlet voltages 120 and 208 volts in select models Chapter 1 Introduction Package Contents Support for high current devices such as Blade Servers in select models Support for Gigabit Ethernet 1000Mbit s in select models The following sub topics describe the equipment and other material included in the product package Zero U Products The PX device Screws brackets and or buttons for Zero U A null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only Cable retention clips for outlets for some models only 1U Products The PX device 1U bracket pack and screws A null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only 2U Products The PX device 2U bracket pack and screws A null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU This chapter describes how to rackmount a PX device Only the most common rackmount method
299. he connected detector switch is considered normal For Raritan s water sensors the Normal state should be Normally Open which indicates there is no water detected Adjust the dip switch setting to Normally Open and verify that the LED of the channel where the Raritan s water sensor is connected remains OFF a Old DPX CC2 TR New DPX CC2 TR 5 Toset the Normal state for channel 2 repeat Step 4 for adjusting the other dip switch s setting 6 Install back the dip switch cover Note The dip switch setting must be properly configured or the sensor LED may be incorrectly lit in the Normal state 2 Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Contact Closure Sensor LEDs DPX CC2 TR has LEDs for showing the state of the connected detectors switches The LED is lit when the associated detector switch is in the abnormal state which is the opposite of the Normal state See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 41 for how to set the Normal state The meaning of a lit LED varies depending on the Normal state settings e When the Normal state is set to Normally Closed N C LED Sensor state Not lit Closed Lit Open e When the Normal state is set to Normally Open N O LED Sensor state Not lit Open Lit Closed For Raritan s water sensors the Normal state must be set to Normally Open N O The following is the correct LED behavior based on proper dip switch settings LED Sen
300. he number is always 1 e mode is one of the numbering modes topDown or bottomUp Mode Description topDown The rack units are numbered in the ascending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit bottomUp The rack units are numbered in the descending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit Example The following command causes the rack units of the asset sensor 1 to be numbered in an ascending order from the one closest to the asset sensor s RJ 45 connector to the farthest one That is the rack unit that is most close to the RJ 45 connector is numbered 1 config f assetStrip 1 rackUnitNumberingMode topDown zie Raritan s Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 428 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Offset This command syntax specifies the starting number of rack units on the asset sensors connected to the PX device config assetStrip lt n gt rackUnitNumberingOffset lt number gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e number is a starting number for numbering rack units on the connected asset sensor This value is an integer number Example The following command specifies the starting number of rack units of the asset sensor 1 to be 5 That is the rack units are numbered 5 6 7 and so on from the first to the final rack unit on the asset se
301. he number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to query For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e p is the label of the inlet pole whose sensors you want to query Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor idi SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Sensor type Description apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout settings of the specified inlet pole sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range e If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information This command is only available for PDUs with overcurrent protection mechanism implemented This command syntax shows the specified circuit breaker sensor s threshold related information show sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor ocp n sensor typ
302. he user mode you may have limited permissions to make configuration changes See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 2 Type config and press Enter The config prompt appears indicating that you have entered the configuration mode config _ 3 Now you can type any configuration command and press Enter to change the settings Important To apply new configuration settings you must issue the apply command before closing the terminal emulation program Closing the program does not save any configuration changes See Quitting the Configuration Mode on page 436 PDU Configuration Commands A PDU configuration command begins with pdu You can use the PDU configuration commands to change the settings that apply to the whole PX device The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly zie Raritan i Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 306 Changing the PDU Name This command syntax changes the PX device s name config pdu name lt name gt Variables name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name my px12 to the PDU config pdu name my px12 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax sets the outlet power on sequence when the PDU pow
303. hen the Confirm Bind Password field This information is required only when the Use Bind Credentials checkbox is selected S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 15 Base DN for Search Enter the name you want to bind against the LDAP LDAPS up to 31 characters and where in the database to begin searching for the specified Base DN An example Base Search value might be cn Users dc raritan dc com Consult your authentication server administrator for the appropriate values to enter into these fields 16 Type the following information in the corresponding fields LDAP needs this information to verify user names and passwords Login name attribute also called AuthorizationString User entry object class User search subfilter also called BaseSearch Note The PX will preoccupy the login name attribute and user entry object class with default values which should not be changed unless required 17 Active Directory Domain Type the name of the Active Directory Domain For example testradius com Consult with your Active Directory Administrator for a specific domain name 18 To verify if the authentication configuration is set correctly you may click Test Connection to check whether the PX can connect to the remote authentication server successfully Tip You can also do this by using the Test Connection button in the Authentication Settings dialog 19 Click OK to save the changes The new LDAP server is l
304. hots 1 To configure a record snapshot to webcam storage action Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Record Snapshots to Webcam Storage Select a webcam from the Webcam drop down Selecting the action to perform Start recording or Stop recording If Start recording is selected do the following a Usethe slide bar to specify the total number of snapshots to be taken when the event occurs The maximum amount of snapshots that can be stored on the PX is ten 10 If you set it for a number greater than ten after the tenth snapshot is taken and stored the oldest snapshots are overwritten 193 194 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface b Inthe Time before first Snapshot s field use the slide bar to specify the amount of time in seconds between when the event is triggered and the webcam begins taking snapshots c Inthe Time between Snapshots s field use the slide bar to specify the amount of time between when each snapshot is taken 8 Click OK to save the new action 9 Click Close to quit the dialog Creating Rules After required actions are available you can create event r
305. how all IP configuration parameters show network Show all wireless parameters wireless details Perform this command only when you enable the wireless mode Tip You can also type show network wireless to display a shortened version of wireless settings 11 If all are correct type exit to log out of the PX If any are incorrect repeat Steps 7 to 10 to change any network settings The IP address configured may take seconds to take effect S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Cascading the PX via USB zie Raritan Up to four 4 devices are supported as part of a daisy chain This daisy chain feature permits multiple PX devices to be cascaded using USB cables sharing the Ethernet connectivity accordingly Different models can be cascaded as long as they are running the supported firmware The first device in the chain is the master device and all subsequent devices connected to it are slave devices All devices in the chain are accessible over an IP network with the master PX acting as a network bridge Therefore you can access individual devices via the Web SNMP SSH or Telnet interface no matter they are master or slave devices The USB cascading configuration only supports wired networking so you must make sure e The master device has wired Ethernet connectivity e None of the slave devices has wired Ethernet connectivity Even though you connect any slave device to the LAN through a netwo
306. hreshold related information show sensor outlet n sensor type To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor outlet n sensor type details Variables e n is the number of the outlet whose sensors you want to query e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor zie Raritan id Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the sensor reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified outlet sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including accuracy and range e If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information This command is available for an in line monitor only that is PX2 3nnn series where n is a number This command syntax shows the specified outlet pole sensor s threshold related information show sensor outletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor
307. iE 442 Network Troubleshoot uiste icc erue etiniai anarai anai aaaea rex eec creed exerce a san v nu Erud 442 Entering the Diagnostic Mode ete intei tren enero iren el naa a n ee ER pads 443 Diagnostic Comimahds ac c rne reae so eec rca rd Desa Pot RR kun d Re ete aa d esuada 443 Quitting the Diagnostic Mode tinere ne tenuere pec ce nav ede 446 Retrieving Previous COmMandS usciti orent Renten ER ce saeua EE Denuo Dance aea Ren Rec dg 446 Automatically Completing a Commaxnd sse eene 446 LOGGING OUT OR GU e 447 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors 448 eu EEE 448 Salety Instf GLIOllS cce coacto tee dett eei i Pod el eee UD eo dte c rre e eu ln D RR RR 448 Flexible Cord Installation Instructions cccccccsccsececscsssneceeeeccecseeeaeceeeesceeseseesaeseeeesecesesseaeess 449 Fl xible Cord Selection eee ee he tec de eae E te pd do dba spa a ERR 449 Plug SelectlQhi us suce ania rtp na Rar ah FR rk c ra I D savers 450 zie Raritan Contents xii Receptacle Sele ton RE CHE 450 Derating a Raritan ProdUCt ERO 450 Wiring of 3 Phase In Line MORIEOES sa edu ou cui cereo kanna anid iiaae idat 451 In Line Monitor Unused Channels ssesssssssssssseeenener eene 451 Step by Step Flexible Cord Installation issis 451 In Line Monitors LED DISplay s i rne metet de ee naeh tte et uper ren dea e tex usd sa ira 456 Automatic M
308. iables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e lt rack_unit gt is the index number of the desired rack unit The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name Linux server to the rack unit whose index number is 25 on the asset sensori config rackUnit 1 25 name Linux server ds SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the LED Operation Mode This command syntax determines whether a specific rack unit on the specified asset sensor follows the global LED color settings config Variables rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDOperationMode lt mode gt e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e rack unit is the index number of the desired rack unit The index number of each rack unit is available on the Asset Strip page of the web interface e mode is one of the LED modes automatic or manual Mode automatic manual Example Description This option makes the LED of the specifie
309. iated with the load shedding mode See Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode on page 167 config f pdu nonCriticalOutlets outletsl false outlets2 true Separate outlet numbers and their settings with a colon Separate each false and true setting with a semicolon Variables e outletsi is one or multiple outlet numbers to be set as critical outlets Use commas to separate outlet numbers e outlets2 is one or multiple outlet numbers to be set as NON critical outlets User commas to separate outlet numbers dis SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets outlets 1 2 3 7 and 9 to be critical outlets and 4 5 6 8 10 11 and 12 to be non critical outlets on a 12 outlet PDU config fd pdu nonCriticalOutlets 1 3 7 9 false 4 6 8 10 12 true Enabling or Disabling Data Logging This command syntax enables or disables the data logging feature config pdu dataRetrieval lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the data logging feature disable Disables the data logging feature For more information see Setting Data Logging on page 116 Example The following command enables the data logging feature config pdu dataRetrieval enabl Setting the Data Logging Measurements Per Eniry This command syntax defines the number of measurements a
310. ical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Click OK in the threshold setup dialog to retain the changes To set the thresholds for other sensors repeat Steps 4 to 9 Click OK to save the changes Important The final step is required or the threshold changes are not saved Setting a Circuit Breaker s Thresholds Setting the circuit breaker thresholds enables the PDU to generate alerts when any circuit breaker crosses the thresholds 1 To set the thresholds for a circuit breaker Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the
311. ice specific data is saved to the Bulk Configuration file such as environmental sensor or certain network settings To back up or restore a specific PX device s settings use the Backup Restore feature instead See Backup and Restore of PX Device Settings on page 240 S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Saving a PX Configuration A source device is an already configured PX device that is used to create a configuration file containing the settings that can be shared between PX devices These settings include user and role configurations thresholds event rules security settings and so on This file does NOT contain device specific information including e Device name e System name system contact and system location e Network settings IP address gateway netmask and so on e Device logs e Outlet names e Outlet status e Environmental sensor names e Environmental sensor states and values e SSL certificate Because the date and time settings are saved in the configuration file users should exercise caution when distributing the configuration file to the PX devices in a different time zone than the source device gt To save a configuration file 1 Choose Maintenance gt Bulk Configuration The Bulk Configuration dialog appears Click Download Bulk Configuration When the web browser prompts you to open or save the configuration file click Save Choose a suitable location and save the configurati
312. ie Raritan 487 Appendix E Integration Port Configuration 1 KX local Not Available 2 Dominion KSX2 Port2 Not Available 3 KX8 Local Not Available 4 Dominion KSX2 Port4 Not Available 5 Blade Chassis Port3 Not Available 6 Dominion KSX2 Porte Not Available 7 Dominion KSX2 Port Not Available 8 Dominion KSX2 Port amp Not Available 9 Serial Port 1 Serial 10 Serial Port 2 Serial 11 Serial Port 3 Serial 12 Serial Port 4 Serial 13 Serial Port 5 Serial 14 Serial Port 6 Serial 15 Serial Port 7 Serial 16 Serial Port 8 Serial 17 Power Port 1 PowerStrip 18 Power Port 2 PowerStrip am m TO mum LL Ne DA a ee ae a a maaa Power Control gt To turn an outlet on Click the Power menu to access the Powerstrip page 2 Fromthe Powerstrip drop down select the PX rack PDU power strip you want to turn on Click Refresh to view the power controls Click On Click OK to close the Power On confirmation dialog The outlet will be turned on and its state will be displayed as on Microsoft Internet Explorer gt To turn an outlet off 1 Click Off Raritan zie Raritan Appendix E Integration 2 Click OK on the Power Off dialog Microsoft Internet Explorer Port Outlet 9 wil be powered off Do you want to continue EN 3 Click OK on the Power Off confirmation dialog The outlet will be turned off and its state will be displayed as off Microsoft Internet Explorer
313. ig network ipv4 overrideDNS enabl Configuring the IPv6 Parameters An IPv6 configuration command begins with network ipv6 The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Setting the IPv6 Configuration Mode This command syntax determines the IP configuration mode config f network ipv6 ipConfigurationMode mode Variables e mode is one of the modes automatic or static Mode Description automatic The IPv6 configuration mode is set to automatic ad SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Mode Description static The IPv6 configuration mode is set to static IP address Example The following command sets the IP configuration mode to the static IP address mode config network ipv6 ipConfigurationMode static Setting the IPv6 Preferred Host Name After selecting DHCP as the IPv6 configuration mode you can specify the preferred host name which is optional The following is the command syntax config f network ipv6 preferredHostName lt name gt Variables e name is a host name which Consists of alphanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Example The following command sets the IPv6 preferred host name to my v6host config f network ipv6 preferredHostName my v6host zie Raritan d Chapter 8 Using the Comm
314. ig f energywise enabled option Variables e option is one of the options true or false Option Description true The Cisco EnergyWise feature is enabled false The Cisco EnergyWise feature is disabled Example The following command enables the Cisco EnergyWise feature config f energywis nabled tru 423 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Specifying the EnergyWise Domain This command syntax specifies to which Cisco EnergyWise domain the PX device belongs config energywise domain lt name gt Variables e name is a string comprising up to 127 ASCII printable characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable Example The following command configures the PX device to belong to the Cisco EnergyWise domain named helloDomain config energywise domain helloDomain Specifying the EnergyWise Secret This command syntax specifies the password secret to enter the Cisco EnergyWise domain config energywise secret lt password gt Variables e password is a string comprising up to 127 ASCII printable characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable Example The following command specifies password5233 as the Cisco EnergyWise domain secret password config energywise secret password5233 diis Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the UDP Port This command syntax specifies the UDP port for communications i
315. iguration 280 Wireless Network Settings 100 Wiring of 3 Phase In Line Monitors 449 451 With HyperTerminal e 274 441 With SSH or Telnet 275 513 Index Z Zero U Products 4 9 Raritan Raritan gt U S Canada Latin America Monday Friday 8 a m 6 p m ET Phone 800 724 8090 or 732 764 8886 For CommandCenter NOC Press 6 then Press 1 For CommandCenter Secure Gateway Press 6 then Press 2 Fax 732 764 8887 Email for CommandCenter NOC tech ccnoc raritan com Email for all other products tech raritan com gt China Beijing Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 10 88091890 Shanghai Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 21 5425 2499 GuangZhou Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 20 8755 5561 gt India Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 91 124 410 7881 gt Japan Monday Friday 9 30 a m 5 30 p m local time Phone 81 3 3523 5991 Email support japan raritan com gt Europe Europe Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 31 10 2844040 Email tech europe raritan com United Kingdom Monday Friday 8 30 a m to 5 p m GMT Phone 44 0 20 7090 1390 France Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 33 1 47 56 20 39 Germany Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 30 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 49 20 17 47 98 0 Email rg support raritan com gt Melbourne Australia
316. iguration settings and then deploy those settings to other PX devices The ability to back up and restore a PX device s configuration Software flippable LED display Zero U models Support for SSH and Telnet services For SSH both password and public key authentications are supported Support for both of IPv4 and IPv6 networking Support for Modbus TCP protocol Support for Baytech BSNMP Zero configuration service advertisement support Wireless connection via a Raritan provided wireless USB LAN adapter The ability to share one Ethernet connection by cascading multiple PX devices via the USB interface The ability to visually monitor the data center environment through a connected Logitech webcam Support for webcam images sent via email to designated recipients Support of Cinterion MC52i GSM modems which allow you to send customized SMS messages to designated recipients for specific events The ability to monitor a connected Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 heat exchanger Support for Cisco EnergyWise Support for RF Code energy monitoring system Local overcurrent protection OCP via branch circuit breakers or fuses on products rated over 20A to protect connected equipment against overload and short circuits The ability to diagnose the network such as pinging a host or listing TCP connections The ability to monitor sever accessibility Full disaster recovery option in case of a catastrophic failure during a firmware upgrade T
317. iit rini nore Ent ecu ste DE acd iE Yn ster aes 114 Specifying the Device Altitude eessesssseeseseesseseeeenee einn ennnnnnnnn entres 115 Setting Data LOOQUIG LE 116 Configuring the SMTP Settings cedit ite ep Meceseeasiatiiesecinacdteareadine cp aina NEEESE 117 Setting the EnergyWise Configuration essen 118 Rebooting the PX Deviezen giaa eec nter Deve rex EE Cu lu sa aga E Ceu ped Rees 119 User Manageme nt ssiri nnii aea aaaeaii Eaa aa naaawa aE amaa NEE Eat anaa AE RENEE 119 Greating a User Profile sisisi cro iicet ie dte naianei aaia aana aN NERE aE edad 120 Moditying User Profile nre ee teer trie t mec Su Rc ee n a aC eus 123 Deleting a User Profile caet entrate t tne ett ee dave Le er aO etd Pe dete bL a ra dE 124 Changing the User List View enit iine terere rit tla eL eve dio Y Tira Ee Ec wianie 124 Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units seseseseeeenene 124 Seting UP Role Sepaea 125 Greating a Role recisi a anaE daana Eaa EEA aa EARE 125 Modityinga Role gaiesa eende aa e aee a a Ha E 126 BEIC tesisinin aaie aaa a a a 127 Changing the Role List WiGW sedet utin ttd erat due Lue deoa reme aaa 128 Access Security Controls e e ur aeter bac ts sei tu eeu tuu RE ore ud 128 Forcing ET TIPS ENGIPA tue eiae tue cen rate oett tet eec a Reden du rade 128 Configuring the Firewall 2 tte top danaa nia tale danse eanit andide 12
318. ility 500 CLI commands assetStrip n Y Y Y show show show show assetStripManagement energywise eventlog limit lt n gt class lt event_type gt Not every CLI command applies to all PX PDUs because features vary from model to model For example PX2 4nnn series where n is a number are not outlet switching capable PDUs so outlet switching commands are NOT applicable The tables in this appendix show the command applicability for diverse PX product lines In all tables e PX2 3k represents PX2 3000 series ranging from PX2 3000 to PX2 3999 e PX2 4k represents PX2 4000 series ranging from PX2 4000 to PX2 4999 e PX2 5k represents PX2 5000 series ranging from PX2 5000 to PX2 5999 Show Commands This table indicates the show commands applicability e Y applicable e N NOT applicable PX2 3k PX2 4k PX2 5k Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y S Raritan Appendix F Additional PX Information T i l show externalsensors lt n gt details show history show history bufferlength show inlets lt n gt details show loadshedding show network details show network mode show network services lt option gt show network wireless details show ocp lt n gt details show outlets n details show pdu details show reliability data show reliability errorlog n show roles role name show security details show sensor externalsensor
319. ime select the User Specified Time radio button and then enter the date and time in appropriate fields Use the yyyy mm dd format for the date and the hh mm ss format for the time To set the date delete existing numbers in the Date field and type new ones or click the calendar icon 3 to select a date The time is measured in 24 hour format so enter 13 for 1 00pm 14 for 2 00pm and so on You can enter the time by deleting existing numbers and typing new ones in the hour minute and second fields or clicking the arrows to adjust each number To let an NTP server set the date and time select the Synchronize with NTP Server radio button There are two ways to assign the NTP servers S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To use the DHCP assigned NTP servers make sure the Always use the servers below and ignore DHCP provided servers checkbox is deselected This method is usable only when either IPv4 or IPv6 DHCP is enabled To use the NTP servers that are manually specified select the Always use the servers below and ignore DHCP provided servers checkbox and specify the primary NTP server in the First Time Server field A secondary NTP server is optional You may click Check NTP Servers to verify the validity and accessibility of the specified NTP servers Note If the PX device s IP address is assigned through IPv4 or IPvG DHCP the NTP servers can be automatically discovered When this occurs
320. ing BEGIN CERTIFICATE and the final line containing END CERTIFICATE d To determine which IP protocol is enabled and which IP address returned by the DNS server is used configure the following parameters i E Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Use this command IP protocol network ip proto protocol where protocol is v4Only for enabling IPv4 v6Only for enabling IPv6 or both for enabling both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols IP address network ip returned by dnsResolverPreferenc the DNS resolver server where resolver is preferV4 for IPv4 addresses or preferV6 for IPv6 addresses e If you enabled the IPv4 protocol in the previous step configure the IPv4 network parameters To set Use this command IP network ipv4 configuration ipConfigurationMode mode method where mode is either dhcp for auto configuration default or static for specifying a static IP address For the IPv4 DHCP configuration configure this parameter To set Use this command Preferred host network ipv4 name preferredHostName name optional where name is the preferred host name Tip To override the DHCP assigned IPv4 DNS servers with those you specify manually type this command network ipv4 overrideDNS option where option is enable or disable See the table below for the IPv4 commands for manually specifying DNS servers 25 Chapter 3
321. ing lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Lower Warning threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker config f sensor ocp 3 current lowerWarning enable zie Raritan id Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Circuit Breaker s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is dis
322. ing each ID number indicates whether the number has been assigned to any sensor If it has been assigned to a sensor it shows that sensor s serial number Otherwise it shows the term unused The manual assignment method is unavailable if you selected multiple sensors in Step 1 Click OK The PX starts to track and display the managed sensor s reading and or state To manage additional sensors repeat Steps 3 to 6 Note When the number of managed sensors reaches the maximum you CANNOT manage additional sensors until you remove or replace any managed sensors To remove a sensor see Unmanaging Environmental Sensors on page 232 Configuring Environmental Sensors You may change the default name for easily identifying the managed sensor and describe its location with X Y and Z coordinates gt Ae To configure environmental sensors If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane Select the sensor that you want to configure Click Setup The Setup of external sensor lt serial number gt lt sensor type gt dialog appears where serial number is the serial number of this sensor and
323. ings To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Note The Upper Critical and Lower Critical values are points at which the PX considers the operating environment critical and outside the range of the acceptable threshold Click OK to save the changes Repeat Steps 3 through 9 to configure additional environmental Sensors 225 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting the Z Coordinate Format You can use either the number of rack units or a descriptive text to describe the vertical locations Z coordinates of environmental sensors gt To determine the Z coordinate format 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the External sensors Z coordinate format field click the drop down arrow and select an option fr
324. ings You must enable the IPv4 protocol before you can modify the IPv4 network settings See Selecting the Internet Protocol on page 102 1 To modify the IPv4 settings Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Click the IPv4 Settings tab 3 Inthe IP Auto Configuration field click the drop down arrow and select the desired option from the list Option Description DHCP To auto configure the PX select DHCP With DHCP selected you can enter a preferred DHCP host name which is optional Type the host name in the Preferred Hostname field The host name Consists of alohanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Select the Specify DNS server manually checkbox if necessary Then type the address of the primary DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field The secondary DNS server and DNS suffix are optional Static To manually assign an IP address select Static and enter the following information in the corresponding fields IP address Netmask Gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional DNS Suffix optional 4 Click OK to save the changes Note The PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are avail
325. ings xvi 238 240 Beeper 76 Before You Begin 13 Blade Extension Strip Settings 299 Browser Defined Shortcut Menu 92 Browsing through the Online Help 261 Built in Wireless LAN Adapters xvi 21 Bulk Configuration 238 241 Bulk Configuration for Circuit Breaker Thresholds 177 Bulk Configuration for Outlet Thresholds 174 Button Type Locking Outlets 498 C Cascading the PX via USB xvi 29 64 95 Certificate Signing Request 143 Change Load Shedding State 182 190 Changing a User s Password 406 Changing an Outlet s Default State 367 Changing the Circuit Breaker Name 369 Changing the Column 91 Changing the Cycling Power Off Period 161 Changing the Default Policy 129 138 139 Changing the HTTP Port 332 Changing the HTTP S Settings 105 Changing the HTTPS Port 332 Changing the Inlet Name 369 Changing the LAN Duplex Mode 331 Changing the LAN Interface Speed 330 Changing the LED Display Orientation 66 313 Changing the Measurement Units 413 416 Changing the Modbus Configuration 337 Changing the Modbus Port 339 Changing the Modbus TCP Settings 108 Changing the Outlet Name 366 Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period 162 163 Changing the PDU Name 306 Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period 162 163 Changing the Role List View 128 Changing the Role s 412 Changing the Sensor Description 374 505
326. ion 2 Launch HyperTerminal on your computer and open a console window When the window first opens it is blank Make sure the COM port settings use this configuration Bits per second 115200 115 2Kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None a Flow control None Tip For a USB connection you can find out which COM port is assigned to the PX by choosing Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager and locating the XXX Serial Console under the Ports group where XXX represents this product s name 3 Press Enter The Username prompt appears Username 4 Typea name and press Enter The name is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters Then you are prompted to enter a password zd Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Username admin Password _ 5 Type a password and press Enter The password is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters After properly entering the password the or gt system prompt appears See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 in the PX User Guide for details Tip The Last Login information including the date and time is also displayed if the same user profile was once used to log in to the PX web interface or CLI 6 You are now logged in to the command line interface and can begin administering the PX device With SSH or Telnet You can remotely log in to the command line
327. ion Commands 366 Outlet Information 282 Outlet Management 155 Outlet Monitoring 156 Outlet Page 458 Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information 288 Outlet Sensor Threshold Information 287 Outlet Switching 158 Outlets 61 Overriding the DHCP Assigned NTP Servers 341 Overriding the IPv4 DHCP Assigned DNS Server 326 Overriding the IPv6 DHCP Assigned DNS Server 329 330 Overview 448 485 P Package Contents 4 13 Panel Components 61 Password Aging 353 Password Aging Interval e 354 PDU Configuration 281 PDU Configuration Commands 305 Pinging a Host 248 Plug Selection 450 Power Control 488 491 Power Control Operations 438 Power Cord 61 Power Cycling the Outlet s 440 Power IQ Configuration 478 510 Power Measurement Accuracy 460 Preparing the Installation Site 13 Product Features xv 1 Product Models 1 Providing the EAP CA Certificate 319 PX2 3000 Series 62 PX2 4000 Series 62 PX2 5000 Series 62 Q Querying Available Parameters for a Command 277 278 Querying the DNS Servers 443 Quitting the Configuration Mode 305 351 436 Quitting the Diagnostic Mode 446 R Rack Unit Configuration 430 Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor 298 Rackmount Safety Guidelines 5 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Raritan Training Website xvii 500 Rebooting the PX Device 119 Receptacle Selection 450 Record Snapshots to Web
328. ion Settings dialog appears Select the Local Authentication radio button Click OK to save the changes S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Enabling External and Local Authentication Services To make authentication function properly all the time even when external authentication is not available you can enable both the local and remote authentication services When both authentication services are enabled the PX follows these rules for authentication e When any of the remote authentication servers in the access list is accessible the PX authenticates against the connected authentication server only e When the connection to every remote authentication server fails the PX allows authentication against the local database gt To enable both authentication services 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Make sure you have selected one external authentication radio button such as the LDAP radio button 3 Select the Use Local Authentication if Remote Authentication service is not available checkbox 4 Click OK to save the changes Outlet Management zie Raritan PX allows you to remotely monitor and control the outlets and manage outlet settings through the web interface Naming Outlets You can give each outlet a unique name up to 32 characters long to identify the equipment connected to it The customized name is f
329. ion from the list Auto System determines the optimum LAN speed through auto negotiation 10 Mbit s The LAN speed is always 10 Mbps 100 Mbit s The LAN speed is always 100 Mbps 5 To change the duplex mode click the drop down arrow in the Duplex field and select an option from the list Auto The PX selects the optimum transmission mode through auto negotiation Full Data is transmitted in both directions simultaneously Half Data is transmitted in one direction to or from the PX device at a time 6 Click OK to save the changes Tip You can check the LAN status in the Current State field including the speed and duplex mode 99 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Wireless Network Settings Wireless SSID PSK and BSSID parameters were set during the installation and configuration process See Initial Network Configuration on page 22 You can change them via the web interface gt To modify the wireless interface settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears 2 The Interface Settings tab should have been selected If not click the Interface Settings tab 3 Inthe Network Interface field click the drop down arrow and select Wireless from the list 4 Check the Hardware State field to ensure that the PX device has detected a wireless USB LAN adapter If not verify whether the USB LAN adapter is firmly connected or whether it is supported See
330. ion gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The read only mode is enabled false The read only mode is disabled Example The following command disables the read only mode for the Modbus agent config network services modbus readonly false SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Modbus Port This command syntax changes the Modbus port config f network services modbus port n Variables e n isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default Modbus port is 502 Example This following command changes the Modbus port config f network services modbus port 600 Enabling or Disabling the Service Advertisement This command syntax enables or disables the zero configuration protocol which enables advertising or auto discovery of network services See Enabling Service Advertisement on page 109 for details config network services zeroconfig enabled option Variables e option is one of the options true or false Option Description true The zero configuration protocol is enabled false The zero configuration protocol is disabled Example The following command enables the zero configuration protocol config f network services zeroconfig enabled true Time Configuration Commands A time configuration command begins with time 339 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Inter
331. ip When there are a large number of outlets set the value to a lower number so that you can avoid a long wait before all the outlets are available again ee Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs When the power cycling occurs the default power off period of each outlet follows the PDU defined setting You can adjust the power off period of a particular outlet so that it is turned back on after a different power off period Setting the power off period for a particular outlet to a value other than PDU defined overrides the PDU defined setting on that outlet gt To set the power off period for a specific outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 4 Inthe Power off period during power cycle field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is zero second to one hour Time units in the list are explained below S second
332. ipped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 gt 1 To view managed environmental sensors only Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboard page opens in the right pane Locate the External Sensors section on the Dashboard page The section shows Total number of managed sensors Total number of unmanaged sensors Information of each managed sensor including Name Reading State To view both of managed and unmanaged environmental sensors If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane Detailed information for each connected sensor is displayed including Label number Serial number Sensor type Name Reading S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface State Channel for a contact closure sensor only Sensor Measurement Accuracy Raritan environmental sensors are with the following factory specifications Calibration is not required for environmental sensors e Temperature 2 degrees Celsius e Humidity 5 when humidity lt 60 or 8 when humidity gt 60 e Differential air
333. is Assertion Timeout on page 179 zie Raritan e Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 394 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the pole 2 L2 current of the inlet 1 to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor inletpole 1 L2 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Circuit Breaker Sensors A sensor configuration command for circuit breakers begins with sensor ocp Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold a
334. ises above the upper critical threshold e For a discrete on off sensor this color indicates the sensor is in the alarmed state e Fora circuit breaker trip sensor it means the circuit breaker has tripped zie Raritan a 90 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To find the exact meaning of the alert read the information shown in the State or Status column For below lower critical The numeric sensor s reading drops below the lower critical threshold below lower warning The numeric sensor s reading drops below the lower warning threshold above upper critical The numeric sensor s reading reaches or exceeds the upper critical threshold above upper warning The numeric sensor s reading reaches or exceeds the upper warning threshold alarmed The discrete sensor is NOT in the normal state Open The circuit breaker has tripped information on the thresholds see Setting Power Thresholds on page 173 Changing the View of a List Some dialogs and data pages contain a list or table such as the Manage Users dialog shown below You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data Note the column or sorting changes are not saved when quitting the dialog or data page Next time when the dialog or page re opens the list returns to the default view amp Manage Users x Active User Name Full Name Roles s Johnny Johnny TS Operator s admin Administrator Admin
335. isted in the Authentication Settings dialog 20 To add additional LDAP LDAPS servers repeat Steps 3 to 19 21 Click OK to save the changes The LDAP authentication is now in place Note If the PX clock and the LDAP server clock are out of sync the certificates are considered expired and users are unable to authenticate using LDAP To ensure proper synchronization administrators should configure the PX and the LDAP server to use the same NTP server More Information about AD Configuration For more information about the LDAP configuration using Microsoft Active Directory see LDAP Configuration Illustration on page 470 zie Raritan n 152 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Adding the RADIUS Server Settings To activate and use external RADIUS server authentication enable RADIUS authentication and enter the information you have gathered for any RADIUS server gt 1 To set up RADIUS authentication Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the Radius radio button to enable remote RADIUS authentication Click New to add a RADIUS server for authentication The Create new RADIUS Server Configuration dialog appears Type the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server in the IP Address Hostname field Select an authentication protocol in the Type of Radius Auth field Your choices include PAP Password Authentication Protocol CH
336. isted or wrapped around a location where water may drip such as a ceiling tile water pipe or the floor Depending on the type of the cable water sensor you purchased the cable shaped detector is either 3 5 or 7 meters long so its water detection area is longer than the floor mounted water sensor Number Item o Cable shaped water detector eo Wires to connect to Raritan s contact closure sensor You need a minimum of 30 cm wires to prevent the contact closure sensor from being damaged by floor water if any Below are the wire length limitations e Minimum 30 cm e Maximum 150 cm 45 46 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Differential Air Pressure Sensors You can have a Raritan differential air pressure sensor connected to the PX device if the differential air pressure data is desired With this sensor the temperature around the sensor can be also detected through a temperature sensor implemented inside it Multiple differential air pressure sensors can be cascaded gt To connect differential air pressure sensors 1 Plug one end of a Raritan provided phone cable to the SENSOR port of the PX device 2 Plug the other end of this phone cable to the IN port of the differential air pressure sensor 3 Toconnect additional Raritan differential air pressure sensors do the following a Plug one end of a Raritan provided phone cable to the OUT port of the previous differential air pressure sensor b
337. istrator Privileges you can change other users passwords as well See Modifying a User Profile on page 123 gt To change your password 1 Choose User Management gt Change Password The Change User Password dialog appears j Change User admin Password x ours Password Enter new password Confirm Password Repeat new password OK Cancel Type the current password in the Old Password field Type your new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields The password can be 4 to 32 characters long It is case sensitive 4 Click OK to save the changes Tip If you have the Administrator Privileges you can change other users passwords See Modifying a User Profile on page 123 After finishing your tasks with the PX you should log out to prevent others from accessing the web interface gt To log out of the web interface 1 Do one of these Click logout on the top right corner of the web interface G logout Close the web browser by clicking the Close button xh on the top right corner of the browser S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Close the web browser by choosing File gt Close or File gt Exit The command varies according to the version of the browser you use Choose the Refresh command or click the Refresh button on the web browser 2 Either the login page opens or the browser is closed depending on yo
338. it breaker may use a button or handle reset mechanism Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker Your button type circuit breakers may look slightly different from the images shown in this section but the reset procedure remains the same gt To reset the button type breakers 1 Locate the breaker whose ON button is up indicating the breaker has tripped S N a 2 Examine your PX device and the connected equipment to remove or resolve the cause that results in the overload or short circuit This step is required or you cannot proceed with the next step 3 Press the ON button until it is completely down 2 7 71 72 Chapter 5 Using the PDU Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker Your handle type circuit breakers may look slightly different from the images shown in this section but the reset procedure remains the same gt 1 2 To reset the handle type breakers Lift the hinged cover over the breaker Check if the colorful rectangle or triangle below the operating handle is GREEN indicating the breaker has tripped E Examine your PX device and the connected equipment to remove or resolve the cause that results in the overload or short circuit This step is required or you cannot proceed with the next step Pull up the operating handle until the colorful rectangle or triangle turns RED ay eO aw Nt Y S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU Fuse Some PX devices ar
339. ition changed on composite asset strip STRIPID STRIPNAME RF Code tag has been connected LHX has been connected to PORTTYPE port PORTID LHX connected to PORTTYPE port PORTID has been switched on Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID unavailable Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID asserted above upper critical Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID asserted above upper warning Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID asserted below lower warning Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID asserted below lower critical Emergency cooling on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was activated Blade extension overflow cleared for strip STRIPID STRIPNAME RF Code tag has been disconnected LHX has been disconnected from PORTTYPE port PORTID LHX connected to PORTTYPE port PORTID has been switched off Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID available Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID deasserted above upper critical Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID deasserted above upper warning Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID deasserted below lower warning Sensor LHXSENSORID on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID deasserted below lowe
340. k Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion 7 Click OK to save the changes Setting Up an SSL Certificate Having an X 509 digital certificate ensures that both parties in an SSL connection are who they say they are To obtain a certificate for the PX create a Certificate Signing Request CSR and submit it to a certificate authority CA After the CA processes the information in the CSR it provides you with an SSL certificate which you must install on the PX device Note If you are using a SSL certificate that is part of a chain of certificates each part of the chain is signed during the validation process Note See Forcing HTTPS Encryption on page 128 for instructions on forcing users to employ SSL when connecting to the PX A CSR is not required in either of the following scenarios e You decide to generate and use a self signed certificate on the PX device e Appropriate valid certificate and key files are already available ES SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Certificate Signing Request When appropriate certificate and key files for the PX are NOT available one of the alternatives is to create a CSR and private key on the PX device and send the CSR to a CA for signing the certificate Creating a Certificate Signing Request Follow this procedure to create the CSR for your PX device gt To create a CSR 1 Choose Device
341. k PDU from the Power Strip Name drop down list 483 484 Appendix E Integration 2 For that rack PDU select the appropriate outlet from the Outlet Name drop down list From the Outlet Name drop down list select None Click OK That rack PDU outlet association is removed anda confirmation message is displayed gt To remove a rack PDU association if the rack PDU has been removed from the target 1 Click Device Settings gt Port Configuration and then click on the active target 2 Associate the active target to the disconnected power port This will break the disconnected target s power association Finally associate the active target to the correct power port Dominion KSX Il or SX Configuration The PX2 series PDU supports the integration with Raritan s Dominion KSX II or SX serial access products as of release 2 4 Different cables are needed when connecting to different Raritan access products e Use a Category 5 cable to connect from the PDU power control port of the Dominion KSX II to the FEATURE port of the PX e Use aCSCSPCS cable to connect from the PDU port of the Dominion SX to the FEATURE port of the PX Note To only access the CLI of the PX via the SX you can treat the PX as a serial device by connecting to the PDU s serial port instead of the FEATURE port For more information on either Raritan serial access product see either of the following e Dominion KSX Il or SX User Guide Avail
342. k ipv6 overrideDNS option where option is enable or disable See the table below for the IPv6 commands for manually specifying DNS servers For the static IPv6 configuration you should configure the following parameters Note that the IP address must follow the IPv6 format To set Use this command Static IPv6 network ipv6 ipAddress ip address address where ip address is the IP address you want to assign Gateway network ipv6 gateway ip address where ip address is the IP address of the gateway Primary DNS network ipv6 primaryDNSServer server lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the primary DNS server Secondary network ipv6 DNS server secondaryDNSServer lt ip optional address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the secondary DNS server To quit the configuration mode with or without saving the changes type either command and press Enter 27 28 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Command Description apply Save all configuration changes and quit the configuration mode cancel Abort all configuration changes and quit the configuration mode The prompt appears indicating that you have quit the configuration mode 10 To verify whether all settings are correct type the following commands one by one Current network settings are displayed Command Description show network Show network parameters show network ip all S
343. l on page 33 Log in to the PX web interface The PX should have detected the connected sensors and display them in the web interface Identify each sensor through the sensor s serial number See Identifying Environmental Sensors on page 222 The PX should automatically manage the detected sensors Verify whether detected sensors are managed If not have them managed See Managing Environmental Sensors on page 223 221 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 222 5 Configure the sensors See Configuring Environmental Sensors on page 224 The steps include a Name the sensor b If the connected sensor is a Raritan contact closure sensor specify an appropriate sensor type c Mark the sensor s physical location on the rack or in the room For anumeric sensor configure the sensor s threshold hysteresis and assertion timeout settings e Foranumeric sensor configure the sensor s threshold hysteresis and assertion timeout settings Note Numeric sensors use numeric values to indicate the environmental or internal conditions while discrete on off sensors use alphabetical characters only to indicate the state changes Only numeric sensors have the threshold settings Identifying Environmental Sensors An environmental sensor includes a serial number tag on the sensor cable The serial number for each sensor appears listed in the web interface after each sensor is detected by the PX gt To identif
344. le Option Description enable Enables the HTTPS access to the web interface disable Disables the HTTPS access to the web interface Example The following command disables the HTTPS access feature config security enforceHttpsForWebAccess disable Login Limitation The login limitation feature controls login related limitations such as password aging simultaneous logins using the same user name and the idle time permitted before being forced to log out A login limitation command begins with security loginLimits You can combine multiple commands to modify the login limitation parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 a SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Single Login Limitation This command syntax enables or disables the single login feature which controls whether multiple logins using the same login name simultaneously is permitted config security loginLimits singleLogin lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the single login feature disable Disables the single login feature Example The following command disables the single login feature so that more than one user can log in using the same user name at the same time config security loginLimits singleLogin disable Password Aging This command syntax enables or disables the password aging feature which cont
345. le The following command determines that a password must comprise at least one numeric character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneNumericCharacter enable Special Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a special character M sis Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneSpecialCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one special character is required disable No special character is required Example The following command determines that a password must comprise at least one special character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneSpecialCharacter enable Maximum Password History This command syntax determines the number of previous passwords that CANNOT be repeated when changing the password config security strongPasswords passwordHistoryDepth lt value gt Variables e value is an integer between 1 and 12 Example The following command determines that the previous 7 passwords CANNOT be re used when changing the password config f security strongPasswords passwordHistoryDepth 7 zie Raritan a Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Role Based Access Control In addition to firewall access control based on IP addresses you can configure other a
346. le cord 4 NN OA Important Complete and the most updated instructions on installing a flexible cord on Raritan PDUs are included in the Raritan PX Power Cord Installation Guide which is available on the Raritan website at this URL http www raritan com support dominion px2 other support files power c ord installation guide Flexible Cord Selection e The preferred flexible cable is type SOOW 600V 90 C or 105 C Consult Raritan before using a different flexible cable type e The rated ampacity of the flexible cord must be greater than or equal to the Raritan product s rated ampacity marked on its nameplate In the United States relevant ampacity ratings for flexible cords can be found in NEC 2011 section 400 5 e The number of wires in the flexible cord must match the number of terminals including the ground terminal inside the Raritan product See Wiring of 3 Phase In Line Monitors on page 451 for exceptions e fa plug is to be attached to the flexible cord the length of the flexible cord must not exceed 4 5 meters as specified in UL 60950 1 2007 and NEC 645 5 2011 e The flexible cord may be permanently connected to power subject to local regulatory agency approval In the United States relevant electrical regulations can be found in NEC 2011 sections 400 7 A 8 400 7 B 368 56 and table 400 4 449 450 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors Plug Selection If a plug is to be attached t
347. least a role to determine the user s permissions See Setting Up Roles on page 125 Tip By default multiple users can log in simultaneously using the same login name 119 120 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Creating a User Profile Creating new users adds a new login to the PX gt To create a user profile 1 Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears Click New The Create New User dialog appears Type the information about the user in the corresponding fields Note that User Name Password and Confirm Password fields are required Field Type this User Name The name the user enters to log in to the PX The name can be 4 to 32 characters long tis case sensitive Spaces are NOT permitted Full Name The user s first and last names Password The password the user enters to log in Type it first in the Password field and then again in the Confirm Confirm Password Password field The password can be 4 to 32 characters long tis case sensitive Spaces are permitted Telephone Number A phone number where the user can be reached eMail Address An email address where the user can be reached The email can be up to 32 characters long tis case sensitive Select the Enabled checkbox This is required so the user can log in to the PX device Select the Force password change on next login checkbox if you prefer a password change by the user when the user lo
348. lected Action included Device gt Any sub event Send SMTP message Example 3 This example illustrates a situation where two event rules combined regarding the outlet state changes causes the PDU to continuously power cycle outlets 1 and 2 Event selected Action included Outlet gt Outlet 1 gt Sensor gt State gt Cycle Outlet 2 On Off Switch Outlets gt Cycle Outlet gt Outlet 2 Outlet gt Outlet 2 gt Sensor gt State gt Cycle Outlet 1 On Off Switch Outlets gt Cycle Outlet gt Outlet 1 T sis Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Modifying an Event Rule You can change an event rule s event action trigger condition and other settings if any Exception Events and actions selected in the built in event rules are not changeable including System Event Log Rule and System SNMP Notification Rule gt To modify an event rule 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears 2 Onthe Rules tab select the event rule that you want to modify in the left pane To disable the event rule deselect the Enabled checkbox To change the event click the desired tab in the Event field and select a different item from the pull down menu or submenu For example in a user activity event rule for the admin user you can click the admin tab to display a pull down submenu showing all user names and then select a different user name or all u
349. les except they are applied to members sharing a specific role This enables you to grant System permissions to a specific role based on their IP addresses gt To set up role based access control rules 1 Enable the feature See Enabling the Feature on page 138 2 Set the default policy See Changing the Default Policy on page 139 3 Create rules specifying which addresses to accept and which ones to discard when the addresses are associated with a specific role See Creating Role Based Access Control Rules on page 139 Changes made do not affect users currently logged in until the next login Enabling the Feature You must enable this access control feature before any relevant rule can take effect gt To enable role based access control rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 To enable the IPv4 firewall click the IPv4 tab and select the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox 3 Toenable the IPv6 firewall click the IPv6 tab and select the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox 4 Click OK to save the changes i Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Changing the Default Policy The default policy is to accept all traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the role applied to the user gt 1 4 To change the default policy Choose Devi
350. let temperature threshold on LHX at PORTTYPE port TPORTID was crossed The water outlet temperature threshold on LHX at PORTTYPE port TPORTID was crossed The humidity threshold on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was crossed An external water cooling failure occurred on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTIDJ Maximum cooling is not any more requested for LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTIDJ The door of LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was closed The air inlet temperature on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID is within thresholds The air outlet temperature on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID is within thresholds The water inlet temperature on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTIDJ is within thresholds The water outlet temperature on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID is within thresholds The humidity on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID is within thresholds 205 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface LHX gt Water Leak Placeholder ACTIVEINLET Water leakage was detected on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID Note Not set for trigger events Email and SMS Message Placeholders Following are placeholders that can be used in custom event email messages Note Click the Information icon e to open the Event Context Information dialog which contains a list of placeholders and their definitions Then select the desired placeholder and either double click it or click the Paste into messa
351. let to a value other than PDU defined overrides the PDU defined setting on that outlet gt To set the default power state for a specific outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 4 Inthe State on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list on Turns on this outlet when the PX device powers up Off Turns off this outlet when the PX device powers up last known Restores this outlet to the previous power state before the PX device was powered off PDU defined The outlet s default power state is determined by the PDU defined state See Setting the PDU Defined Default State on page 160 Tip The information in parentheses following the option PDU defined indicates the current PDU defined selection 5 Click OK to save the changes Changing the Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on You can adjust the length of the time it
352. lign the baseplates on the rear of the PX device Leave at least 24 inches between the baseplates for stability Raritan 7 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 2 Make the baseplates grasp the PX device lightly Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex socket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened 3 Screw each mounting button in the center of each baseplate The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm A 4 Align the large mounting buttons with the mounting holes in the cabinet fixing one in place and adjusting the other 5 Loosen the hex socket screws until the mounting buttons are secured in their position 6 Ensure that both buttons can engage their mounting holes simultaneously 7 Press the PX device forward pushing the mounting buttons through the mounting holes then letting the device drop about 5 8 This secures the PX device in place and completes the installation S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using claw foot brackets 1 Align the baseplates on the rear of the PX device 2 Secure the baseplates in place Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex socket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened 3 Align the claw foot brackets
353. like regular PX models the in line monitor s LED display only cycles through the current readings of each outlet in the Automatic Mode SE Raritan Chapter 9 In Line Monitors Manual Mode You can switch between voltage active power and current readings of the selected outlet in the Manual Mode on an in line monitor To enter the Manual Mode press the Up or Down button gt 1 To operate the LED display of an inline monitor Press the Up or Down button until the desired outlet number is selected in the two digit row Pressing the Up button moves up one selection Pressing the Down button moves down one selection If your inline monitor has only one outlet go to Step 2 Current of the selected outlet is shown in the three digit row Simultaneously the CURRENT A LED is lit See LEDs for Measurement Units on page 67 If desired you can press the Up and Down buttons simultaneously to switch between voltage active power and current readings The voltage appears in this format XXX V It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the voltage is displayed the VOLTAGE V LED is lit The active power appears in one of the formats X XX XX X and XXX kW It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is lit While the final outlet s active power is being displayed you can
354. ling Telnet This command syntax enables or disables the Telnet service config network services telnet enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The Telnet service is enabled false The Telnet service is disabled Example The following command enables the Telnet service config network services telnet enabled tru Changing the Telnet Port This command syntax changes the Telnet port config network services telnet port lt n gt Variables e n isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default Telnet port is 23 Example The following command syntax sets the TCP port for Telnet to 44 config f network services telnet port 44 Changing the SSH Configuration You can enable or disable the SSH service or change its TCP port using the CLI commands An SSH command begins with network services ssh 333 334 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling SSH This command syntax enables or disables the SSH service config network services ssh enabled option Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The SSH service is enabled false The SSH service is disabled Example The following command enables the SSH service config network services ssh enabled true Changing the SSH Port This command syntax changes the SSH port config
355. ll rules determine whether to accept or discard traffic intended for the PX based on the IP address of the host sending the traffic When creating firewall rules keep these principles in mind Rule order is important When traffic reaches the PX device the rules are executed in numerical order Only the first rule that matches the IP address determines whether the traffic is accepted or discarded Any subsequent rules matching the IP address are ignored by the PX Subnet mask may be required When typing the IP address you may or may not need to specify BOTH the address and a subnet mask The default subnet mask is 32 that is 255 255 255 255 You must specify a subnet mask only when itis not the same as the default For example to specify a single address in a Class C network use this format X X X X 24 where 24 a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 To specify an entire subnet or range of addresses change the subnet mask accordingly Note Valid IP addresses range from 0 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 Make sure the IP addresses entered are within the scope S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface gt To create firewall rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Click the IPv4 tab for creating firewall rules or click the IPv6 tab for creating IPv6 firewall rules 3 Ensure the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox is sel
356. llenge Confirm Challenge Do this Type a password The password is used to protect the certificate or CSR This information is optional and the value should be 4 to 64 characters long The password is case sensitive so ensure you capitalize the letters correctly Type the same password again for confirmation 4 Click Create New SSL Key to create both the CSR and private key This may take several minutes to complete To download the newly created CSR to your computer click Download Certificate Signing Request a You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer b After the file is stored on your computer submit it to a CA to obtain the digital certificate c If desired click Delete Certificate Signing Request to remove the CSR file permanently from the PX device To store the newly created private key on your computer click Download Key You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer Click Close to quit the dialog Installing a CA Signed Certificate After the CA provides a signed certificate according to the CSR you submitted you must install it on the PX device gt 1 To install the certificate Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab In the Certificate File field click Browse to select the certificate file provided by the C
357. lor is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The lt color gt variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF Example The following command sets the LED color for all rack units on the asset sensor 1 to RED that is FF0000 to indicate the presence of a connected asset tag config assetStrip 1 LEDColorForConnectedTags FF0000 Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units on the connected asset sensor s to indicate the absence of a connected asset tag config assetStrip lt n gt LEDColorForDisconnectedTags lt color gt Variables e color is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The lt color gt variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF zie Raritan d Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units on the asset sensor 1 to BLACK that is 000000 to indicate the absence of a connected asset tag config f assetStrip 1 LEDColorForDisconnectedTags 000000 Note Black color causes the LEDs to stay off Rack Unit Configuration For the Raritan asset sensor a rack unit refers to a tag port A rack unit configuration command begins with rackUnit Naming a Rack Unit This command syntax assigns or changes the name of the specified rack unit on the specified asset sensor config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt name lt name gt Var
358. low the instructions below or those described in the section Setting an Outlet s Thresholds on page 173 2 To configure thresholds deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout for multiple outlets If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click the Outlets folder The Outlets page opens S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click Bulk Setup The Outlet Threshold Bulk Setup dialog appears with a list of all outlets In the Show Outlet Sensors of Type field select the type of power thresholds you want to configure Select desired outlets by having their corresponding checkboxes selected To select all outlets select the checkbox labeled Sensor in the header row and all checkboxes are selected To select partial outlets select the corresponding checkboxes of those outlets by clicking on their checkboxes To deselect any outlet just click on the checkbox once again Click Edit Thresholds The threshold bulk setup dialog appears Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshol
359. m lockup eliminate the need to perform manual intervention or dispatch field personnel reduce downtime and mean time to repair and increase productivity In This Chapter Product Model S oct dicen cnise a C EN ILS cate E ia D DLE 1 Producbbeadl f8s o oeste essem de denen tact metab eton se eemeteeiebanaaee e 1 Package CONICS incase stivesncvinssertaie code eed edn acid e Rod adn RR Ted rA a RM dc as 4 The PX comes in several models that are built to stock and can be obtained almost immediately Raritan also offers custom models that are built to order and can only be obtained on request Visit the Product Selector page httpz www raritan com resources px product selector on the Raritan website or contact your local reseller for a list of available models The PX models vary in sizes and features In general the PX features include e The ability to power on power off and reboot the devices connected to each outlet outlet switching capable models only e The ability to monitor the following at the outlet level Status on off RMS current A RMS voltage V Active power W ON AA Chapter 1 Introduction Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh e The ability to monitor the following at the inlet level RMS current per line A RMS voltage per line pair V Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh Unbalanced load percentage e The ability to
360. mand Example 1 Basic Security Information The diagram shows the output of the show security command show security IP access control Disabled Role based access control Disabled Password aging Enabled Prevent concurrent user login No Strong passwords Disabled Enforce HTTPS for web access Yes n SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example 2 In Depth Security Information More information is displayed when typing the show security details command show security details IP access control Disabled Role based access control Disabled Password aging Enabled Aging interval 68 days Prevent concurrent user login No Maximum number of failed logins 3 User block time 18 minutes User idle timeout 18 minutes Strong passwords Disabled Enforce HTTPS for web access Yes Example 3 Basic PDU Information The diagram shows the output of the show pdu command show pdu PDU my PK Model PK2 5266R Firmware version 2 2 0 1 26020 H 303 304 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example 4 In Depth PDU Information More information is displayed when typing the show pdu details command show pdu details PDU my PK Model PH2 5260R Firmware version 2 2 0 1 26020 Serial number PE61234567 Default outlet state on startup Last known state Power cycle delay 18 seconds utlet power sequence default utlet sequence delay
361. mber is the number of the existing rule which you want to insert the new rule above or below Example The following command creates a newIPv4 role based access control rule and specifies its location in the list config f security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule add 192 168 78 50 192 168 90 100 admin deny insertAbove 3 Results e Anew IPv4 role based access control rule is added dropping all packets from any IPv4 address between 192 168 78 50 and 192 168 90 100 when the user is a member of the role admin e The newly added IPv4 rule is inserted above the 3rd rule That is the new rule becomes the 3rd rule and the original 3rd rule becomes the 4th rule Modifying a Role Based Access Control Rule Depending on what to modify in an existing rule the command syntax varies e Pv4 commands gt To modify a rule s IPv4 address range use this command syntax zie Raritan xi Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config config config config config config 364 security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip gt To modify an IPv4 rule s role use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt role lt role gt gt To modify an IPv4 rule s policy use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule modify lt rule_number gt policy lt policy gt
362. me IP address is performed gt To sort role based access control rules 1 Choose Device Settings Security Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 To sort the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To sort the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab 4 Select a specific rule by clicking it 5 Click or to move the selected rule up or down until it reaches the desired location 6 Click OK to save the changes 141 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Deleting Role Based Access Control Rules When any access control rule becomes unnecessary or obsolete remove it gt To delete a role based access control rule 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Todelete the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To delete the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv4 checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable Role Based Access Control for IPv6 checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab 4 Select the rule to be deleted in the rules list To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Clic
363. me of the user whose settings you want to change e option3 is one of the options true or false al true Authentication passphrase is identical to the password false Authentication passphrase is different from the password gt To determine the authentication passphrase config user modify lt name gt authenticationPassPhrase lt authentication_passphrase gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt authentication_passphrase gt is a string used as an authentication passphrase comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters gt To determine whether the privacy passphrase is identical to the authentication passphrase config user modify lt name gt useAuthenticationPassPhraseAsPrivacyPassPhrase lt option4 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option4 gt is one of the options true or false true Privacy passphrase is identical to the authentication passphrase t Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface false Privacy passphrase is different from the authentication passphrase gt To determine the privacy passphrase config user modify lt name gt privacyPassPhrase lt privacy_passphrase gt zie Raritan Variables name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change privacy passphrase is a string used as a privacy passphrase comprising up t
364. me to unblock prompt appears type the login name of the user to be unblocked and press Enter Username to unblock 4 Amessage appears indicating that the specified user was unblocked successfully 441 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Resetting the PX You can reset the PX device to factory defaults or simply restart it using the CLI commands Restarting the PDU This command restarts the PX device It is not a factory default reset gt To restart the PX device 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type either of the following commands to restart the PX device reset unit OR reset unit y 3 If you entered the command without y in Step 2 a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Type y to confirm the reset 4 Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete Resetting to Factory Defaults This command restores all settings of the PX device to factory defaults gt To reset PX settings use either command T reset factorydefaults SOR reset factorydefaults y See Using the CLI Command on page 468 for more information Network Troubleshooting The PX provides 4 diagnostic commands for troubleshooting network problems ns ookup netstat ping and traceroute The diagnostic commands function as corresponding Linux commands and can get corresponding Linux outputs e
365. mission mode through auto negotiation half Half duplex Data is transmitted in one direction to or from the PX device at a time full Full duplex Data is transmitted in both directions simultaneously Example The following command lets the PX determine the optimal transmission mode through auto negotiation config f network interface LANInterfaceDuplexMode auto Setting the Network Service Parameters A network service command begins with network services zie Raritan ii Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the HTTP Port This command syntax changes the HTTP port config network services http port lt n gt Variables e lt n gt isaTCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default HTTP port is 80 Example The following command sets the HTTP port to 81 config ft network services http port 81 Changing the HTTPS Port This command syntax changes the HTTPS port config f network services https port lt n gt Variables e n isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default HTTPS port is 443 Example The following command sets the HTTPS port to 333 config network services https port 333 Changing the Telnet Configuration You can enable or disable the Telnet service or change its TCP port using the CLI commands A Telnet command begins with network services telnet a SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disab
366. n Execute an action group To mark an action as part of the action group select it from the Available Actions list box and click to move it to the Used Actions list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To move all actions to the Used Actions list box at a time click lel A maximum of 32 actions can be grouped To remove an action from the action group select it from the Used Actions list box and click to move it to the Available Actions list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To remove all actions at a time click Click Save to save the new action Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort or Cancel to return to the current settings page To create additional action groups repeat Steps 3 to 8 183 184 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Log an Event Message This option records the selected events in the internal log gt 1 To create a log event message Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop dow
367. n is involved change their behavior accordingly Exception The built in action System Event Log Action is not user configurable gt To modify an action Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Select the action that you want to modify from the left list Make necessary changes to the information shown c m c qe Click Save to save the changes Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort or Cancel to return to the current settings page 6 Click Close to quit the dialog Deleting an Event Rule or Action If any event rule or action is obsolete simply remove it Note You cannot delete the built in event rules and actions gt To delete an event rule or action 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears 2 Todelete an event rule a Ensure the Rules tab is selected If not click the Rules tab b Select the desired rule from the left list and click Delete Rule c Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion 3 To delete an action a Click the Actions tab b Select the desired action from the left list and click Delete Action c Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion i Raritan Chapte
368. n minute s h hour s Click OK to save the changes Tip When there are a large number of outlets set the value to a lower number so that you can avoid a long wait before all the outlets are available again SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting the Inrush Guard Delay This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs When electrical devices are turned on they can initially draw a very large current known as inrush current Inrush current typically lasts for 20 40 milliseconds The inrush guard delay feature prevents a circuit breaker trip due to the combined inrush current of many devices turned on at the same time For example if the inrush guard delay is set to 100 milliseconds and two or more outlets are turned on at the same time the PDU will sequentially turn the outlets on with a 100 millisecond delay occurring between each one gt To set the inrush guard delay time 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Inrush Guard Delay field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is from 100 milliseconds to 100 seconds Time units in the list are explained below ms millisecond s S second s 4 Click OK to save the changes Setting the Outle
369. n Description enable This option overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the primary secondary DNS server you assign disable This option resumes using the DHCP assigned DNSG server Example The following command overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config f network ipv6 overrideDNS enabl Setting the LAN Interface Parameters A LAN interface configuration command begins with network interface The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Changing the LAN Interface Speed This command syntax determines the LAN interface speed config network interface LANInterfaceSpeed lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options auto 10Mbps and 100Mbps Option Description auto System determines the optimum LAN speed through auto negotiation ex Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description 10Mbps The LAN speed is always 10 Mbps 100Mbps The LAN speed is always 100 Mbps Example The following command lets the PX determine the optimal LAN interface speed through auto negotiation config network interface LANInterfaceSpeed auto Changing the LAN Duplex Mode This command syntax determines the LAN interface duplex mode config network interface LANInterfaceDuplexMode lt mode gt Variables e mode is one of the modes auto half or full Option Description auto The PX selects the optimum trans
370. n PX2 device for asset sensor management purposes see Adding a PX2 to Raritan PX for information on adding this item as a rack PDU 10 Create ports as needed See Creating Ports 11 Complete all relevant Detail 2 information if needed a Enter notes if applicable b Enter maintenance and support information if applicable c Complete custom user fields if applicable 12 Click Save The saved item is given a status of Planned Since the item has a status of new it appears in red on the cabinet elevation 13 To submit a request for approval select Install Item Request from the Actions drop down After the Gatekeeper has reviewed and approved the request a work order to physically add the item in the data center is generated by the Gatekeeper i Raritan Appendix E Integration RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution Raritan With the RF Code active RFID hardware and management software and Raritan s PX combined a wire free energy monitoring solution that provides a picture of power utilization is offered This combined solution does not require any additional IP address configuration or association All you need to do is plug an RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag into the SENSOR port of the PX device The RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag collects the power data generated by Raritan PX and sends the data to the RF Code Sensor Manager software which not only manages the power data but also make computations about the power u
371. n and privileges Load Shedding Settings This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command shows the load shedding settings show loadshedding Displayed information e The load shedding state is displayed along with non critical outlets Note The load shedding mode is associated with critical and non critical outlets To specify critical and non critical outlets through CLI see Specifying Non Critical Outlets on page 310 xdi SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Serial Port Settings This command shows the baud rate setting of the serial port labeled CONSOLE MODEM on the PX device show serial EnergyWise Settings This command shows the PX s current configuration for Cisco EnergyWise show energywise Asset Sensor Settings This command shows the asset sensor settings such as the total number of rack units tag ports asset sensor state numbering mode orientation available tags and LED color settings show assetStrip lt n gt Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays all asset sensor information Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific asset Displays the settings of the asset sensor connected sensor number to the specified FEATURE port number For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the valid num
372. n arrow and select the desired action Log event message Click OK to save the new action Click Close to quit the dialog Request LHX Maximum Cooling If Schroff LHX Support is enabled the LHX related actions will be available See Enabling and Disabling Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Support on page 252 The Request LHX Maximum Cooling action applies the maximum cooling to the LHX device gt 1 To request maximum cooling for LHX Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Request LHX Maximum Cooling Send a Snapshot via Email This option notifies one or multiple persons of the selected events by emailing snapshots or videos captured by a connected Logitech webcam S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface gt To create a send snapshot via email action 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 5 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow an
373. n for the minimum voltage is 380 sqrt 3 219 39 the web interface displays 219 V 3 Enlarge the dialog if necessary 4 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Tip The firmware version is also available by clicking the PDU folder in the Dominion PX Explorer pane Identifying the Cascaded Devices This section explains how to identify a cascaded PX in the Device Information dialog For information on how to cascade devices using USB cables see Cascading the PX via USB on page 29 Note For more information on the USB cascading configuration see the USB Cascading Solution User Guide which is available on the PX2 web page hitp www raritan com support dominion px2 of the Raritan website gt To identify the USB cascading status of a PX device 1 Choose Maintenance Device Information The Device Information dialog appears 95 96 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Select the Network tab and locate the Interface section The Interface section contains two read only fields Networking Mode and Cascaded Device Connected Field Description Networking Mode This field indicates how the PX is connected to the LAN Wired The device is connected to the LAN through a Category 5e 6 network cable Wired USB The device is connected to the LAN through a USB cascaded configuration In other words it is a slave device Cascaded Device
374. n the Cisco EnergyWise domain config energywise port lt port gt Variables e port is the UDP port number ranging between 1 and 65535 Example The following command specifies 10288 as the UDP port for Cisco EnergyWise config energywise port 10288 Setting the Polling Interval This command syntax determines the polling interval at which the Cisco EnergyWise domain queries the PX device config energywise polling lt timing gt Variables e timing is an integer number in seconds It ranges between 30 and 600 seconds Example The following command determines the polling interval to query the PX device is 300 seconds config energywise polling 300 Asset Management Commands You can use the CLI commands to change the settings of the connected asset sensor if any or the settings of LEDs on the asset sensor 425 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 426 Asset Sensor Management An asset sensor management configuration command begins with assetStrip Naming an Asset Sensor This command syntax names or changes the name of an asset sensor connected to the PX device config assetStrip lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characte
375. n the previous step a dialog appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to turn it off or No to abort the operation The heat exchanger s icon shown in the web interface changes after being turned on or off See Device States and Icon Variations on page 255 Requesting Maximum Cooling for an LHX When you click Request Maximum Cooling the LHX enters into emergency cooling mode and runs at its maximum cooling level of 10096 in order to cool the device When maximum cooling is requested for an LHX the message Maximum cooling requested is displayed in the Alerts section of the LHX page When you click the Acknowledge Alert Status button the alert message disappears even if the actual cooling action on the device is still underway For additional information on the maximum cooling function see the LHX documentation gt To request maximum cooling for an LHX 1 If the Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder 2 Click the LHX heat exchanger in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that device opens in the right pane 3 Click the desired heat exchanger under the Auxiliary folder The page specific to that heat exchanger opens in the right pane 257 258 Firmware Upgrade Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 4 Inthe Information section of the page click Request Maximum Cooling to cool the device You may upgrade your PX device to be
376. nal Equipment b Plug the tag connector of the asset tag into the tag port on the blade extension strip 4 Repeat the above step until all blade servers in the chassis are connected to the blade extension strip via asset tags 5 Plug the tag connector of the blade extension strip into the closest tag port of the asset sensor assembly or the AMS M2 Z asset sensor on the rack j t DA Pe c Ae Note If you need to temporarily disconnect the tag connector of the blade extension strip wait at least 1 second before connecting it back or the PX may not detect it Raritan P 54 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting AMS M2 Z Asset Sensors Optional The AMS M2 Z is a special type of asset sensor that functions the same as regular MASTER asset sensors with the following differences e t provides two RJ 45 connectors e Multiple AMS M2 Z asset sensors can be daisy chained e Only two tag ports are available on each AMS M2 Z so only two asset tags can be connected This product is especially useful for tracking large devices such as SAN boxes in the cabinet Item Description A RJ 45 connectors B Tag ports gt To connect the AMS M2 Z asset sensors to the PX 1 Connect the AMS M2 Z to the PX via a Category 5e 6 cable a Connect one end of the cable to the RJ 45 port labeled Input on the AMS M2 Z b Connect the other end of the cable to the FEATURE port on the PX 2 Affix an asse
377. nd meet ITIL framework guidelines Adding the Raritan PX to dcTrack Management The Raritan PX is categorized as a rack PDU in dcTrack This section describes the procedure to add the Raritan PX to dcTrack for management For more information see the dcTrack User Guide that accompanies the dcTrack gt To add a rack PDU 1 From the Explorer Menu select Power Items gt Rack PDU 2 Select Add from the Page Mode drop down in the toolbar _ Aa n View Add Edit 3 Select Add a New Item from the Actions drop down in the toolbar Submit New Item Request Resubmit New Item Request Add New Manufacturer Model Add New Application Name 493 Appendix E Integration At a minimum complete all of the required fields on the Detail 1 page Complete additional fields as needed Enter the rack PDU ID Select the make and model Assign the rack PDU to cabinet and rail position Note Once a status of Installed is applied to a item placement fields cannot be edited in Edit mode This means that rail positions cannot be changed once the item is installed As a workaround administrators can edit items from the Items amp Ports page in Classic View 8 Select the cabinet side if the rack PDU is vertically mounted Note Twelve vertically mounted rack PDUs are supported per cabinet Horizontally mounted rack mounted rack PDUs do not apply to this step since there is no side to select 9 If you are adding a Rarita
378. ndicates the selected circuit breaker where x is the circuit breaker number For example C1 represents Circuit Breaker 1 e Lx This indicates the selected line where x is the line number For example L2 represents Line 2 Note For a single phase model L1 current represents the Unit Current 67 Chapter 5 Using the PDU e AP This indicates the selected inlet s active power e UL This represents the selected inlet or outlet s Unbalanced Load which is only available for a three phase PDU e ix This refers to the selected inlet on a multi inlet PDU where x is the inlet number For example i1 refers to Inlet 1 and i2 refers to Inlet 2 The two digit row shows the inlet number while displaying an inlet s line or active power on a multi inlet PDU It will cycle through the selected inlet number and that inlet s line or active power AP For example when cycling through i1 and L1 the value displayed in the three digit row belongs to Inlet 1 s L1 and when cycling through i2 and L1 the displayed value belongs to Inlet 2 s L1 Note The point of the alphabet i cannot be displayed on the LED display so i1 looks like 1 and i2 looks like 2 During the firmware upgrade some PX models may show bx in the two digit row to indicate the relay or meter board numbered x is being updated Automatic Mode When left alone the LED display cycles through the line readings and circuit breaker readings at intervals of 10 seconds
379. nefit from the latest enhancements improvements and features The PX firmware files are available on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section http www raritan com support firmware and documentation Updating the PX Firmware When performing the firmware upgrade the PX keeps each outlet s power status unchanged so no server operation is interrupted Outlets that have been powered on prior to the firmware upgrade remain powered on and outlets that have been powered off prior to the firmware upgrade remain powered off during and after the firmware upgrade You must be the system administrator or log in to the user profile with the Firmware Update permission to update the PX device s firmware If applicable to your model download the latest firmware file from the Raritan website read the release notes then start the upgrade If you have any questions or concerns about the upgrade contact Raritan Technical Support BEFORE upgrading Warning Do NOT perform the firmware upgrade over a wireless connection gt To update the firmware 1 Choose Maintenance gt Update Firmware The Firmware Update dialog appears 2 Inthe Firmware File field click Browse to select an appropriate firmware file Click Upload A progress bar appears to indicate the upload status When the upload is complete version information of both the existing firmware and uploaded firmware is shown providing you a last chance to termin
380. nfiguration command for inlets begins with sensor inlet m SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an inlet config f sensor inlet n sensor type upperCritical option Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Critical threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current config f sensor inlet 1 current upperCritical enable 381 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Inte
381. ng parameters These commands begin with security userBlocking gt To determine the maximum number of failed logins before blocking a user use this command syntax n Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config security userBlocking maximumNumberOfFailedLogins lt valuel gt gt To determine how long a user s login is blocked use this command syntax config security userBlocking blockTime lt value2 gt Variables e valuet is an integer between 3 and 10 or unlimited which sets no limit on the maximum number of failed logins and thus disables the user blocking function e value2 is a numeric value in minutes Tip You can combine multiple commands to modify the user blocking parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Example The following command sets up two user blocking parameters config f security userBlocking maximumNumberOfFailedLogins 5 blockTime 30 Results e The maximum number of failed logins is set to 5 e The user blocking time is set to 30 minutes Strong Passwords The strong password commands determine whether a strong password is required for login and what a strong password should contain at least A strong password command begins with security strongPasswords You can combine multiple strong password commands to modify different parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command
382. ng Actions on page 181 Setting Thresholds for Multiple Sensors on page 227 Sensor Measurement Accuracy on page 229 Backup and Restore of PX Device Settings on page 240 Snapshot Storage on page 245 Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger on page 251 Configuring NTP Server Settings on page 272 Using the Command Line Interface on page 273 Using the CLI Command on page 468 xvi zie Raritan What s New in the PX User Guide Dominion KSX Il or SX Configuration on page 484 dcTrack on page 492 Raritan Training Website on page 500 Reserving IP Addresses in Windows DHCP Servers on page 504 Please see the Release Notes for a more detailed explanation of the changes applied to this version of PX xvii Chapter 1 Product Models Product Features zie Raritan Introduction The Raritan PX is an intelligent power distribution unit PDU that allows you to reboot remote servers and other network devices and or to monitor power in the data center The intended use of the Raritan PX is distribution of power to information technology equipment such as computers and communication equipment where such equipment is typically mounted in an equipment rack located in an information technology equipment room Raritan offers different types of PDUs some are outlet switching capable and some are not With the outlet switching function you can recover systems remotely in the event of system failure and or syste
383. ng one of the following Click I4 or Dil to go to the first or final page Click 4 or P to go to the prior or next page Type a number in the Page text box and press Enter to go to a specific page Select a log entry from the list and click Show Details or simply double click the log entry to view detailed information Note Sometimes when the dialog is too narrow the icon takes the place of the Show Details button In that case click and select Show Details to view details Click to view the latest events To save the communication log on your computer click id To clear all records in the communication log click Clear Communication Log Click Yes on the confirmation message 249 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Downloading Diagnostic Information Important This function is for use by Raritan Field Engineers or when you are directed by Raritan Technical Support You can download the diagnostic file from the PX device to a client machine The file is compressed into a tgz file and should be sent to Raritan Technical Support for interpretation This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges gt To retrieve a diagnostic file 1 Choose Maintenance gt Download Diagnostic Information The File Download dialog appears File Download Do you want to open or save this file Mame diag data tgz Type WinRAR archive From 192 168 84 57 While files from the I
384. nges after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears Type a new name in the Device Name field Click OK to save the changes Modifying the Network Configuration The network settings you can change via the web interface include wired wireless IPv4 and or IPv6 settings S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Modifying the Network Interface Settings The PX supports two types of network interfaces wired and wireless You should configure the network interface settings according to the networking mode that applies See Connecting the PX to Your Network on page 20 Wired Network Settings The LAN interface speed and duplex mode were set during the installation and configuration process See Initial Network Configuration on page 22 By default the LAN speed and duplex mode are set to Auto automatic which works in nearly all scenarios You can change them if there are special local requirements gt To modify the network interface settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears 2 The Interface Settings tab should have been selected If not click the Interface Settings tab 3 Inthe Network Interface field click the drop down arrow and select Wired from the list 4 To change the LAN speed click the drop down arrow in the Speed field and select an opt
385. ngs of additional outlets 4 Click OK to save the changes Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs When a UPS supplying power to the PDU switches into battery backup operation it may be desirable to switch off non critical outlets to conserve UPS battery life This feature is known as load shedding Activation of load shedding can be accomplished using the web interface SNMP or CLI or triggered by the contact closure sensors Outlets that are turned off when load shedding is activated are called non critical Outlets that are not affected by load shedding are called critical outlets When load shedding is deactivated the PDU will turn back on all non critical outlets By default all outlets are configured as critical until you configure them otherwise Marking All Outlets This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs You can configure all critical and non critical outlets at a time gt To mark all outlets at a time 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click Setup Non Critical Outlets in the Load Shedding section The Non critical Outlet Setup dialog appears Tip This dialog can be also triggered by clicking the Non critical Outlet Setup button on the Outlets page when selecting the Outlets folder
386. nhances the security but slows down the PX device s response Self Sign Ensure this checkbox is selected which indicates that you are creating a self signed certificate Validity in days This field appears after the Self Sign checkbox is selected Type the number of days for which the self signed certificate is valid in this field Note All fields in the Subject section are mandatory except for the Organization Organizational Unit and Email Adaress fields A password is not required for a self signed certificate so the Challenge and Confirm Challenge fields disappear after the Self Sign checkbox is selected 4 Click Create New SSL Key to create both the self signed certificate and private key This may take several minutes to complete 5 You can also do any of the following zie Raritan n Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click Install Key and Certificate to immediately install the self signed certificate and private key When any confirmation and security messages appear click Yes to continue Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successtully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later To download the self signed certificate or private key click Download Certificate or Download Key You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer To remove the self signed certificate and private key permanently from the PX device click Delete Key and Certificate
387. nlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Warning threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current to 20A It also enables the lower warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inlet 1 current lowerWarning 20 SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an inlet config sens
388. nner authentication protocol for the EAP config f network wireless eapInnerAuthentication inner auth Variables e The value of inner auth is MSCHAPVv2 because PX only supports Microsoft s Challenge Authentication Protocol Version 2 MSCHAPv2 as the inner authentication ane SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command determines the inner authentication protocol for the EAP authentication is MSCHAPv2 config network wireless eapInnerAuthentication MSCHAPv2 Setting the EAP Identity This command syntax determines the EAP identity config network wireless eapIdentity identity Variables e identity is your user name for the EAP authentication Example The following command sets the EAP identity to eap_user01 config network wireless eapIdentity eap user01 Setting the EAP Password This command syntax determines the EAP password config f network wireless eapPassword Variables e password is your password for EAP authentication Example The following command sets the EAP password to user01 password config network wireless eapPassword user01l password Providing the EAP CA Certificate You may need to provide a third party CA certificate for the EAP authentication gt To provide a CA certificate 1 Type the CA certificate command as shown below and press Enter config f network wireless eapCACertificate
389. ns spaces Example The following command assigns the name AC source to the inlet 1 If your PX device contains multiple inlets this command names the 1st inlet config ft inlet 1 name AC source Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands A circuit breaker configuration command begins with ocp The command configures an individual circuit breaker Changing the Circuit Breaker Name This command syntax names a circuit breaker config f ocp n name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure The value is an integer between 1 and 50 e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces zie Raritan in Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 370 Example The command assigns the name Email servers CB to the circuit breaker 3 config ocp 3 name Email servers CB Environmental Sensor Configuration Commands An environmental sensor configuration command begins with externalsensor You can configure the name and location parameters of an individual environmental sensor Changing the Sensor Name This command syntax names an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interfac
390. nsor 1 config f assetStrip 1 rackUnitNumberingOffset 5 Specifying the Asset Sensor Orientation This command syntax specifies the orientation of the asset sensors connected to the PX device Usually you do not need to perform this command unless your asset sensors do NOT come with the tilt sensor causing the PX unable to detect the asset sensors orientation config f assetStrip n assetStripOrientation orientation Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e orientation is one of the options topConnector or bottomConnector Orientation Description topConnector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located on the top bottomConnector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located at the bottom S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command specifies the orientation of the RJ 45 connector on the asset sensor 1 to be on the top config assetStrip 1 assetStripOrientation topConnector Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units on the asset sensor 1 to indicate the presence of a connected asset tag config assetStrip lt n gt LEDColorForConnectedTags lt color gt Variables e co
391. nt draw rises to 20A triggering a Current Critical alert The current then continues to fluctuate between 18 1A and 20A With the hysteresis set to 1A PX continues to indicate that the current on the inlet is above critical Without hysteresis that is the hysteresis is set to zero PX would de assert the condition each time the current dropped to 18 9A and re assert the condition each time the current reached 19A or higher With the fluctuating current this could result in a number of repeating SNMP traps and or an e mail account full of repeating SMTP alert notifications Example When to Disable Hysteresis This is an example of when you want to disable the use of hysteresis for outlets Hysteresis is disabled when its value is set to zero The upper warning threshold for current in Outlet 2 is set to 8A In normal usage Outlet 2 draws 7 6A of current A spike in demand causes the current to reach 9A triggering an alert The current then settles to the normal draw of 7 6A With the hysteresis disabled that is set to zero the PX de asserts the condition once the current drops to 7 9A Otherwise the outlet would still be considered above the warning threshold as long as the current never dropped to 7 0A while the hysteresis was set to 1 The condition would not de assert even if the current draw returned to normal What is Assertion Timeout When the assertion timeout is enabled the PX device asserts any warning or criti
392. nt stations 11 Click OK SNMPv3 Notifications gt To configure the PX to send SNMPv3 notifications 1 Choose Device Settings Network Services SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings General Notifications SNHP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 v2c Read Community String Write Community String SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 MIB II System Group sysContact syslame sysLocation Download MiB FZ enable pubic E enable OK Cancel 2 Enter the MIB II system group information if applicable Raritan 267 Chapter 7 Using SNMP a sysContact the contact person in charge of the system being contacted b sysName the name assigned to the system c sysLocation the location of the system 3 Select the MIB to be downloaded The SNMP MIB for your PX is used by the SNMP manager Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your PX to use with your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Downloading SNMP MIB on page 270 Click OK to save the changes On the Notifications tab select the Enable checkbox to enable the SNMP notification feature 6 From the Notification Type drop down select the type of SNMP notification For SNMP TRAPs the engine ID is prepopulated For SNMP INFORM communications leave the resend settings at their default or a Inthe Timeout sec
393. ntal sensor s information show externalsensors lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show externalsensors lt n gt details External sensor 3 Temperature 1 Sensor type Temperatur Reading 31 8 deg C normal Serial number AEI0950133 Description Not configured Location X Not configured Y Not configured Z Not configured Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all environmental sensors Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific Displays the information for the specified environmental environmental sensor only sensor number di SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface The environmental sensor number is the ID number assigned to the sensor which can be found on the External Sensors page of the PX web interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the sensor ID sensor type and reading are displayed Note A state on off sensor displays the sensor state instead of the numeric reading e With the parameter details more information is displayed in addition to the ID number and sensor reading such as the serial number and X Y and Z coordinates Outlet Sensor Threshold Information This command syntax shows the specified outlet sensor s t
394. ntemet can be useful some files can potentialy harm your computer If you do nol tust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk 2 Click Save The Save As dialog appears 3 Navigate to the desired directory and click Save 4 E mail this file as instructed by Raritan Technical Support SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger The PX supports monitoring and administering the Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 heat exchanger if this device is connected to the PX From the PX you can remotely do the following zie Raritan Name a connected LHX heat exchanger Configure the air outlet temperature setpoint Configure air outlet temperature thresholds Configure air inlet temperature thresholds Configure water inlet temperature thresholds Configure fan speed thresholds Monitor the air inlet temperature Monitor the air outlet temperature Monitor the fan speed Configure the default fan speed to operate from 50 to 90 the factory default is 80 Request maximum cooling using the fan speed and opening the cold water valve Acknowledge alerts remotely for example return to normal operation after maximum cooling is requested To monitor one LHX heat exchanger using the PX Physically connect an LHX 20 or LHX 40 heat exchanger to the PX device if it is not already connected See Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional on page 59 Enable the support of
395. nter Track environmental factors in the data center such as temperature and humidity Optimize the data center growth S Raritan Raritan Appendix E Integration dcTrack Overview dcTrack is a powerful and intelligent data center management and automation application dcTrack has been designed by data center and IT professionals to provide broad and deep visibility into the data center It empowers data center managers to plan for growth and change by optimizing their current operations assets and infrastructure With dcTrack you can view everything in the data center from servers blades virtual servers and applications to data networks IP addressing space and cabling dcTrack also allows you to track real time power consumption and manage raised floor space and rack elevations Use dcTrack to build your data center map directly or import existing data center information into the dcTrack If you currently maintain data center information in spreadsheet format that data can be imported into dcTrack using the Import wizard Further dcTrack allows you to import AutoCAD objects to build a data center map Isolate potential problems with dcTrack since end to end power and data circuits can be visually and accurately traced while identifying all intermediate circuit points By using dcTrack s workflow and change management feature data center managers are better able to enforce best practices across the enterprise a
396. nterface Testing the Network Connectivity This command syntax sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST message to a network host for checking its network connectivity If the output shows the host is responding properly the network connectivity is good or the host is shut down or not being connected to the network diag gt ping lt host gt Variables e lt host gt is the host name or IP address whose networking connectivity you want to check Options e You can include any or all of additional options listed below in the ping command Options Description count lt number1 gt Determines the number of messages to be sent lt number1 gt is an integer number size lt number2 gt Determines the packet size lt number2 gt is an integer number in bytes timeout lt number3 gt Determines the waiting period before timeout number3 is an integer number in seconds The command looks like this syntax when it includes all options diag gt ping lt host gt count lt numberl gt size lt number2 gt timeout lt number3 gt Example The following command checks the network connectivity of the host 192 168 84 222 by sending the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST message to the host for 5 times diag gt ping 192 168 84 222 count 5 zie Raritan a Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Tracing the Route This command syntax traces the network route between your PX device and a network host diag gt traceroute lt host gt Variabl
397. ntry to view detailed information Note Sometimes when the dialog is too narrow the icon takes the place of the Show Details button In that case click and select Show Details to view details 215 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click ll to view the latest events View only a specific type of events by selecting an event class in the Filter Event Class field Clearing Event Entries If itis not necessary to keep existing event history you can remove all of it from the local log gt To delete all event entries 1 Choose Maintenance View Event Log The Event Log dialog appears Click Clear Event Log Click Yes on the confirmation message Viewing Connected Users You can see which users are connected to the PX device and their status If you have administrator privileges you can terminate any user s connection to the PX device gt To view connected users 1 Choose Maintenance gt Connected Users The Connected Users dialog appears showing a list of connected users with the following information Column Description User Name The login name used by each connected user IP Address The IP address of each user s host For the login via a local connection serial or USB lt local gt is displayed instead of an IP address Client Type The interface through which the user is being connected to the PX Web GUI Refers to the PX web interface CLI Refers to the command line
398. number s ASCII codes 50 45 47 31 41 30 30 30 30 33 as the unique ID SE Raritan Index 1 1U Products 4 2 2U Products 4 A A Note about Enabling Thresholds 272 A Note about Firmware Upgrade Time 259 A Note about Infinite Loop 211 A Note about Untriggered Rules 215 About the Interface 273 Access Security Control 128 Accessing the Help 261 Action Group 181 183 Activating or Deactivating the Load Shedding Mode 169 Add Page Icon 83 87 Adding a Firewall Rule 345 Adding a Role Based Access Control Rule e 362 Adding Authentication Servers 149 Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring 217 Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management 478 Adding the LDAP Server Settings 149 Adding the RADIUS Server Settings 152 Adding the Raritan PX to dc Track Management 493 Additional PX Information 496 Adjusting Snapshot or Video Properties 243 Adjusting the Pane 85 Alert States and LHX Event Log 256 Alerted Sensors 93 All Privileges 418 421 422 Altitude Correction Factors 115 312 499 AMS M2 Z Daisy Chain Limitations 54 55 56 Applicable Models xiv Asset Management 232 Asset Management Commands 425 Asset Sensor Management 426 Asset Sensor Settings 297 Associating Outlets with Target Servers on KX Il and LX 483 Automatic Mode 68 456 Automatically Completing a Command 446 zieRaritan B Backup and Restore of PX Device Sett
399. o 32 ASCII printable characters gt To determine the authentication protocol config user modify name authenticationProtocol lt option5 gt Variables name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change lt option5 gt is one of the options MD5 or SHA 1 MD5 authentication protocol is applied SHA 1 SHA 1 authentication protocol is applied gt To determine the privacy protocol config user modify name privacyProtocol option6 Variables name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change lt option6 gt is one of the options DES or AES 128 DES privacy protocol is applied 411 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description AES 128 AES 128 privacy protocol is applied Example The following command sets three SNMPv3 parameters of the user May config user modify May snmpV3Access enable securityLevel authNoPriv userPasswordAsAuthenticationPassPhrase true Results e The user s SNMPv3 access permission is enabled e The SNMPV38 security level is authentication only no privacy e The authentication passphrase is identical to the user s password Changing the Role s This command syntax changes the role s of a specific user config user modify lt name gt roles lt roles gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt roles gt is a role or a list of comma separated roles assigned
400. o set the SMTP server settings Choose Device Settings SMTP Server The SMTP Server Settings dialog appears Type the name or IP address of the mail server in the Server Name field Type the port number for the SMTP server in the Port field The default is 25 Type an email address for the sender in the Sender Email Address field Type the number of email retries in the Number of Sending Retries field The default is 2 retries Type the time interval between email retries in the Time Interval Between Sending Retries in minutes field The time is measured in minutes The default is 2 minutes If your SMTP server requires password authentication do this a Select the Server Requires Authentication checkbox b Type auser name in the User Name field c Type a password in the Password field Now that you have set the SMTP settings you can test it to ensure it works properly Do the following a Type the recipient s email address in the Recipient Email Addresses field Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses b Click Send Test Email Click OK to save the changes 10 Check if the recipient s receives the email successfully Raritan 117 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting the EnergyWise Configuration If a Cisco EnergyWise energy management architecture is implemented in your place you can enable the Cisco EnergyWise endpoint impl emented on the PX device so that this device
401. o the appropriate SecureLock outlet on the PDU Push the plug toward the outlet until you hear the click which indicates the plug s latches are snapped into the latch slots of the outlet 497 Appendix F Additional PX Information gt To remove a SecureLock power cord from the PDU 1 Press and hold down the two latches on the cord s plug as illustrated in the diagram below 2 Unplug the cord now Button Type Locking Outlets A button type locking outlet has a button on it Such outlets do not require any special power cords to achieve the locking purpose All you need to do is simply plug a regular power cord into the locking outlet and the outlet automatically locks the cord gt To remove a power cord from the locking outlet 1 Press and hold down the tiny button on the outlet Depending on the outlet type the button location differs 2 Unplug the power cord now id Raritan Appendix F Additional PX Information Altitude Correction Factors If a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached to your device the altitude you enter for the device can serve as an altitude correction factor That is the reading of the differential air pressure sensor will be multiplied by the correction factor to get a correct reading This table shows the relationship between different altitudes and correction factors Altitude meters Altitude feet Correction factor 0 0 0 95 250 820 0 98 425 1394 1 00 500
402. o the default power up sequence that is the ascending order 3 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed Note that re sorting the list makes changes to the outlet power up sequence 4 Click OK to save the changes Next time when power cycling the PDU it will turn on all outlets based on the new order of the list Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs You can make a power on delay occur between two outlets that are turned on consecutively when the PDU turns on all outlets For example if the power up sequence is Outlet 1 through Outlet 12 and you want the PDU to wait for 5 seconds after turning on Outlet 3 before turning on Outlet 4 assign a delay of 5 seconds on Outlet 3 gt To set the outlet specific power on delay 1 Trigger the Outlet Sequence Setup dialog by doing either of the following Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Click Sequence Setup Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click the PDU folder and then the Setup button in the Outlet Sequence section 2 Click the Delay column of the outlet where a delay is intended after this outlet is turned on delete the existing value and type a new number in seconds The number can be a decimal number To disable the delay simply type the number 0 zero 3 Repeat the above step to change the delay setti
403. o the flexible cord the plug s rated ampacity is chosen as follows In the United States as specified in UL 60950 1 the plug s rated ampacity must be 125 greater than the Raritan product s rated ampacity In some Raritan products such as 35A 3 phase delta wired PDUS an exactly 12596 rated plug is not available In these cases choose the closest plug that is more than 12596 For example a 50A plug is the closest fit for a 35A 3 phase PDU For all other locations subject to local regulatory agency policy the plug s rated ampacity is the same as the Raritan products rated ampacity Receptacle Selection For Raritan in line monitors any receptacle fitted to the outlet flexible cord must have identical ratings as the plug attached to the inlet flexible cord Derating a Raritan Product Lower rated plugs receptacles and flexible cords may be connected to a Raritan product This results in a derated reduced ampacity rating for the product 1 Derating guidelines Choose the plug and use its rated ampacity to determine the derated ampacity In the United States as specified in UL 60950 1 the derated ampacity is 8096 of the plug s rated ampacity For example a 30A plug would result in a derated ampacity of 24A In other geographic locations subject to local regulatory agency approval the derated ampacity is the plug s rated ampacity For example using a 16A plug would result in a derated ampacity of
404. ocess is indicated in the PX web interface e An SNMP trap is sent to indicate the firmware upgrade event Accessing the Help zie Raritan The Help menu provides e Current firmware and software packages information e Alinkto the PX User Guide that is the online help Retrieving Software Packages Information You can check the current firmware version and the information of all open source packages embedded in the PX device through the web interface gt To retrieve the embedded software packages information 1 Choose Help About Dominion PX The About Dominion PX dialog appears with a list of open source packages displayed 2 Youcan click any link in the dialog to access related information or download any software package Browsing through the Online Help The PX User Guide is also provided in the form of online help and accessible over the Internet To use online help Active Content must be enabled in your browser If you are using Internet Explorer 7 you must enable Scriplets Consult your browser help for information on enabling these features gt To use the PX online help 1 Choose Help User Guide The online help opens in the default web browser 2 To view the content of any topic click the topic in the left pane Then its content is displayed in the right pane 3 To select a different topic do any of the following 261 262 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To view the nex
405. ock detection e Floor water detection e Smoke detection e Vibration detection Raritan does NOT produce most of the above detectors switches except floor water sensors When using third party probes you must test them with Raritan s DPX CC2 TR to ensure they work properly Important Integration and testing for third party detectors switches is the 35 36 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment sole responsibility of the customer Raritan cannot assume any liability as a result of improper termination or failure incidental or consequential of third party detectors switches that customers provide and install Failure to follow installation and configuration instructions can result in false alarms or no alarms Raritan makes no statement or claim that all third party detectors switches will work with DPX CC2 TR Raritan has changed the design of contact closure sensors and made new contact closure sensors available for sale since the 4th quarter of 2012 Both old and new contact closure sensors function in the same manner and the latest PX firmware supports the use of either one See Old and New Contact Closure Sensors on page 36 for details Old and New Contact Closure Sensors Raritan further improved the design of contact closure sensors and released a second version in the 4th quarter of 2012 Old and new contact closure sensors are functionally identical The major difference between them is the mechanical design as descri
406. odE kesince atra kk er D RR D UR rd a 456 Manual Mode T deneda nEaN da i EENAA NAE Nd a aae 457 In Line Monitor s Web Interface iiweccivsnccctavancsccvssutsccavacdarcssaaestendsantartadaasscelssdesilavacsstinedeasendeacneed 457 BETioeri x fc 458 Outlet Pag Eeee annone euge rete eie guapa sete deck cance eut us des eue vete eua Edera 458 Appendix A Specifications 460 Power Measurement Accuracy ssssssssessseeess seen eee tenn enne nnns sn nht nentes nnns sinn snnt nennen 460 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature ssssssssssssseeeeeneeen enne 460 Serial RS 232 Port PIriouts ic cette entend che en xke epa ek aao ER ea EXER Eu RR KANRA ER ea ER 461 Sensor RJ 12 Port PIMOUIS s casos utet n pte depen Ete enne Ex xad cie EX Bk e En e 461 Feature RJ 45 Port PIDOULS iiit ict t eite coetu Ba ER He RE DER s a SERV rade eR EY Ra RR an REE M Ta RYE 461 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet 463 Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults 467 USING the Reset BUON uisu teda eet aeda eaim av qut endi t sepas duue n ARR en dude RR EHE En Ea 467 Using the CLI Command asessorina aiana ENAERE ERA oe dua Puede dau 468 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 470 Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups sssssssssseee ener 470 Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server ssssssssssseseeneeeeeren nnn 471 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the PX Device sss
407. of default log messages and events that trigger them If needed select the Use Custom Log Message checkbox and then create a custom message in the provided field S Raritan Raritan 9 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click the Information icon to open the Event Context Information dialog which contains a list of placeholders and their definitions See Email and SMS Message Placeholders on page 206 for more details Click OK to save the new action 10 Click Close to quit the dialog Send an SNMP Notification This option sends an SNMP notification to one or multiple SNMP destinations gt 1 To configure sending an SNMP notification Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rules Settings dialog opens Click the Actions tab Click New In the Action name field type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number starting from 1 In the Action field click the Action drop down arrow and select the desired action Send SNMP notification Select the type of SNMP notification See either procedure below according to your selection To send SNMP v2c notifications From the Notification Type drop down select SNMP v2c Trap or SNMP v2c Inform For SNMP INFORM communications leave the resend settings at their default or a Inthe Timeout sec field enter the interval of time in seconds after which a new inform
408. of inlet INLET available Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLE of inlet INLET deasserted above upper critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLE J of inlet INLET S Raritan Event Context Inlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower warning threshold Inlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower critical threshold Outlet gt gt Power control gt Powered on Outlet gt gt Power control gt Powered off Outlet gt gt Power control gt Power cycled Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Unavailable Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper critical threshold Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Above upper warning threshold Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower warning threshold Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt Below lower critical threshold Outlet gt gt Sensor gt gt On Outlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt Unavailable Outlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt Above upper critical threshold Outlet gt gt Pole gt gt Sensor gt zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Default Assertion Message when the Default Assertion Message Event TRUE asserted above upper warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLETJ of inlet INLET asserted below lower warning Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLEJ of inlet INLET
409. of the SSH service snmp Only displays the SNMP settings zeroconfig Only displays the settings of the zero configuration advertising modbus Only displays the settings of the Modbus TCP service PDU Configuration This command shows the PDU configuration such as the device name firmware version and model type show pdu To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show pdu details zie Raritan 2 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 282 Outlet Information This command syntax shows the outlet information show outlets lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show outlets lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all outlets Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific outlet Displays the information for the specified outlet number only Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the outlet state is displayed e With the parameter details more outlet information is displayed in addition to the state such as the name rated current operating voltage and outlet settings S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Inlet Information This command syntax shows the inlet info
410. of the X cable into the FEATURE port of the PX device S Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 2 Plug the phone connector of the X cable into the SENSOR port of the PX device This step is required for improving the AMS M2 Z signal strength SENSOR FEATURE 3 Plug the RJ 45 connector at the longer end of the X cable into the RJ 45 port labeled Input on the AMS M2 Z Note Though the X cable can also connect to a regular asset sensor usually it is not necessary to make such a connection A maximum of 5 additional AMS M2 Z units can be connected to the AMS M2 Z unit being attached to the X cable See Connecting AMS M2 Z Asset Sensors Optional on page 54 for step by step instructions zie Raritan 57 58 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 4 Connect any Raritan environmental sensor or hub to the sensor port of the X cable if you want to monitor environmental factors See Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional on page 33 for information on environmental sensors Connecting a Logitech Webcam Optional The PX supports webcams connected to it allowing you to view video or snapshots of the area surrounding the webcam The following webcams are supported e Logitech Webcam Pro 9000 Model 960 000048 e Logitech QuickCam Deluxe for Notebooks Model 960 000043 e Logitech QuickCam Communicate MP Model 960 000240 e Logitech C200 The PX supports up to one webcam After connecting a
411. of the outlet 5 RMS current to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config sensor outlet 5 current hysteresis 0 2 zie Raritan 2 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified outlet sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the outlet 5 RMS current to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor outlet 5 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Inlet Sensors A sensor co
412. ollowed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the outlet number such as 1 2 3 and so on gt To name an outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears 155 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 4 Typea name in the Outlet Name field 5 Click OK to save the changes Outlet Monitoring The Dominion PX Explorer pane provides quick access to the outlet information The outlet information such as RMS current active power power factor and so on is displayed immediately after an outlet icon in the tree is selected Note RMS refers to Root Mean Square a statistical method for measuring certain types of variables In this context it gives the value of current that is equivalent to a DC value Monitoring All Outlets You can view the current status of all outlets at a time gt To monitor all outlets 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the Outlets fol
413. olon The argument could be e All outlets that is swi e Anoutletn swi swi swi e Alis tchOu tchou tchOu tchOu tle t all umber For example tle tle tle s L2 E33 t of comma separated outlets For example swi Raritan tchOu tle E 1 3 5 7 9 9 419 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command creates a new role and assigns privileges to the role config role create tester firmwareUpdate viewEventSetup Results e Anewrole tester is created e Two privileges are assigned to the role firmwareUpdate Firmware Update and viewEventSetup View Event Settings Modifying a Role You can modify diverse parameters of an existing role including its privileges gt To modify a role s description config f role modify name description description Variables e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e lt description gt is a description comprising alphanumeric characters The description variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces gt To add more privileges to a specific role config role modify lt name gt addPrivileges privilegel privilege2 privilege3 If a specific privilege contains any arguments add a colon and the argument s after that privilege Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config
414. om the PDU you must keep it unpowered for a minimum of 10 seconds Otherwise the default outlet state settings may not work properly after powering up the PDU again Setting the PDU Defined Default State This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This procedure sets the PDU defined outlet state which determines the initial power state of all outlets after powering up the PX device Tip To set a different state on a particular outlet see Setting the Outlet Specific Default State on page 161 gt To set the default state for all outlets 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Outlet state on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list On Turns on all outlets when the PX device powers up Off Turns off all outlets when the PX device powers up last known Restores all outlets to their previous power states before the PX device was powered off 4 Click OK to save the changes SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting the Outlet Specific Default State This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs By default the power state of each outlet follows the PDU defined setting Setting the default state of a particular out
415. om the list Rack Units The height of the Z coordinate is measured in standard rack units When this is selected you can type a numeric value in the rack unit to describe the Z coordinate of any environmental sensors Free Form Any alphanumeric string can be used for specifying the Z coordinate 4 Click OK to save the changes e Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Describing the Sensor Location Use the X Y and Z coordinates to describe each sensor s physical location You can use these location values to track records of environmental conditions in fixed locations around your IT equipment The X Y and Z values act as additional attributes and are not tied to any specific measurement scheme If you choose to you can use non measurement values For example X Brown Cabinet Row Y Third Rack Z Top of Cabinet Values for the X Y and Z coordinates may consist of e For X and Y Any combination of alphanumeric characters The coordinate value can be 0 to 32 characters long e For Z when the Z coordinate format is set to Rack Units any numeric value ranging from 0 to 60 e For Z when the Z coordinate format is set to Free Form any alphanumeric characters from 0 to 32 characters Tip To configure and retrieve these coordinate values over SNMP see the PX MIB To configure and retrieve these values over the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 273 Setting Thresholds
416. ompletes the installation Mounting 1U or 2U Models Using the appropriate brackets and tools fasten the 1U or 2U PX device to the rack or cabinet If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount the PX device 1 Attach a rackmount bracket to each side of the PX with the provided screws 2 Raritan D 12 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 3 Secure with the provided end cap screws 4 Mount the PX device on the rack by securing the rackmount brackets ears to the rack s front rails with your own screws bolts cage nuts or the like Raritan Chapter 3 Before You Begin zie Raritan Installation and Configuration This chapter explains how to install a PX device and configure it for network connectivity In This Chapter Before You Begi tdt tec e terere tu eet Us deed ese SERE sens 13 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional 14 Connecting the PDU to a Power Source ssssseeeee 15 Configuring the PX ede centi a aaa e dp n ERR EE dea 16 Cascading the PX via USB eccene rettet nnda ea Re tke en drea 29 Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional 31 Before beginning the installation perform the following activities e Unpack the product and components e Prepare the installation site e Fill out the equipment
417. on file to your PC The file is saved in the XML format and its content is encrypted using the AES 128 encryption algorithm zie Raritan di 240 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Copying a PX Configuration A target device is an PX device that loads another PX device s configuration file Copying an PX configuration to a target device adjusts that PX device s settings to match those of the source PX device In order to successfully copy an PX configuration e Theuser must be the Admin user Or the Admin role is assigned to the user e The target PX device must be of the same model type as the source PX device e The target PX device must be running the same firmware version as the source PX device gt Tocopy a PX configuration 1 Login to the target device s web interface 2 Ifthe target device s firmware version does not match that of the source device update the target s firmware See Firmware Upgrade on page 258 3 Choose Maintenance gt Bulk Configuration The Bulk Configuration dialog appears 4 Inthe Copy Bulk Configuration section click Browse and select the configuration file stored on your PC 5 Click Upload amp Restore Bulk Configuration to copy the file A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation and enter the admin password Enter the admin password then click Yes to confirm the operation Wait until the PX device resets and the Login page re appears indicating
418. on when the monitoring of any specified server starts or stops im SE Raritan Event types Server reachability Connection or disconnection of a device such as the RF Code tag or a subsequent slave device Outlet power state change Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Radio buttons Available radio buttons include Unreachable Reachable and Both Unreachable The PX takes the action only when any specified server becomes inaccessible Reachable The PX takes the action only when any specified server becomes accessible Both The PX takes the action when any specified server becomes either inaccessible or accessible Available radio buttons include Connected Disconnected and Both Connected PX takes the action only when the selected device is physically connected to it Disconnected PX takes the action only when the selected device is physically disconnected from it Both PX takes the action both when the selected device is physically connected to it and when it is disconnected Available radio buttons include On Off and Both On PX takes the action only when the chosen outlet is turned ON Off PX takes the action only when the chosen outlet is turned OFF Both PX takes the action when the chosen outlet is either turned ON or turned OFF Note The outlet power state change events are available only for outlet switching capable PDUs 1 Inthe Actions field select the
419. ons so that you can power on power off and power cycle the server from the Port Access page To use this feature you will need e Raritan remote rack PDU s e Power CIMs D2CIM PWR gt To make power associations associate rack PDU outlets to KVM target servers Note When a rack PDU is associated to a target server port the outlet name is replaced by the target server name even if you assigned another name to the outlet 1 Choose the rack PDU from the Power Strip Name drop down list 2 Forthat rack PDU choose the outlet from the Outlet Name drop down list Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all desired power associations Click OK A confirmation message is displayed gt To change the port name 1 Type something descriptive in the Name field For example the name of the target server would be a likely candidate The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include special characters 2 Click OK Removing Power Associations When disconnecting target servers and or rack PDUs from the device all power associations should first be deleted When a target has been associated with a rack PDU and the target is removed from the device the power association remains When this occurs you are not able to access the Port Configuration for that disconnected target server in Device Settings so that the power association can be properly remove gt To remove a rack PDU association 1 Select the appropriate rac
420. ontact Value 336 Setting the sysLocation Value 337 Setting the sysName Value 337 Setting the Time Zone 272 342 Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 394 Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole 387 Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 395 Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole 388 Setting the Wireless Parameters 316 Setting the X Coordinate 372 Setting the Y Coordinate 372 Setting the Z Coordinate 313 373 Setting the Z Coordinate Format 226 Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors 312 373 Setting Thresholds for Multiple Sensors xvi 227 Setting Up an LHX 253 Setting Up an SSL Certificate 128 142 Setting Up Default Measurement Units xvi 112 124 Setting Up External Authentication xvi 105 128 147 Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules 138 Setting Up Roles 80 116 119 122 125 Setting Up User Login Controls 134 Setting Up Your Preferred Measurement Units e xvi 112 115 123 124 Setup Button 85 Show Commands 500 Showing Information 279 Showing the Network Connections 444 Single Login Limitation 353 Snapshot Storage xvi 245 SNMP Gets and Sets 269 SNMP Sets and Thresholds 271 SNMPv2c Notifications 266 SNMPv3 Notifications 267 Sorting Firewall Rules 133 Sorting Role Based Access Control Rules 141 Sorting the Access Order
421. or inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified inlet sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis for the inlet 1 RMS current to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config sensor inlet 1 current hysteresis 0 2 zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 386 Setting the Inlet s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want
422. or the pole 2 L2 L3 voltage of the inlet 1 config f sensor inletpole 1 L2 voltage lowerCritical enable Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an inlet pole config f sensor inletpole n p sensor type lowerWarning option Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e p is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 is SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified
423. ort The PX device supports connecting one of the following devices to its FEATURE port e Raritan Computer Interface Module CIM for KVM access See Dominion KX II Configuration on page 480 e Raritan asset management sensors asset sensors See Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional on page 47 e Raritan serial access products including Dominion KSX II or SX See Dominion KSX Il or SX Configuration on page 484 e Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 heat exchanger See Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional on page 59 By default the FEATURE port can automatically detects and displays the device connected to the FEATURE port The only exception is the Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 device which requires enabling the LHX support before the PX can detect or display it See Managing the Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger on page 251 You can change the mode applied to the FEATURE port so that the PX web interface only displays the device in the manner you wish gt To configure the FEATURE port 1 Click the Feature Port folder The Feature Port page opens in the right pane 2 Select the Port 1 device on the Feature Port page and click Setup The Feature Port Setup dialog appears 3 Select the desired mode in the Detected Mode field Auto The PX automatically detects and displays the device connected to the FEATURE port This is the default Disabled The FEATURE port is disabled so the PX does not det
424. ost A dialog appears displaying the Ping results 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Tracing the Network Route Trace Route lets you find out the route over the network between two hosts or systems gt To trace the route for a host 1 Choose Maintenance Network Diagnostics Trace Route The Trace Route to Host dialog appears 2 Typethe IP address or name of the host whose route you want to check in the Host Name field Click Run A dialog appears displaying the Trace Route results Click Close to quit the dialog SE Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Listing TCP Connections You can use the List TCP Connections to display a list of TCP connections gt To trace the route for a host 1 Choose Maintenance gt Network Diagnostics gt List TCP Connections The TCP connections dialog appears 2 Click Close to quit the dialog Viewing the Communication Log zie Raritan The PX allows you to inspect all communications occurred between the PX device and its graphical user interface GUI The information is usually useful for a technical support engineer only and you may not need to view it This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges gt To view the communication log 1 Choose Maintenance gt View Communication Log The Communication Log dialog appears 2 The dialog shows the final page by default You can Switch between different pages by doi
425. oute 446 Truncated Data in the Web Interface 504 Turning Off the Outlet s 439 Turning On the Outlet s e 438 Turning the LHX On or Off 251 257 Two Digit Row e xvi 67 Raritan Index U Unblocking a User 134 441 Unmanaging Environmental Sensors 224 232 Unpacking the Product and Components 13 Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware 261 Updating the PX Firmware 29 258 Uppercase Character Requirement 357 USB Wireless LAN Adapters xvi 20 21 User Blocking 354 User Configuration Commands 404 User Management 119 Using an X Cable xvi 56 Using SNMP 259 263 Using the CLI Command xvi 442 468 Using the Command Line Interface xvi 105 227 273 468 Using the PDU 61 Using the Reset Button 467 Using the Web Interface 22 77 457 V Viewing Connected Users 216 Viewing Details 255 Viewing Firmware Update History 260 Viewing Sensor Data 228 Viewing the Communication Log 87 249 Viewing the Dashboard 93 Viewing the Local Event Log 215 Viewing the Summary 254 256 Viewing the Webcam Snapshots or Videos 59 243 W Warning Icon 88 Webcam Management 242 What is Assertion Timeout 174 175 176 177 178 179 225 380 386 393 399 404 What is Deassertion Hysteresis 173 174 175 176 177 178 215 225 254 379 385 392 398 403 What s New in the PX User Guide xvi Wired Network Settings 99 Wireless Conf
426. ove upper critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP deasserted above upper warning Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP deasserted below lower warning Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP deasserted below lower critical Sensor OCPSENSOR on overcurrent protector OCP is closed External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot TEXTSENSORSLOT available External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT deasserted above upper critical External sensor EXTSENSORNAME in slot EXTSENSORSLOT deasserted above upper warning S Raritan External Sensor Slot gt gt Numeric Sensor gt Below lower warning threshold External Sensor Slot gt gt Numeric Sensor gt Below lower critical threshold External Sensor Slot gt gt State Sensor gt Unavailable External Sensor Slot gt gt State Sensor gt Closed External Sensor Slot gt gt State Sensor gt On External Sensor Slot gt gt State Sensor gt Alarmed Server Monitoring gt gt Monitored Server Monitoring gt gt Unreachable EnergyWise gt Enabled Asset Management gt State Asset Management gt Rack Unit gt gt Tag Connected Asset Management gt Rack Unit gt Blade Extension Connected Asset Management Firmware Update Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface
427. p sysName value Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sysName to Win7 system config network services snmp sysName Win7 system Seiting the sysLocation Value This command syntax sets the SNMP MIB II sysLocation value config f network services snmp sysLocation value Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sysLocation to New TAIPEI config f network services snmp sysLocation New TAIPEI Changing the Modbus Configuration You can enable or disable the Modbus agent configure its read only capability or change its TCP port A Modbus command begins with network services modbus 337 338 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling Modbus This command syntax enables or disables the Modbus protocol config network services modbus enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The Modbus agent is enabled false The Modbus agent is disabled Example The following command enables the Modbus protocol config f network services modbus enabled true Enabling or Disabling the Read Only Mode This command syntax enables or disables the read only mode for the Modbus agent config network services modbus readonly lt opt
428. pe 192 168 84 95 in the IP Address Hostname field To make the PX declare the accessibility of the monitored PDU every 15 seconds 3 pings 5 seconds when that PDU is accessible do the following a In the Number of Successful Pings to Enable Feature field type 3 b In the Wait Time in seconds after Successful Ping field type 5 To make the PX declare the inaccessibility of the monitored PDU when that PDU becomes inaccessible for around 12 seconds 4 pings 8 seconds do the following a Inthe Number of Consecutive Unsuccessful Pings for Failure field type 4 b In the Wait Time in seconds after Unsuccessful Ping field type 3 In the Wait Time in seconds before Resuming Pinging field type 60 to make the PX stops pinging the target PDU for 60 seconds 1 minute after the PDU inaccessibility is declared After 60 seconds the PX will re ping the target PDU Step 2 Create an event rule to send SNMP notifications for this PDU Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click New In the Rule name field type Send SNMP notifications for PDU 192 168 84 95 inaccessibility Select the Enabled checkbox to enable this new rule In the Event field choose Server Monitoring gt 192 168 84 95 gt Unreachable 219 220 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 6 In the Trigger condition field select the Unreachable radio button This makes the PX react only when the
429. per Critical e Upper and Lower Warning thresholds indicate the sensor reading enters the warning range before the critical threshold e Upper and Lower Critical thresholds indicate the sensor reading is at the critical level To avoid generating a large amount of alert events the deassertion hysteresis for each threshold is enabled You can change the default hysteresis value if necessary For more information on the deassertion hysteresis see What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 Note After setting the thresholds remember to configure the event rules See Event Rules and Actions on page 180 Setting an Outlet s Thresholds You can set up the thresholds deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout for a particular outlet The threshold values set for an individual outlet will override the bulk threshold values stored on that outlet gt To set the thresholds for an outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 173 174 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 9 10 11 In
430. perating normally The heat exchanger is turned OFF The heat exchanger is turned ON but enters the critical state because of any LHX sensor failure At least one of the LHX sensor readings has crossed the upper or lower warning threshold NO LHX device is detected on the FEATURE port 255 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To identify the cause of the critical state view one of the following e The LHX Heat Exchanger section of the Dashboard page See Viewing the Summary on page 254 e The Feature Port page See Viewing the Summary on page 254 e The Alert States section of the LHX heat exchanger page See Alert States and LHX Event Log on page 256 Alert States and LHX Event Log When an LHX heat exchanger is physically connected to the PX device a section labeled Alert States appears on its device page The Alert States section shows information identifying the LHX sensors that currently fail Tip The Dashboard and Feature Port pages also point out failed sensors See Viewing the Summary on page 254 If maximum cooling of an LHX device has been requested clicking the Acknowledge Alert Status button acknowledges the Maximum cooling requested alert the message disappears from the Alerts section the LHX returns to normal operation See Requesting Maximum Cooling for an LHX on page 257 for information on using the maximum cooling request feature A button labeled Show Event Log is located in the Alert Stat
431. played e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis of the specified circuit breaker sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config fd sensor ocp 3 current hysteresis 0 2 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of a circuit breaker config f sensor ocp n sensor type assertionTimeout value Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor E sis Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout of the specified circuit breaker sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 179 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a
432. press the Up button to show the first outlet s unbalanced load The UB LOAD 96 LED is lit Then press the Up and Down buttons to switch between different outlet s unbalanced load readings if there are more than one outlet Note The LED display returns to the Automatic Mode after 20 seconds elapse since the last time any button was pressed In Line Monitor s Web Interface zie Raritan An in line monitor s web interface is similar to a regular PX model s web interface See Using the Web Interface on page 77 for login instructions and additional information 457 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors 458 Dashboard Page After login the web interface displays the Dashboard page by default An inline monitor s Dashboard page looks slightly different from a regular PX device s Dashboard page The power status of the outlet on a three phase Y wired inline monitor is displayed on this page including e Current of L1 L2 andL3 e Voltage of L1 L2 L2 L3 and L3 L1 e Active power e Apparent power e Power factor Note Depending on your model elements shown on the same page may appear slightly different from this image SRaritan Dominion PX Geg User Marnginert Device Setiege Mantenance Help Dorririen PX Explorer Dashboard 43 Mi doshicord Inlet Outiet ory PX 192 168 84 100 Gode a n LE Correct 42 Orini 3 Current LlA2Vetage L242 Vetape LEAT Vetape Acco Power ApcarettPower Pewer Fact fi t
433. pressure 1 5 e Air flow 6 5 States of Managed Sensors An environmental sensor shows the state after being managed Available sensor states vary depending on the sensor type numeric or discrete sensors For example a contact closure sensor is a discrete on off sensor so it switches between three states only unavailable alarmed and normal Note Numeric sensors use numeric values to indicate the environmental or internal conditions while discrete on off sensors use alphabetical characters only to indicate the state changes Sensor state Applicable to unavailable All sensors alarmed Discrete sensors normal All sensors below lower critical Numeric sensors below lower warning Numeric sensors above upper warning Numeric sensors above upper critical Numeric sensors zie Raritan ii Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface unavailable State The unavailable state means the connectivity to the sensor is lost The Raritan PX pings all managed sensors at regular intervals in seconds If it does not detect a particular sensor for three consecutive scans the unavailable state is displayed for that sensor When the communication with a contact closure sensor s processor is lost all detectors that is all switches connected to the same sensor module show the unavailable state Note When the sensor is deemed unavailable the existing sensor configuration remains unchanged For example the ID number assigned to the
434. prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to remove the selected rule s from the rules list 7 Click OK to save the changes 133 134 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting Up User Login Controls You can set up login controls to make it more difficult for hackers to access the PX and the devices connected to it You can arrange to lock persons out after a specified number of failed logins limit the number of persons who log in using the same user name at the same time and force users to create strong passwords Enabling User Blocking User blocking determines how many times a user can attempt to log in to the PX and fail authentication before the user s login is blocked Note that this function applies only to local authentication instead of authentication through external AA servers Note If any user blocking event occurs you can unblock that user manually by using the unblock CLI command via a serial connection See Unblocking a User on page 441 gt To enable user blocking 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Login Settings The Login Settings dialog appears Locate the User Blocking section To enable the user blocking feature select the Block user on login failure checkbox 4 Type a number in the Maximum number of failed logins field This is the maximum number of failed logins the user is permitted before the user s login is blocked from accessing the PX device 5 To
435. propriate torque settings vary according to the cable gland size Cable gland size M12x1 5 M16x1 5 M20x1 5 Torque setting N m 0 7 to 0 9 2 0 to 3 0 2 7 to 4 0 455 456 Chapter 9 In Line Monitors Cable gland size M25x1 5 M32x1 5 M40x1 5 M50x1 5 M63x1 5 Torque setting N m 5 0 to 7 5 7 5 to 10 0 7 5 to 10 0 7 5 to 10 0 7 5 to 10 0 Note The cable gland size is marked on the cable gland body After tightening examine the flexible cord and cable gland for the following Make sure you can see a few remaining threads between the cable gland body and cable gland nut The gland nut must not bottom out on the gland body Make sure the flexible cord does not move in the cable gland when it is twisted pushed or pulled 8 Re install the PDU wiring access panel or in line monitor cover plate This completes internal wiring of the Raritan product 9 For in line monitors fasten the receptacles to the outlet flexible cords following the manufacturer s instructions 10 Complete the wiring of the inlet flexible cord by performing one of these steps Assemble the plug following the manufacturer s instructions Permanently attach and strain relief the flexible cord to a junction box following applicable electrical codes In Line Monitor s LED Display The LED display of an in line monitor is the same as a regular PX model See LED Display on page 65 Automatic Mode Un
436. pshot or video remains open in a secondary Live Preview window in the User A s PX interface So long as the secondary Live Preview window is open in User A s interface even after User A logs out of the PX interface or the session times out the link is available Best Practice As abest practice in the PX interface User A should open the snapshot or video in a secondary Live Preview window and leave the Live Preview window open at least until User B opens the snapshot or video via the link Once User B opens the snapshot or video via the link the secondary Live Preview mode window can be closed in the User A s PX interface User B can either manually let User A know they have opened the link or User A can check to see if User B is currently connected to the application by choosing Maintenance gt Connected Users gt To send a snapshot or video link via email or instant message 1 Inthe navigation tree click on the webcam that is capturing the snapshot or video you want to provide a link to in the email The snapshot or video is displayed in Live Preview mode in the right pane P 2 Click on the Live Preview icon located above the snapshot or video The snapshot or video opens in a secondary Live Preview window 3 Copythe URL from the Live Preview window paste it into the email or instant message application Leave the Live Preview window open at least until the recipient opens the snapshot or video via the link Snapshot
437. r 6 Using the Web Interface 4 Click Close to quit the dialog A Note about Untriggered Rules In some cases a measurement exceeds a threshold causing the PX to generate an alert The measurement then returns to a value within the threshold but the PX does not generate an alert message for the Deassertion event Such scenarios can occur due to the hysteresis tracking the PX uses See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 Managing Event Logging zie Raritan By default the PX captures certain system events and saves them in a local internal event log Viewing the Local Event Log You can view up to 2 000 historical events that occurred to the PX device in the local event log When the log already contains 2 000 entries each new entry overwrites the oldest entry gt To display the local log 1 Choose Maintenance gt View Event Log The Event Log dialog appears Each event entry in the local log consists of Date and time of the event Type ofthe event A description of the event D number of the event 2 The dialog shows the final page by default You can Switch between different pages by doing one of the following Click I4 or P to go to the first or final page Click 4 or P to go to the prior or next page Type a number in the Page text box and press Enter to go to a specific page Select a log entry from the list and click Show Details or simply double click the log e
438. r RJ 12 Port Pinouts RJ 12 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction 1 12V GND 3 4 m GND 1 wire Feature RJ 45 Port Pinouts RJ 45 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction 1 DTR Output 2 GND Raritan Appendix A Specifications Description Data Receive data data in Transmit data Data terminal ready Signal ground Data set ready Request to send Clear to send Ring indicator Description Power 500mA fuse protected Signal Ground Signal Ground Used for Feature Port Description Reserved Signal Ground 461 462 Appendix A Specifications RJ 45 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction 3 5V 4 TxD Output 5 RxD Input 6 N C N C 7 GND 8 DCD Input Description Power for CIM 200mA fuse protected Warning Pin 3 is only intended for use with Raritan devices Transmit Data Data out Receive Data Data in No Connection Signal Ground Reserved S Raritan Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet PX Series Model PX Series Serial Number OUTLET 1 OUTLET 2 OUTLET 3 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 4 OUTLET 5 OUTLET 6 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE zie Raritan 463 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 7 OUTLET 8 OUTLET 9 MODEL MODEL MODEL SE
439. r critical Emergency cooling on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was deactivated S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface LHX gt Maximum cooling request Maximum cooling was requested for LHX gt Parameter Data Loss LHX gt ST Bus Communication Error LHX gt Collective fault LHX gt Door Contact LHX gt Sensor Failure LHX gt Fan Failure LHX gt Power Supply Failure LHX gt Threshold Air Inlet LHX gt Threshold Air Outlet LHX gt Threshold Water Inlet LHX gt Threshold Water Outlet LHX gt Threshold Humidity LHX gt External Water Cooling Failure Raritan LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID Data loss in parameter memory was detected on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTIDJ An ST Bus communication error was detected on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTIDJ A collective fault occurred on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID The door of LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was opened A sensor failure broken or short circuit occurred on LHX at PORTTYPE port N PORTID at sensor LHXSENSORID A fan motor failure occurred on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID at fan LHXFANID A power supply failure occurred on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID at power supply LHXPOWERSUPPLYID The air inlet temperature threshold on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was crossed The air outlet temperature threshold on LHX at PORTTYPE port PORTID was crossed The water in
440. r does not exceed 30 meters 100 feet The new contact closure sensor comprises two parts sensor module and terminal module The terminal module is removable With this design There are two ways to plug discrete detectors switches e Connect the discrete detectors switches while the terminal module is attached to the sensor module e Connect the discrete detectors switches while the terminal module is separated from the sensor module gt To make connections when the terminal module is attached 1 Strip the insulation around 12mm from the end of each wire of discrete detectors switches 2 Fully insert each wire of both detectors switches into each termination point Plug both wires of a detector switch into the two termination points to the left Plug both wires of the other detector switch into the two termination points to the right S Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 3 Use an appropriate screw driver to tighten the screws above each termination point until the connected wires are securely fastened gt To make connections after the terminal module is separated 1 Loosen the screws at two sides of the terminal module Note The two screws are not removable so just loosen them 3 Strip the insulation around 12mm from the end of each wire of discrete detectors switches zie Raritan i Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 4 Fully insert each wire of both detectors switche
441. r failure notification Click OK to save the changes The system inserts the rule and automatically renumbers the following rules zie Raritan 132 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 5 When finished the rules appear in the Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog X JP Configure IP Access Control Settings Enable IPv4 Access Control Default Policy 1 192 168 80 80 32 2 192255255 255 24 3 192 155 123 123 32 Append Insert Edii Delete 0K Cancel 6 Click OK to save the changes The rules are applied Editing Firewall Rules When an existing firewall rule requires updates of IP address range and or policy modify them accordingly gt To modify a firewall rule 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 To modify the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To modify the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab Select the rule to be modified in the rules list Click Edit or double click the rule The Edit Rule dialog appears Make changes to the information shown No o oe s Click OK to save the changes Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 8 Click OK to quit the Configure IP Access Cont
442. r or other asset management code in the External Key field Optional Enter data in Custom Field 1 and Custom Field 2 Optional The labels may have been changed in Power IQ to identify these fields If the PDU is a Raritan PX enter a valid Username and Password for the PDU in the PDU Administrative Credentials section Re enter the password in the Password Confirm field Select the SNMP Version For SNMP version 1 2c PDUs enter an SNMP Community String that has at least READ permissions to this PDU This enables polling the PDU for data Enter an SNMP community string that has both READ and WRITE permissions to the PDU to enable power control outlet renaming and buffered data retrieval For SNMP version 3 PDUs enter the Username and select an Authorization Level The authorization levels are noAuthNoPriv No Authentication Passkey No Encoding Passkey authNoPriv Authentication Passkey No Encoding Passkey authPriv Authentication Passkey Encoding Passkey a Depending on the Authorization Level selected you must enter additional credentials for Authorization and Privacy b Authorization Protocol Select MD5 or SHA c Enterthe PDU s Authorization Passkey then re enter the passkey in the Authorization Passkey Confirm field d Privacy Protocol Select DES or AES e Enter the PDU s Privacy Passkey then re enter the passkey in the Privacy Passkey Confirm field Note You must enable the SNMP agent on
443. rackUnits The height of the Z coordinate is measured in standard rack units When this is selected you can type a numeric value in the rack unit to describe the Z coordinate of any environmental sensors SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description freeForm Any alphanumeric string can be used for specifying the Z coordinate Note After determining the format for the Z coordinate you can set a value for it See Setting the Z Coordinate on page 373 Example The following command determines that the unit of rack is used for specifying the Z coordinate of environmental sensors config pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat rackUnits Changing the LED Display Orientation This command syntax determines the orientation of the alphanumeric values shown on the LED display of a Zero U PDU config pdu displayOrientation lt orientation gt Variables e orientation is one of the options automatic flipped or normal Option Description automatic The direction of the values shown on the LED display is determined depending on the PDU s orientation detected by the built in tilt sensor flipped The values shown on the LED display always stay in the opposite direction regardless of the PDU s orientation normal The values shown on the LED display always stay in the normal direction regardless of the PDU s orientation Note that this command is NOT applicable to a non Zero U PDU zie R
444. raffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Example The following command modifies all contents of the 8th IPv4 rule config f security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule modify 8 startIpAddress 192 168 8 8 endIpAddress 192 168 90 90 role operator policy allow Results e The starting IPv4 address is changed to 192 168 8 8 and the ending IPv4 address to 192 168 90 90 e The role is changed to operator e The policy now becomes allow zie Raritan m Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Deleting a Role Based Access Control Rule This command removes a specific rule from the list e Pv4 commands config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule delete lt rule_number gt e Pv6 commands config security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule delete rule number Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to remove Example The following command removes the 7th IPv6 rule config f security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule delete 7 Outlet Configuration Commands An outlet configuration command begins with outlet Such a command allows you to configure an individual outlet Changing the Outlet Name This command syntax names an outlet config f outlet n name name Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable char
445. reating a User Profile on page 120 Creating a Role Create a new role when you need a new combination of permissions 1 To create a role Choose User Management gt Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Click New The Create New Role dialog appears Type the role s name in the Role Name field Type a description for the role in the Description field 125 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 5 Click the Privileges tab to assign one or multiple permissions a Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears b Select the permission you want from the Privileges list c Ifthe permission you selected contains any argument setting the Arguments list is shown to the right Then select one or multiple arguments For example if the Switch Outlet permission is selected the Arguments list shows all outlets for you to determine which outlets this role can control Select the desired outlets checkboxes or select the checkbox labeled all if you want to select all outlets d Click Add to add the selected permission and arguments if any e Repeat Steps ato d until you add all necessary permissions 6 Click OK to save the changes Now you can assign the new role to any users See Creating a User Profile on page 120 or Modifying a User Profile on page 123 Modifying a Role
446. rect sensor type e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified environmental sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 178 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 4 to 2 degrees Celsius That is the temperature must drop by at least 2 degrees Celsius below the upper threshold or rise by at least 2 degrees Celsius above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config sensor externalsensor 4 temperature hysteresis 2 Setting the Sensor s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of a numeric environmental sensor 403 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor externalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified s
447. ree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click the Feature Port folder The Feature Port page opens in the right pane showing the connected LHX device information Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Viewing Details An LHX heat exchanger page shows detailed information including Device information and settings The air outlet temperature The default fan speed Readings and states of all LHX built in sensors Alerts and errors such as failed LHX sensors or emergency cooling activation Accumulative operating hours To view details of a specific LHX heat exchanger If the Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder Click the LHX icon in the left pane The LHX page opens in the right pane Tip The same LHX page can be also opened by clicking Feature Port in the left pane and then double clicking the LHX in the right pane If any LHX sensor reading reaches or crosses the critical or warning threshold that sensor reading row is highlighted in red or yellow See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 89 Device States and Icon Variations The PX web interface changes icons to represent different statuses of the connected LHX heat exchanger Icons Device status S amp 69 zie Raritan The heat exchanger is turned ON and o
448. rface 382 Setting the Inlet s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Warning threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current to 12A It also enables the upper warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inlet 1 current upperWarning 12 S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Inter
449. rface Event types Radio buttons Network interface Available radio buttons include Link state is up link state Link state is down and Both Link state is up The PX takes the action only when the network link state changes from down to up Link state is down The PX takes the action only when the network link state changes from up to down Both The PX takes the action whenever the network link state changes Function enabled or Available radio buttons include Enabled disabled Disabled and Both Enabled The PX takes the action only when the chosen function is enabled Disabled The PX takes the action only when the chosen function is disabled Both The PX takes the action when the chosen function is either enabled or disabled User logon state Available radio buttons include Logged in Logged out and Both Logged in The PX takes the action only when the selected user logs in Logged out The PX takes the action only when the selected user logs out Both The PX takes the action both when the selected user logs in and logs out Server monitoring Available radio buttons include Monitoring event started Monitoring stopped and Both Monitoring started The PX takes the action only when the monitoring of any specified server starts Monitoring stopped The PX takes the action only when the monitoring of any specified server stops Both The PX takes the acti
450. rk cable its wired Ethernet interface is automatically disabled e None of the devices in the chain has wireless connectivity Important Only PX devices whose model names begin with PX2 support the USB cascading function For more information on the USB cascading configuration see the USB Cascading Solution User Guide which is available on the PX2 web page http www raritan com support dominion px2 of the Raritan website gt To cascade the PX devices via USB 1 Verify that the PX devices to be cascaded are running the following firmware version by choosing Maintenance Device Information in the web interface or using CLI s show pdu command If not upgrade these devices See Updating the PX Firmware on page 258 Raritan PX version 2 3 1 or later 2 Select one of the four devices as the master device and connect this device to the LAN via a standard Category 5e 6 UTP cable 3 Connect the USB A port of the master device to the USB B port of an additional PX via a USB cable This additional device is Slave 1 Do not connect Slave 1 to the LAN 4 Connect Slave 1 s USB A port to the USB B port of an additional PX via a USB cable The second additional device is Slave 2 Do not connect Slave 2 to the LAN 5 Connect Slave 2 s USB A port to the USB B port of another PX via a USB cable The final additional device is Slave 3 29 30 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Do not connect Slave 3 to the
451. rmally Open the alarmed state means the contact closure switch is closed For a Raritan s floor water sensor the normal state must be set to Normally Closed which means no water is detected The alarmed state indicates that the presence of water is detected Note See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 41 for information on setting the normal state or dip switch Tip A contact closure sensor s LED is lit after entering the alarmed state If the sensor module has two channels for connecting two switches two LEDs are available Check which contact closure switch is in the abnormal status according to the channel number of the LED below lower critical State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is below the lower critical threshold as indicated below Reading Lower Critical Threshold below lower warning State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is below the lower warning threshold as indicated below Lower Critical Threshold lt Reading Lower Warning Threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than or equal to above upper warning State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is above the upper warning threshold as indicated below Upper Warning Threshold Reading Upper Critical Threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than or equal to above upper critical State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is above the upper critical thr
452. rmation show inlets lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show inlets lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all inlets Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific inlet Displays the information for the specified inlet only pumoer An inlet number needs to be specified only when there are more than 1 inlet on your PDU Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the inlet s RMS current value s and inlet name are displayed e With the parameter details more inlet information is displayed in addition to the RMS current values such as the inlet s RMS current voltage and active power zie Raritan 2d Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 284 Circuit Breaker Information This command is only available for PDUs with overcurrent protection mechanism implemented This command syntax shows the circuit breaker information show ocp lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show ocp lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all circuit breakers Tip You can also type the command witho
453. rol Settings dialog or the changes are lost Sorting Firewall Rules The rule order determines which one of the rules matching the same IP address is performed gt To sort the firewall rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Tosort the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To sort the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab 4 Select a specific rule by clicking it 5 Click or to move the selected rule up or down until it reaches the desired location 6 Click OK to save the changes Deleting Firewall Rules When any firewall rules become obsolete or unnecessary remove them from the rules list gt To delete a firewall rule 1 Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Todelete the IPv4 firewall rules click the IPv4 tab To delete the IPv6 firewall rules click the IPv6 tab 3 Ensure the Enable IPv4 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv4 tab or the Enable IPv6 Access Control checkbox is selected on the IPv6 tab 4 Select the rule that you want to delete To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears
454. rols whether the password should be changed at a regular interval config security loginLimits passwordAging lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the password aging feature disable Disables the password aging feature Example The following command enables the password aging feature config security loginLimits passwordAging enable 353 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Password Aging Interval This command syntax determines how often the password should be changed config security loginLimits passwordAgingInterval lt value gt Variables e value is a numeric value in days set for the password aging interval The interval ranges from 7 to 365 days Example The following command sets the password again interval to 90 days config security loginLimits passwordAgingInterval 90 Idle Timeout This command syntax determines how long a user can remain idle before that user is forced to log out of the PX web interface config security loginLimits idleTimeout lt value gt Variables e value is a numeric value in minutes set for the idle timeout The timeout ranges from 1 to 1440 minutes 24 hours Example The following command sets the idle timeout to 10 minutes config security loginLimits idleTimeout 10 User Blocking There are different commands for changing different user blocki
455. rom host USERIP was blocked Session of user USERNAME from host USERIP timed out PX placed in Load Shedding Mode by user USERNAME from host USERIPJ Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET unavailable Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET asserted above upper critical Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET asserted above upper warning Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET asserted below lower warning Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET asserted below lower critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLET of inlet INLET unavailable Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLETJ of inlet INLET asserted above upper critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLET of inlet INLET Default Assertion Message when the Event FALSE User USERNAME from host USERIP logged out User USERNAME from host FUSERIP declined the Restricted Service Agreement PX removed from Load Shedding Mode by user USERNAME from host USERIP Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET available Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET deasserted above upper critical Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET deasserted above upper warning Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET deasserted below lower warning Sensor INLETSENSOR on inlet INLET deasserted below lower Critical Sensor POLESENSOR on pole INLETPOLE J
456. rs The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example This command syntax names or changes the name of an asset sensor connected to the PX device config assetStrip 1 name Red Rack Specifying the Number of Rack Units This command syntax specifies the total number of rack units on an asset sensor connected to the PX device config assetStrip lt n gt numberOfRackUnits lt number gt Note For the Raritan asset sensor a rack unit refers to a tag port Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port the number is always 1 e number is the total number of rack units available on the connected asset sensor This value ranges from 8 to 64 S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command specifies the total number of rack units on the asset sensor 1 to 48 rack units config assetStrip 1 numberOfRackUnits 48 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Mode This command syntax specifies the numbering mode of rack units on the asset sensors connected to the PX device The numbering mode changes the rack unit numbers config assetStrip lt n gt rackUnitNumberingMode lt mode gt Variables e n is the number of the FEATURE port where the selected asset sensor is physically connected For the PX device with only one FEATURE port t
457. rs include but are not limited to network throughput firmware file size and speed at which the firmware is retrieved from the storage location Internal factors include the necessity of upgrading the firmware on the microcontroller and the number of microcontrollers that require upgrade which depends on the number of outlets The microcontroller is upgraded only when required Therefore the length of firmware upgrade time ranges from approximately 3 minutes without any microcontroller updated to almost 7 minutes with all microcontrollers for 48 outlets updated Take the above factors into account when estimating the PDU s firmware upgrade time The time indicated in this note is for web interface based upgrades Upgrades through other management systems such as Raritan s Power IQ may take additional time beyond the control of the PDU itself This note does not address the upgrades using other management systems zie Raritan ii Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Viewing Firmware Update History The firmware upgrade history if available is permanently stored on the PX device This history indicates when a firmware upgrade event occurred the prior and new versions associated with the firmware upgrade event and the upgrade result gt To view the firmware update history 1 Choose Maintenance gt View Firmware Update History The Firmware Update History dialog appears with the following information displayed D
458. ry and death WARNING Do not rely on this product s receptacle lamps receptacle relay switches or any other receptacle power on off indicator to determine whether power is being supplied to a receptacle Unplug a device connected to this product before performing repair maintenance or service on the device Failure to unplug a device before servicing it may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Only use this product to power information technology equipment that has a UL IEC 60950 1 or equivalent rating Attempting to power non rated devices may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Do not use a Raritan product containing outlet relays to power large inductive loads such as motors or compressors Attempting to power a large inductive load may result in damage to the relay WARNING Do not use this product to power critical patient care equipment fire or smoke alarm systems Use of this product to power such equipment may result in personal injury and death WARNING If this product is a model that requires assembly of its line cord or plug all such assembly must be performed by a licensed electrician and the line cord or plugs used must be suitably rated based on the product s nameplate ratings and national and local electrical codes Assembly by unlicensed electricians or failure to use suitably rated line cords or plugs may result in electric shock fire personal injury or death
459. s min minute s h hour s To make the outlet s power off period identical to the PDU defined setting select the PDU defined option See Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period on page 162 Tip The information in parentheses following the option PDU defined indicates the current PDU defined selection You can also type a value if the desired time is not listed For example type 15 s if you want a 15 second delay 5 Click OK to save the changes 163 164 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting the Initialization Delay This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs The outlet initialization delay determines how long the PX device waits before providing power to all outlets during power cycling or after recovering from a temporary power loss This is useful in cases where power may not initially be stable after being restored or when UPS batteries may be charging gt 1 4 To set the initialization delay for all outlets Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Outlet initialization delay on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is 1 second to 1 hour Time units in the list are explained below S second s mi
460. s 1 12 8 s Inrush guard delay 200 ms Voltage rating 200 2404 Current rating 16A Frequency rating 90 68Hz Power rating 3 2 3 8kVR Sensor data retrieval Enabled Measurements per log entry 60 External sensor Z coordinate format Rack units Device altitude m Clearing Information You can use the clear commands to remove unnecessary data from the PX After typing a clear command press Enter to execute it Note Depending on your login name the prompt may be replaced by the gt prompt See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 Clearing Event Log This command removes all data from the event log clear eventlog After entering the above command a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Type y to clear the event log or n to abort the operation If you type y a message Event log was cleared successfully is displayed after all data in the event log is deleted Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Configuring the PX Device and Network To configure the PX device or network settings through the CLI you must log in as the administrator Entering the Configuration Mode You must enter the configuration mode since configuration commands function in the configuration mode only gt To enter the configuration mode 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed Note If you enter the configuration mode from t
461. s a user connected from The user who triggered an action The firmware version the device is upgrading to The wire sensor name The wire label Sample Event Rules Sample PDU Level Event Rule In this example we want the PX to record the firmware upgrade failure in the internal log when it happens The sample event rule looks like this e Event Device gt Firmware update failed e Actions System Event Log Action gt To create the above event rule 1 Select Event Device to indicate we are specifying an event at the PDU level 2 Select Firmware update failed in the submenu because we want PX to respond to the event related to firmware upgrade failure 3 Select System Event Log Action as we intend to record the firmware update failure event in the internal log Sample Outlet Level Event Rule In this example we want the PX to send SNMP notifications to the SNMP manager for any sensor change event of outlet 3 Note The SNMP notifications may be SNMP v2c or SNMP v3 traps or informs depending on the settings for the System SNMP Notification Action See Configuring SNMP Notifications on page 265 To do that we would set up an event rule like this e Event Outlet gt Outlet 3 gt Sensor gt Any sub event e Actions System SNMP Notification Action gt To create the above event rule 1 Select Event gt Outlet to indicate we are specifying an event at the outlet level SE Raritan Raritan
462. s Chapter Panel Gombponents reete texte dede cadens canine ede Dee uam Razer cd 61 Circuit Breakers eie tt e iuto ep eire ea agde 71 arcem EA 73 BOCD OF fase m m 76 Panel Components zie Raritan The PX comes in Zero U 1U and 2U sizes All types of models come with the following components on the outer panels e Power cord e Outlets e Connection ports e LED display e Reset button Power Cord Most of Raritan PDUs come with an installed power cord which is ready to be plugged into an appropriate receptacle for receiving electricity Such devices cannot be rewired by the user Connect each PX device to an appropriately rated branch circuit See the label or nameplate affixed to your PX device for appropriate input ratings or range of ratings There is no power switch on the PX device To power cycle the PDU unplug it from the branch circuit wait 10 seconds and then plug it back in Outlets The total number of outlets varies from model to model PX2 3000 Series These PDUs are NOT outlet switching capable models so all outlets are always in the ON state Outlet LEDs are not available 61 Chapter 5 Using the PDU LED state Not lit Red Red flashing Green Green flashing Red and Green flashing alternatively Cycling through Red Green and Yellow 62 PX2 4000 Series These PDUs are NOT outlet switching capable models so all outlets are always in the ON st
463. s command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv4 rule add lt start_ip gt lt end_ip gt lt role gt lt policy gt lt insert gt lt rule_number gt e Pv6 commands gt To add anew rule to the bottom of the IPv6 rules list use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule add start ip end ip role policy gt To add a new IPv6 rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use this command syntax security roleBasedAccessControl ipv6 rule add start ip end ip role policy insert rule number Variables e cslart ip is the starting IP address e end ip is the ending IP address e role is the role for which you want to create an access control rule e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Policy Description deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role e insert is one of the options insertAbove or insertBelow Option Description insertAbove Inserts the new rule above the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number insertBelow Inserts the new rule below the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number 1 e rule nu
464. s into each termination point Plug both wires of a detector switch into the two termination points to the left Plug both wires of the other detector switch into the two termination points to the right 5 Use an appropriate screw driver to tighten the screws above each termination point until the connected wires are securely fastened 6 7 E Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 7 Tighten the screws at two sides of the terminal module to secure it onto the contact closure sensor Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor Before using DPX CC2 TR to detect the contact closure status water smoke or vibration you must determine the normal state by adjusting its dip switch which controls the LED state on the body of DPX CC2 TR A dip switch is associated with a channel gt To adjust the dip switch setting 1 Place the detectors switches connected to DPX CC2 TR to the position where you want to detect a specific environmental situation 2 Uncover the dip switch on the body of DPX CC2 TR Old DPX CC2 TR 3 Toset the Normal state for channel 1 locate the dip switch labeled 1 4 Use a pointed tip such as a pen to move the slide switch to the end labeled N O or N C zie Raritan i Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment N O Normally Open The open status of the connected detector switch is considered normal This is the default N C Normally Closed The closed status of t
465. s that a smoke detector is being connected to Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR whose ID number shown in the PX web interface is 2 config f externalsensor 2 sensorSubType smokeDetection zie Raritan ui 372 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the X Coordinate This command syntax specifies the X coordinate of an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt xlabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command sets the value The 2nd cabinet to the X coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 xlabel The 2nd cabinet Setting the Y Coordinate This command syntax specifies the Y coordinate of an environmental sensor config f externalsensor n ylabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command sets the value The 4th row
466. sControl ipv6 enabled option gt To determine the default IPv6 firewall control policy use this command syntax config f security ipAccessControl ipv6 defaultPolicy policy Variables 344 option is one of the options true or false tue Enables the IP access control feature fase Disables the IP access control feature lt policy gt is one of the options accept drop or reject Accepts traffic from all IP addresses Discards traffic from all IP addresses without sending any failure notification to the source host Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description reject Discards traffic from all IP addresses and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Tip You can combine both commands to modify all firewall control parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 435 Example The following command sets up two parameters of the IPv4 access control feature config security ipAccessControl ipv4 enabled true defaultPolicy accept Results e The IPv4 access control feature is enabled e The default policy is set to accept Managing Firewall Rules You can add delete or modify firewall rules using the CLI commands e An IPv4 firewall control rule command begins with security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule e An Pv6 firewall control rule command begins with security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule Adding a Firewall Rule
467. sage from the collected data You can use the RF Code Sensor Manager to manage the power data using e Live table views e Map views e Interactive graphing and reporting e Scheduled graphing and reporting e Alerting and thresholding 495 Appendix F Additional PX Information In This Chapter MAG AJIO S ceee enin nra tC UR red ae Di aped cu UR mbar Tua god Cu aged CEA RR ef 496 Locking Outlets and Cords 2 red e insides 496 Altitude Correction Factors vic iiie iid coe ius cepe Md ed nte Feb ke Enc ta esters 499 Data for BTU Calculation iiie ia card erben Erbe red rond 499 Raritan Training Website iie eite chen d cen cba rna dade 500 CL Command Applicability siiis 500 Truncated Data in the Web Interface sssssesesess 504 Reserving IP Addresses in Windows DHCP Servers 504 MAC Address A label is affixed to a PX device showing both the serial number and MAC address of the PDU TENER VELIM MITTIT PXLO600001 If necessary you can find the PDU s IP address through the MAC address by using commonly used network tools Contact your LAN administrator for assistance Locking Outlets and Cords In addition to the cable retention clips Raritan also provides other approaches to secure the connection of the power cords from your IT equipment to the Raritan PDUS including e SecureLock outlets and cords e Button type locking outlets Note that NOT all Raritan
468. sasaesesecesea 269 The PXMIB ust eee EL LL ei A e Les 270 Retrieving Energy Usage ceat sueedes tenen idee ert ni siu i doen deep cud un SM denn 272 A Note about Enabling Thresholds ssssssss eene 272 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 273 About the Interface iride cientes te exxsdasnaeccereseldeha e e a Rho daceuseds a ERR DER Deae RS 273 Logging imt CLM er Et 274 With ep tiaara ana anana beai kasaa aa daanin aasan 274 With SSH OF T6lN Gt Avcccstssinccadesanccinacavecdvadanetanastnatdbetsanleibeanavesnvatereitearetacncsies Ai eid a Fa pa wea taa 275 Different CLI Modes and Prompts reiten etr teh le t nana oc ee atas 276 Closing a Local Gonnectlon iori cea ure duse Reden nea ye acu Fa a n a TE 276 Help Commandes 277 Querying Available Parameters for a Command c ccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeceeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseaes 278 SHOWING ITONMARIOM Ec 279 Network COMfIGUIATION fic sestentcasecdivestg racer eR ee tt e sra er uae Ce ven rm Ru vena Pa Een 279 isle E ERa 281 Outlet ltermauo irem tu vec ateana dan eene e e CE epit er tr re Peccavi FEE eee Fee CHA er aineet 282 Inlet InfofmialiOricussca seeen enana aid ta rapa tox da ave kd xa Fa vL ravi v nva va v Ea va x tar 283 Circuit Breaker THfOBRletlOlle c6 ecd coetu ecce ea connec tune emeret atenta er eet ee Dee sa n etse EEEE RREN 284 Date and Time Settings 2 iet eee t edet ter dove e e Reti ieai saaa
469. se from the PDU s fuse carrier using a flat screwdriver a Rotate the fuse knob counterclockwise until its slot is inclined to 45 degrees b Take this knob out of the fuse carrier 3 Remove the original fuse from this knob and insert either end of a new one into the knob Make sure the new fuse s rating is the same as the original one 7 i W Number Description 1 Fuse knob e Fuse 4 Install this knob along with the new fuse into the fuse carrier using a flat screwdriver a Have this knob s slot inclined 45 degrees when inserting the knob into the fuse carrier N N b Gently push this knob into the fuse carrier and then rotate it clockwise until its slot is horizontal zie Raritan i 76 Chapter 5 Using the PDU Beeper 5 Verify whether this knob s head is aligned with the fuse carrier If its head is higher or lower than the fuse carrier re install it o e Number Description 1 INAPPROPRIATE installations e Appropriate installation 6 Connect the PDU s power cord to the power source and verify that the corresponding fuse LED is lit indicating that the fuse works properly The PX includes a beeper to issue an audible alarm when a significant situation occurs e The beeper sounds an alarm within 3 seconds of a circuit breaker trip e The beeper stops as soon as all circuit breakers have been reset S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface This chapter explains
470. self signed certificate file A certificate file is required after enabling this option Server Certificate Consult your authentication server administrator to get the CA certificate file for the LDAP LDAPS server Use the Browse button to navigate to the certificate file This file is required when the Use only trusted LDAP Server Certificates checkbox is selected Tip You can first upload the CA certificate file for a future use before selecting the Use only trusted LDAP Server Certificates checkbox and then select the checkbox when you need to utilize the certificate file Anonymous Bind For OpenLDAP use this checkbox to enable or disable anonymous bind To use anonymous bind select this checkbox When a Bind DN and password are required to bind to the external LDAP LDAPS server deselect this checkbox Use Bind Credentials For Microsoft Active Directory use this checkbox to enable or disable anonymous bind To use anonymous bind deselect this checkbox By default it is deselected When a Bind DN and password are required to bind to the external LDAP LDAPS server select this checkbox Bind DN Specify the DN of the user who is permitted to search the LDAP directory in the defined search base This information is required only when the Use Bind Credentials checkbox is selected Bind Password and Confirm Bind Password Enter the Bind password in the Bind Password field first and t
471. sensor remains associated with it The Raritan PX continues to ping unavailable sensors and moves out of the unavailable state after detecting the sensor for two consecutive scans normal State This state indicates the sensor is in the normal state For a contact closure sensor usually this state is the normal state you have set e fthe normal state is set to Normally Closed the normal state means the contact closure switch is closed e lf the normal state is set to Normally Open the normal state means the contact closure switch is open For a Raritan s floor water sensor the normal state must be set to Normally Closed which means no water is detected Note See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 41 for information on setting the normal state or dip switch For a numeric sensor this state means the sensor reading is within the acceptable range as indicated below Lower Warning threshold lt Reading Upper Warning threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than lt or equal to T sis Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface alarmed State This state means a discrete on off sensor is in the abnormal state Usually for a contact closure sensor the meaning of this state varies based on the sensor s normal state setting e If the normal state is set to Normally Closed the alarmed state means the contact closure switch is open e lf the normal state is set to No
472. sensor type is the sensor s type S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Tip You can also trigger the same setup dialog by selecting the desired environmental sensor icon in the tree and then clicking Setup on that sensor s page opened in the right pane If the selected environmental sensor is the Raritan contact closure sensor connected with a third party detector switch select the appropriate sensor type in the Binary Sensor Subtype field Contact The detector switch is designed to detect the door lock or door open closed status Smoke Detection The detector switch is designed to detect the appearance of smoke Water Detection The detector switch is designed to detect the appearance of water on the floor Vibration The detector switch is designed to detect the vibration in the floor Type a new name in the Name field Describe the sensor s location by assigning alphanumeric values to the X Y and Z coordinates See Describing the Sensor Location on page 227 Note When the term Rack Units appears inside the parentheses in the Z location field indicating that the Z coordinate format is set to Rack Units you must type an integer number If the selected environmental sensor is a numeric sensor its threshold settings are displayed in the dialog Click Edit or double click the Threshold Configuration table to adjust the threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout sett
473. sensors are automatically attracted to the rack because of magnetic stripes on the back Note The asset sensor is implemented with a tilt sensor so it can be mounted upside down S Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting Asset Sensors to the PX You need both asset sensors and asset tags for tracking devices Asset tags which are adhered to devices provide an ID number for each device while the asset sensors transmit ID numbers and positioning information to the connected PX device The following diagram illustrates an asset tag Letter Item Q Barcode ID number which is available on either end of the asset tag Q Tag connector Q Adhesive area with the tape Note The barcode of each asset tag is unique and is displayed in the PX web interface so it can easily be identified gt To connect asset sensors to the PX device 1 Affix the adhesive end of an asset tag to each IT device through the tag s tape 2 Plug the connector on the other end of each asset tag into the corresponding tag port on the asset sensor 3 Connect the asset sensor assembly on the rack to the PX device a Connect one end of the Category 5e 6 cable to the RJ 45 connector on the MASTER asset sensor b Connect the other end of the cable to the FEATURE port on the PX device zie Raritan i 50 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment The PX device supplies power to the asset sensor assembly through
474. ser Management contains menu items for managing user profiles permissions roles and password e Device Settings deals with device related settings such as the device name network settings security settings and system time e Maintenance provides tools that are helpful for maintaining the PX such as the event log hardware information firmware upgrade and so on e Help displays information regarding the firmware and all open source packages embedded on the PX In addition you can access the user guide from this menu Dominion PX Explorer Pane The hierarchical tree to the left displays the PX device you are accessing as well as all physical components embedded on or connected to this PDU such as inlets outlets and environmental sensors In addition an icon named Dashboard is available for displaying the PDU summary information The tree structure comprises three hierarchical levels First level Second level Third level Dashboard None None PDU folder Inlet 11 None Outlets folder 1 to n Overcurrent Protectors folder C1 to Cn External Sensors folder A list of connected S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface First level Second level Third level environmental sensors Feature Port folder One of the following is displayed depending on your configuration Webcam Management folder None Asset Strip Power CIM LHX 20 LHX 40 Snapshots Webcam The PDU folder is named my
475. ser names referred to as lt Any user 5 If radio buttons are available you may select a radio button other than the current selection to change the rule triggering condition 6 Tochange the action s do any of the following in the Actions field To add any action select it from the Available actions list box and click the Add button To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To add all actions at a time click the Add All button To remove any action select it from the Selected actions list box and click the Remove button to move it back to the Available actions list box To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To remove all actions at a time simply click the Remove All button e To create a new action click Create New Action The newly created action will be moved into the Selected actions list box once it is created See Creating Actions on page 181 for information on creating an action 7 Click Save to save the changes Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort or Cancel to return to the current settings page 213 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 8 Click Close to quit the dialog Modifying an Action An existing action can be changed so that all event rules where this actio
476. shvailable neasuremnentsInletPoleSensorState neasurenentsInletPoleSensorUalue neasurerentsInletPoleSensorTineStamp neasurenents utletSensorIsnuailaobie neasurenentsQutletSensorState measurements utletSensortalue neasurenents utletSensorTimeStamp neasurements utletPoleSensorIsfivailable mneasurenentsQutletPoleSensorState mneasurenentsQutletPoleSensorUalue measurenentstutletPoleSensorTineStarp neasurenentsOverCurrentProtectorsensor shvailable neasurenents verCurrentProtectorSensorState neasurenentsOverCurrentProtectorSensorvalue neasurenents verCurrentProtectorSensorTimeStamp neasurenentsExCernalSensorIsnveailable neasurenentsExternalSensorState neasurenentsExternalSensorUalue measurerentsExternalSensorTineStanp STATUS current DESCRIPTION A collection of objects providing the Logging capabilities about the pdu For example the measurementsGroup group contains objects for sensor readings of PX as a whole One object listed under this group measurementsUnitSensorValue is described later in the MIB as The sensor value pduRatedCurrent part of the configGroup group describes the PDU current rating SNMP Sets and Thresholds Some objects can be configured from the SNMP manager using SNMP set commands Objects that can be configured have a MAX ACCESS level of read write in the MIB These objects include threshold objects which causes the PX to generate a warning and send an SNMP notification wh
477. sions The Operator role provides limited permissions for frequently used functions See Setting Up Roles on page 125 for the scope of permissions This role is selected by default f no roles meet your needs you can Modify the permissions of an existing role To modify the permissions of any role double click the role or highlight it and then click Edit Role See Modifying a Role on page 126 Create a new role by clicking the Manage Roles button See Creating a Role on page 125 Note With multiple roles selected a user has the union of all roles permissions To change any measurement units displayed in the web interface and command line interface for this new user click the Preferences tab and do any of the following nthe Temperature Unit field select C Celsius or F Fahrenheit as the measurement unit for temperatures SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface In the Length Unit field select Meter or Feet as the measurement unit for length or height In the Pressure Unit field select Pascal or psi as the measurement unit for pressure A Pascal is equal to one newton per square meter Psi stands for pounds per square inch Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface Users can change the measurement units at any time by setting up their own user preferences See Setting Up Your Preferred Measuremen
478. so it is strongly recommended that you should adjust the ping settings to meet your own needs Tip To make the PX automatically log send notifications or perform other actions for any server accessibility or inaccessibility events you can create event rules associated with server monitoring See Event Rules and Actions on page 180 gt To add IT equipment for ping monitoring 1 Choose Device Settings gt Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Click New The Add New Server dialog appears By default the Enable Ping Monitoring for this Server checkbox is selected If not select it to enable the ping monitoring feature 4 Provide the information required 217 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Field Description IP Address Hostname IP address or host name of the IT equipment whose accessibility you want to monitor Number of Successful The number of successful pings required to Pings to Enable declare that the monitored equipment is Feature Reachable Valid range is 0 to 200 Wait Time in The wait time before sending the next ping if seconds after the previous ping was successfully Successful Ping responded Valid range is 5 to 600 seconds Wait Time in The wait time before sending the next ping if seconds after the previous ping was not responded Valid Unsuccessful Ping range is 3 to 600 seconds Number of The number of consecutive pings without Consecutive any response before
479. sor state Not lit No water detected Lit Water detected Floor Water Sensors Raritan has two types of floor water sensors that can work in conjunction with Raritan s contact closure sensor One is the floor mounted water sensor and the other is the cable water sensor e Floor mounted water sensor DPX WSF This detector has a flat bottom so it can stand on the ground The dimension of the detector is 63 5 mm x 13 25 mm x 13 2 mm WxL x D Use either of the following ways to affix this detector onto the ground 43 44 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Screw up the detector against the ground with your own screws Do not over tighten the screws to avoid breaking the enclosure of the detector Put something weighing around 100 through 250 grams into the empty bag shipped with this water sensor Then use cable ties to wrap the bag right above the detector Make sure the detector is not tilted so that its bottom evenly contacts the ground e Number Item 1 Water detector eo Wires to connect to Raritan s contact closure sensor You need a minimum of 30 cm wires to prevent the contact closure sensor from being damaged by floor water if any Below are the wire length limitations e Minimum 30 cm e Maximum 150 cm SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment e Cable water sensor DPX WSC series This detector is in the shape of a cable so it can be flexibly placed tw
480. ssseseeeene 472 Step D Configure User Groups on the PX Dewvice sssssssssseseeeeeerenenn nennen 474 Appendix E Integration 478 Power IQ Configuratio visa er 478 Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management sse nennen nennen 478 Dominion KX Comtiguration EROR M S 480 Configuring Rack PDU Power Strip Targets 480 Dominion KSX Il or SX GohflgU EallOn u coro roit oriri ta eor tertie ete rv esent epeeeetee a bean 484 DomMONKSX PETRI 484 DOR Ol SX E Dena Qnae prehabita i E rr 489 S Raritan Contents OG TACK cR 492 Oc Track qeu EE 493 Adding the Raritan PX to dcTrack Management ssssseeeeenees 493 RF Code Energy Monitoring SOUR ico tret cet tene eve e edet sn he hate 495 Appendix F Additional PX Information 496 MAG Addi 665 2 6n ba ce acacia coho hae inet idest iet tene s tas aa EORR a EEEa aree hess 496 Locking Outlets and Gords iieri odi sequi macies dun d nd tung dun nd mH ka sg edu a nna deg tuc da oa 496 SecureLock M Outlets and Cords ccccccccesessececececeesesneaeceeeceececseseaaeceeeeeeseseeeaeeeeeeseeenes 497 Button Type Locking Outlets esses enne nnne nnne 498 Altit de Correction Factors ciii don rena rete tu radere ied inr nad ddp sc Mdh Cre un a can inanan 499 Data for BTU CAlCulaton eR cS 499 Raritan Training WebSite iiec ccd c
481. stem SNMP Notification Rule is enabled and the SNMP destination has not been set yet See Event Rules and Actions on page 180 gt To configure the SNMP communication 1 Choose Device Settings Network Services SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings xl General Notifications SNMP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 v2c F enable Read Community String pubic Write Community String SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 enable MIB II System Group sysContact i sys Name sysLocation Download MB OK Cancel 2 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v1 v2c field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v1 or v2c protocol Type the SNMP read only community string in the Read Community String field Usually the string is public Type the read write community string in the Write Community String field Usually the string is private 3 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v3 field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v3 protocol Tip You can permit or disallow a user to access the PX via the SNMP v3 protocol See Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 on page 264 107 108 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 4 Enter the MIB II system group information if applicable a sysContact the contact person in charge of the system being contacted b sysName the name assigned to the system C SysLocation
482. system prompt in the CLI varies e User Mode When you log in as a normal user who may not have full permissions to configure the PX device the prompt appears e Administrator Mode When you log in as an administrator who has full permissions to configure the PX device the prompt appears e Configuration Mode You can enter the configuration mode from the administrator or user mode In this mode the prompt changes to config or config and you can change PX device and network configurations See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 305 e Diagnostic Mode You can enter the diagnostic mode from the administrator or user mode In this mode the prompt changes to diag or diag gt and you can perform the network troubleshooting commands such as the ping command See Entering the Diagnostic Mode on page 443 Closing a Local Connection Close the window or terminal emulation program when you finish accessing a PX device over the local connection When accessing or upgrading multiple PX devices do not transfer the local connection cable from one device to another without closing the local connection window first id SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Help Command The help command shows a list of main CLI commands available for the current mode This is helpful when you are not familiar with the CLI commands gt The help command syntax under the administrator mode is 4 gt
483. t Power On Sequence This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs By default the outlets are sequentially powered on in ascending order from outlet 1 to the highest numbered outlet when turning ON or power cycling all outlets on the PX device You can change the order in which the outlets power ON This is useful when there is a specific order in which the connected IT equipment should be powered up gt To set the outlet power on sequence 1 Trigger the Outlet Sequence Setup dialog by doing either of the following Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Click Sequence Setup 165 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click the PDU folder and then the Setup button in the Outlet Sequence section Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 The Outlet Sequence Setup dialog appears with the current power up sequence indicated by the outlet order in the list 2 Tochange the priority of an outlet select it from the list and click one of the following buttons Moves the outlet to the top of the list making it the first outlet to receive power 2 Moves the outlet up one position in the list 9 Moves the outlet down one position in the list x Moves the outlet to the bottom of the list making it the final outlet to receive power amp Restores the list t
484. t Units on page 124 Modifying a User Profile You can change any user profile s information except for the user name 1 To modify a user profile Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears Select the user by clicking it Click Edit or double click the user The Edit User XXX dialog appears where XXX is the user name Make all necessary changes to the information shown To change the password type a new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields If the password field is left blank the password is not changed To change the SNMPv3 access permissions click the SNMPv3 tab and make necessary changes For details see Step 6 of Creating a User Profile on page 120 To change the permissions click the Roles tab and do one of these Select or deselect any role s checkbox To modify the permissions of any role double click the role or highlight it and then click Edit Role See Modifying a Role on page 126 To change the measurement unit for temperature length or pressure click the Preferences tab and select a different option from the drop down list Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface Click OK to save the changes 123 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Deleting a User Profile Delete outdated or redundant user profiles when necessary gt To delete user profiles 1 Choose User Man
485. t be in snapshot mode in order to take snapshots If the webcam is in video mode click Setup in the right pane above the video image to open the Webcam Setup dialog then select the Snapshot radio button 2 Once the snapshot image being taken by the selected webcam is displayed in the right pane click the Store Snapshot to Webcam Storage il icon above the image to take a snapshot Up to ten 10 snapshots can be stored at once on the device 3 Click on the Snapshots icon in the navigation tree to verify that the snapshot is successfully saved and listed on the Snapshots page Managing the Snapshots Saved to PX A maximum of 10 saved snapshots are listed and displayed on the Snapshots page of the PX The Snapshots page is split into three sections Storage Snapshot and Details e Storage shows a list of all saved snapshots On the top of the Storage section it indicates the total number of saved snapshots Used and the maximum number of snapshots allowed Size in storage e Snapshot displays the image of the snapshot being selected e Details shows the information which had been entered when the snapshot was saved gt To view the saved snapshots 1 Inthe navigation tree click Snapshot under the Webcam Management folder The snapshots are displayed in the right pane in the Storage section of the page 2 View an individual snapshot by clicking on a snapshot file in the Storage section of the page SE Raritan
486. t breaker you can either follow the instructions below or those described in the section Setting a Circuit Breaker s Thresholds on page 176 gt To configure thresholds deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout for multiple circuit breakers 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click the Overcurrent Protectors folder The Overcurrent Protectors page opens 3 Click Bulk Setup The Overcurrent Protector Threshold Bulk Setup dialog appears with a list of all circuit breakers 4 Select desired circuit breakers by having their corresponding checkboxes selected To select all circuit breakers select the checkbox labeled Sensor in the header row and all checkboxes are selected 177 178 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface To select partial circuit breakers select the corresponding checkboxes of those circuit breakers by clicking on their checkboxes To deselect any circuit breaker just click on the checkbox once again Click Edit Thresholds The threshold bulk setup dialog appears Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the
487. t tag to the IT device and connect this asset tag to the AMS M2 Z by plugging the tag connector into the tag port on the AMS M2 Z See Connecting Asset Sensors to the PX on page 49 for details 3 If necessary daisy chain multiple AMS M2 Z to track more than two IT devices via this PX a Verify that the Category 5e 6 cable length is within the limitation See AMS M2 Z Daisy Chain Limitations on page 55 for the cable length limitations b Connect one end of the Category 5e 6 cable to the RJ 45 connector labeled Output on the AMS M2 Z being connected to the PX S Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment c Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ 45 connector labeled Input on another AMS M2 Z d Repeat the above steps to daisy chain additional AMS M2 Z See AMS M2 Z Daisy Chain Limitations on page 55 for the maximum number of AMS M2 Z asset sensors supported in the chain e Itis highly recommended using the cable ties to help hold the weight of all connecting cables 4 Repeat Step 2 to connect IT devices to the other AMS M2 Z s in the chain via the asset tags AMS M2 Z Daisy Chain Limitations There are some limitations when daisy chaining the AMS M2 Z asset sensors The limitations vary according to the Raritan product model connected to the first AMS M2 Z Models Daisy chain limitations All PDUs e Upto 2 AMS M2 Z can be daisy chained whose The maximum cable length between
488. t the outlet switching function does not have the privilege switchOutlet Privilege adminPrivilege changeAssetStripConfiguration changeAuthSettings changeDataTimeSettings changeEventSetup changeExternalSensorsConfiguration changeLhxConfiguration changeNetworkSettings changePassword changePduConfiguration changeStsConfiguration changeSecuritySettings changeSnmpSettings Description Administrator Privileges Change Asset Strip Configuration Change Authentication Settings Change Date Time Settings Change Event Settings Change External Sensors Configuration Change LHX Configuration Change Network Settings Change Own Password Change Pdu Inlet Outlet amp Overcurrent Protector Configuration Change STS Configuration Change Security Settings Change SNMP Settings S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Privilege Description changeUserSettings Change Local User Management changeWebcamSettings Change Webcam Configuration clearLog Clear Local Event Log firmwareUpdate Firmware Update performReset Reset Warm Start switchOutlet Switch Outlet viewEventSetup View Event Settings viewLog View Local Event Log viewSecuritySettings View Security Settings viewSnmpSettings viewUserSettings View SNMP Settings View Local User Management viewWebcamSettings View Webcam Snapshots and Configuration The switchOutlet privilege requires an argument that is separated with a c
489. t the same time S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker to 16A It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor ocp 3 current upperCritical 16 Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker config sensor ocp 3 current upperWarning enable zie Raritan a Chapter 8 Using the Command
490. t topic click the Next icon in the toolbar To view the previous topic click the Previous icon O To view the first topic click the Home icon fat To expand or collapse a topic that contains sub topics do the following To expand any topic click the white arrow b prior to the topic or double click that topic The arrow turns into a black gradient arrow 4 and sub topics appear below the topic To collapse any expanded topic click the black gradient arrow 4 prior to the topic or double click the expanded topic The arrow then turns into a white arrow P and all sub topics below that topic disappear To search for specific information type the key word s or string s in the Search text box and press Enter or click the Search icon 2 to start the search f necessary select the Match partial words checkbox to include information matching part of the words entered in the Search text box The search results are displayed in the left pane To have the left pane show the list of topics click the Contents tab at the bottom To show the Index page click the Index tab To email any URL link to the currently selected topic to any person click the Email this page icon Us in the toolbar To email your comments or suggestions regarding the user guide to Raritan click the Send feedback icon 99 10 To print the currently selected topic click the Print this page icon B S Raritan Chapter 7
491. t whose pole sensors you want to configure e lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time 387 388 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command disables the Upper Critical threshold for the pole 3 L3 L1 voltage of the inlet 1 config sensor inletpole 1 L3 voltage upperCritical disable Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an inlet pole config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt
492. tails to the end of the command show user lt user_name gt details Variables e user name is the name of the user whose profile you want to query The variable can be one of the options all or a user s name Option Description all This option shows all existing user profiles Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data a specific user s name This option shows the profile of the specified user only Displayed information e Without the parameter details only four pieces of user information are displayed user name enabled status SNMP v3 access privilege and role s e With the parameter details more user information is displayed such as the telephone number e mail address preferred measurement units and so on zie Raritan on Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Existing Roles This command shows the data of one or all existing roles ia show roles lt role_name gt Variables e role name is the name of the role whose permissions you want to query The variable can be one of the following options Option Description all This option shows all existing roles Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data a specific role s name This option shows the data of the specified role only Displayed information e Role settings are displayed including the role descriptio
493. tatus of the outlet Control Turn outlets on or off or cycle their power Association The ports associated with the outlet zie Raritan Appendix E Integration Initially when you open the Powerstrip page the power strips that are currently connected to the KSX Il are displayed in the Powerstrip drop down Additionally information relating to the currently selected power strip is displayed If no power strips are connected to the KSX Il a message stating No powerstrips found will be displayed in the Powerstrip Device section of the page Home gt Powerstrip Operation completed successfully Powerstrip Device Powerstrip Yk power v Refresh Name Model Temperature Current amp mps Max amp mps Voltage Powerlnatt Powerln v rk power PCRS 29 C oA 0A 18V 3w OVA VS eee Name State Control Associations Outlet 1 on o on _tyele Dominion Port9 Outlet 2 on On of cete Outlet 3 on on ofr cycle Outlet 4 on On oft _Cyete Outlet 5 on on orr cycle Dominion_Port2 out z won on eee Outlet 7 on On ofr Cycle a Outlet 8 on On oft cycie f ot mta MON a P S m nins ow Pi d Y P Mina n a a aae n a wa nod Nh ban een Configuring KSX II Ports The Port Configuration page displays a list of the KSX II ports Ports connected to KVM target servers blades and standard servers and rack PDUs power strips are displayed in blue and can be edited
494. tep B Configure User Groups on the AD Server zie Raritan You must create the groups for the PX on the AD server and then make appropriate users members of these groups In this illustration we assume e The groups for the PX are named PX Admin and PX User e User accounts pxuser pxuser2 usera and userb already exist on the AD server gt To configure the user groups on the AD server 1 On the AD server create new groups PX Admin and PX User Note See the documentation or online help accompanying Microsoft AD for detailed instructions Add the pxuser2 and usera accounts to the PX User group Add the pxuser and userb accounts to the PX Admin group Verify whether each group comprises correct users PX Admin Properties X General Members Member ot Managed By Members pxuser techadssl com Users i userb techadssl com ServicesApps raritan General Members Member Of Managed By Members Active Directory Folder pxuser2 techadssl com Users techadssl cam ServicesApps rariten 471 472 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the PX Device You must enable and set up LDAP authentication properly on the PX device to use external authentication In the illustration we assume The DNS server settings have been configured properly See Modifying the Network Settings on page 101 and Role of a DNS Server on page 105 The
495. th 434 Setting the Initialization Delay 164 310 Setting the Inlet Pole s Assertion Timeout 393 Setting the Inlet Pole s Deassertion Hysteresis 391 Setting the Inlet s Assertion Timeout 386 Setting the Inlet s Deassertion Hysteresis 385 Setting the Inlet s Lower Critical Threshold e 383 Setting the Inlet s Lower Warning Threshold 384 Setting the Inlet s Upper Critical Threshold 381 Setting the Inlet s Upper Warning Threshold 382 Setting the Inner Authentication 318 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay 165 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay Time 309 Setting the IPv4 Address 323 Setting the IPv4 Configuration Mode 322 Setting the IPv4 Gateway 324 Setting the IPv4 Preferred Host Name 323 Setting the IPv4 Primary DNS Server 325 Setting the IPv4 Secondary DNS Server 325 Setting the IPv4 Subnet Mask 324 Setting the IPv6 Address 328 Setting the IPv6 Configuration Mode 326 Setting the IPv6 Gateway 328 Setting the IPv6 Preferred Host Name 327 Setting the IPv6 Primary DNS Server 329 Setting the IPv6 Secondary DNS Server 329 Setting the LAN Interface Parameters 330 Setting the LED Operation Mode 431 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 396 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole 389 511 Index Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 397 Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole 390 Setting
496. th this software you can e Do bulk configuration for multiple PDUs e Name outlets on different PDUs e Switch on off outlets on outlet switching capable PDUs For more information on Power IQ see either of the following e Power IQ User Guide Available on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section http www raritan com support firmware and documentation e Power IQ Online Help Available on the Product Online Help section http www raritan com support online help Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management Once Power IQ is configured add Raritan PX or other PDUs to its management Power IQ can then gather data from these PDUs You can also add PDUs to Power IQ by uploading a CSV file containing the information See Adding PDUs in Bulk with CSV Files in the Power IQ User Guide Use this procedure to add a Raritan EMX to Power IQ gt To add PDUs to Power IQ management 1 Inthe PDUs tab click Add 2 Enter the IP address of the PDU zie Raritan ids Raritan Appendix E Integration If the PDU is in a daisy chained configuration or console server configuration enter the PDU s position number in the chain or serial port number in the Proxy Index field You can also specify branch circuit monitors using the Proxy Index field See Adding Veris Branch Circuit Monitors with Acquisuite Note If the PDU is not in this type of configuration leave the Proxy Index field blank Enter an asset tag numbe
497. the data you entered in the fields of First and Second Time Server will be overridden 5 Click OK to save the changes Important If you are using Raritan s Power IQ to manage the PX you must configure Power IQ and the PX to have the same date time or NTP settings How to Use the Calendar The calendar icon L3 next to the Date field is a convenient tool to quickly change the year month and date 1999 12 31 M X 1045 ap F s 27 28 22 30 1 2 3 4 5 HR 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 INA JL A Today gt To select a date using the calendar 1 To change the year shown in the calendar do either of the following Press Citrl Up arrow or Ctrl Down arrow to switch between years zie Raritan e 112 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Click M which is adjacent to the year to show a list of years and months Select the desired year from the list to the right and click OK If the list does not show the desired year click 4 or to show additional years Jan DE 4 gt Feb Aug 2005 2010 Mar Sep 2006 2011 Apr Oct 2007 2012 May Nov 2008 2013 Jun Dec 2009 2014 Cancel 2 Tochange the month shown in the calendar do one of the following Press Ctrl Right arrow or Ctrl Left arrow to switch between months Click Bll or E on the top of the calendar to switch between months Click M which is adjacent to the year to show
498. the end of each wire of discrete detectors switches 2 Press and hold down the tiny rectangular buttons above the termination points on the body of DPX CC2 TR Note Each button controls the spring of each corresponding termination point 3 Fully insert each wire of both detectors switches into each termination point Plug both wires of a detector switch into the two termination points to the left Plug both wires of the other detector switch into the two termination points to the right 4 Release the tiny rectangular buttons after inserting the wires properly Verify that these wires are firmly fastened If the detector switch plugged into the contact closure sensor is Raritan s floor water sensor verify that the total cable length from the port of the PX to the water detector does not exceed 30 meters 100 feet 37 38 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment Connecting Detectors Switches to New DPX CC2 TR Like the old DPX CC2 TR a new DPX CC2 TR unit also provides two channels for connecting two discrete on off detectors switches Four termination points are also available on this new sensor the two to the right are associated with one channel as indicated by the LED number and the two to the left are associated with the other If the detector switch plugged into the contact closure sensor is Raritan s floor water sensor verify that the total cable length from the port of the PX to the water detecto
499. the heat exchanger in the Name field The customized LHX heat exchanger s name is followed by the device type in parentheses 5 Enter the air outlet s temperature set point in the Setpoint Air Outlet C field Enter the default fan speed in the Default Fan Speed 9 field Click OK Configuring Temperature and Fan Thresholds An LHX heat exchanger is implemented with various sensors for detecting the air temperature water temperature and fan speed You can set thresholds for these sensors so that the PX alerts you when any sensor readings are getting close to a critical condition These settings are stored on the PX port where the heat exchanger is connected and are lost if that heat exchanger is moved to a different port gt To configure the thresholds for a sensor 1 Connect the LHX heat exchanger to PX if it is not already connected 2 Ifthe Feature Port folder is not expanded expand it to show the device under the Feature Port folder 3 Click the LHX heat exchanger in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that device opens in the right pane 4 Select the desired sensor in the Sensors table and click Setup Thresholds or simply double click that sensor The setup dialog for the selected sensor appears 5 Adjust the threshold and deassertion hysteresis settings The Upper Critical and Lower Critical values are points at which the PX considers the operating environment critical and outside the range of th
500. ther than the show and configuration commands e Y applicable e N NOT applicable zie Raritan din Appendix F Additional PX Information CLI commands clear eventlog factorydefaults All power outlets commands All reset pdu commands nslookup lt host gt netstat lt option gt ping lt host gt traceroute lt host gt PX2 3k PX2 4k PX2 5k Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Truncated Data in the Web Interface 504 Some fields of the PX web interface can accommodate data entry up to 256 characters When the data entered is too long it may be truncated due to some or all of the following factors e Screen resolution e Font size e Font type e Size of different characters Current web browser technology cannot break or wrap these fields with long inputs The solution for this issue includes e Increase of the screen resolution e Application of smaller font size e Use of other interfaces such as the CLI or SNMP to view the data in these fields Reserving IP Addresses in Windows DHCP Servers The PX uses its serial number as the client identifier in the DHCP request Therefore to successfully reserve an IP address for the PX in a Windows DHCP server use the PX device s serial number as the unique ID instead of the MAC address Convert the serial number into ASCII codes for the IP address reservation entry For example if the PX device s serial number is PEG1A0003 use the serial
501. tion2 gt is one of the options meter or feet Option Description meter This option displays the length or height in meters feet This option displays the length or height in feet 413 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface gt To set the preferred pressure unit config user modify lt name gt preferredPressureUnit lt option3 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option3 is one of the options pascal or psi Option Description pascal This option displays the pressure value in Pascals Pa psi This option displays the pressure value in psi Example The following command sets all measurement unit preferences for the user May config f user modify May preferredTemperatureUnit F preferredLengthUnit feet preferredPressureUnit psi Results e The preferred temperature unit is set to Fahrenheit e The preferred length unit is set to feet e The preferred pressure unit is set to psi Deleting a User Profile This command syntax deletes an existing user profile config user delete lt name gt Example The following command deletes the user profile May config user delete May id Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing Your Own Password Every user can change their own password via this command syntax if they have the Change Own Password privilege Note that this command does not begin with user config
502. tional on page 58 gt Toconfigure a webcam 1 In the navigation tree click on the Webcam Management folder The Webcam Management page opens 2 Click on the webcam you want to configure and then click Setup at the bottom right of page The Webcam Setup dialog opens Enter a name for the webcam Up to 64 characters are supported Select a resolution for the webcam Select the webcam mode This can be changed as needed once the webcam is configured a Video the webcam is in video mode Set the Framerate frames per second rate S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface b Snapshot the webcam displays images from the webcam Set the Time Between Image s rate as measured in seconds Click OK The image or video from the webcam is now available in the PX once you click on the webcam in the navigation tree To edit a webcam configuration In the navigation tree click on the Webcam Management folder The Webcam Management page opens Double click on the webcam you want to edit The webcam image or video opens in a new tab Click Setup Edit the information as needed Changes to the resolution do not apply to existing stored images it applies only to images and videos taken after the resolution is changed Click OK Adjusting Snapshot or Video Properties If any snapshot or video properties such as the brightness contrast saturation and gain settings do not satisfy your ne
503. tions between the devices and due to additional network traffic created should the initial communication fail and another is sent Use SNMP TRAP rules if you do not need confirmation that the communication has succeeded and if you need to conserve network resources Use SNMP INFORM communications to ensure more reliable communications and if network resources can be managed with the potential additional network traffic Note You should update the MIB used by your SNMP manager when updating to a new PX release This ensures your SNMP manager has the correct MIB for the release you are using See Downloading SNMP MIB on page 270 zie Raritan ix Chapter 7 Using SNMP SNMPv2c Notifications gt To configure the PX to send SNMP notifications 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings Ix General Notifications SNMP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 v2c 7 enable Read Community String pubic Write Community String SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 F enable MIB II System Group sysContact i sysName sysLocation Download MB OK Cancel 2 Enter the MIB II system group information if applicable a sysContact the contact person in charge of the system being contacted b sysName the name assigned to the system Cc SysLocation the location of the system 3 Select the MIB to be downloaded The SNMP MI
504. tiple or all outlets or cycle their power 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Select the outlets whose power states you want to change and ensure their checkboxes are all selected To select all outlets select the top checkbox in the header row To select multiple outlets select the checkbox of each desired outlet one by one To select a single outlet select that outlet s checkbox 4 Click On Off or Cycle m Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 5 Adialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and all outlets Switch ON OFF or cycle their power 42 Outlet State Change Do you really want to switch on all outlets Yes No Switching an Outlet This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs You can turn on or off or power cycle any outlet regardless of the outlet s current state Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on There are different ways to turn an outlet on or off or cycle its power gt To control an outlet with a particular outlet icon selected 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all o
505. tna dern 15 Contouring TAC PK C m 16 Connecting the PX to a Gombpllet cecidere iesaista niaaa 17 Installing the USB to Serial Driver Optional sees 18 Connecting the PX to Your NOtWO K tree danse tear ee saepe erae e uo fovea 20 Initial Network GonfIQUFatlOri cs oae retenir ree ends eec eti iu ka nore E deua 22 Cascading the PX vla USB occu onte rr et e prse ntr eh de feste pa aka pde Fete E ax du EN nica 29 Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional sssseeee 31 Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 33 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional sse 33 Contact CloSUre SeFrlSOfS ccs nr ipae suede cun Lagar aor ad anisina detaan inaya tanie dcr Cadre Ra nho 35 Floor Walter SelnsO s xui edi en ptt e tI Rl tesi ure Ee SERA aspi ku La ER ERN a SEDE R UR Ce dU RR Rue DRKU E decus 43 Differential Air Pressure Sensors ssssssssssssssssese entree nennen nnne nns 46 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional ssssseee 47 Combining Asset Sensors tert ue rado a bo dades te eder reda EANA dared taaeee 47 Connecting Asset Sensors to the PX essssssssssssesene rennen tnnt tnnt 49 Connecting Blade Extension StIlps entere n ith eden i Extend dene duda eina 51 Connecting AMS M2 Z Asset Sensors Optional 54 USING ED PeE 56 Connecting a Logitech Webcam
506. to indicate the end of the content c Press Enter again If the content is successfully entered the CLI displays this message Successfully entered Restricted Service Agreement followed by the total number of entered characters in parentheses Note The new content of Restricted Service Agreement is saved only after typing the app1y command See Quitting the Configuration Mode on page 436 Example The following example illustrates how to specify the content of the Restricted Service Agreement 1 Type the following command and press Enter to start entering the content config f security restrictedServiceAgreement bannerContent 2 Typethe following content when the CLI prompts you to enter the content IMPORTANT You are accessing a PDU If you are not the system administrator do NOT power off or power cycle any outlet without the permission of the system administrator Press Enter Type the following END Press Enter again Verify that the message Successfully entered Restricted Service Agreement is displayed indicating that the content input is successful 351 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface HTTPS Access This command determines whether the HTTPS access to the PX web interface is forced If yes all HTTP access attempts are automatically directed to HTTPS config security enforceHttpsForWebAccess lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disab
507. to the Y coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 ylabel The 4th row S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Z Coordinate This command syntax specifies the Z coordinate of an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt zlabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e Depending on the Z coordinate format you set there are two types of values for the coordinate variable Type Description Free form coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Rack units coordinate is an integer number in rack units Note To specify the Z coordinate using the rack units See Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors on page 312 Example The following command sets the value The 5th rack to the Z coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 after the Z coordinate s format is set to freeForm config externalsensor 4 zlabel The 5th rack 373 374 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Sensor Description This command syntax provides a description for a specific environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt description
508. ts a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 2 to 40 degrees Celsius It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor externalsensor 2 temperature upperCritical 40 Setting the Sensor s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of a numeric environmental sensor xternalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and lt sensortype gt is the correct sensor type e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor S Raritan config sensor
509. ts factory default values using this button when a local connection is available See Resetting to Factory Defaults on page 467 Without the serial connection pressing this reset button restarts the PX device s software without any loss of power to outlets The following images indicate the locations of the reset button on OU 1U and 2U models suena ves naO A rones a inore AN o M PB ILI estes E ms a o e m EIL 0 neat S Raritan Circuit Breakers Raritan Chapter 5 Using the PDU The PX models rated over 20A North American or 16A international contain branch circuit breakers These circuit breakers automatically trip disconnect power when the current flowing through the circuit breaker exceeds its rating If the circuit breaker switches off power the LED display shows e CbE which means circuit breaker error in the three digit row e The lowest outlet number affected by the circuit breaker error in the two digit row You are still able to switch between outlets on the LED display when the circuit breaker error occurs Outlets affected by the error show CbE Unaffected outlets show the current and voltage readings as described in Manual Mode on page 69 When a circuit breaker trips power flow ceases to all outlets connected to it You must manually reset the circuit breaker so that affected outlets can resume normal operation Depending on the model you purchased the circu
510. ts traffic from the specified IP address es Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Example The following command modifies all contents of the 5th IPv4 rule config security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule modify 5 ipMask 192 168 84 123 24 policy accept Results e ThelPv4 address is changed to 192 168 84 123 and the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 e The policy now becomes accept Deleting a Firewall Rule The following commands remove a specific IPv4 or IPv6 rule from the list e Pv4 commands config security ipAccessControl ipv4 rule delete lt rule_number gt e Pv6 commands config security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule delete rule number Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to remove Example The following command removes the 5th rule from the IPv6 access control list config f security ipAccessControl ipv6 rule delete 5 zie Raritan n Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Restricted Service Agreement The CLI command used to set the Restricted Service Agreement feature begin with security restrictedServiceAgreement Enabling or Disabling the Restricted Servic
511. tsOUyf6BpmiJYktU w4NG67ULaNAB5CnE L g c z7k57s903YY3LecETgQ5iQHmkwlYDTL2fTgVfw0CAQOjgaswgag wZAYDVROZAQH BFOwWDBWMFQxCzZAJBGNVBAYTALVTMTYwNAYDVQ OKEylOYXRpb25hbCBBZXJvbmFldGljcyBhbmQgU3BhY2UgOWRta W5pc3RyYXRpb24xDTALBgNVBAMTBENSTDEwFwYDVROBAQH BAOw C4AJODMy OT cwODEWMBgGA1UdAgQRMA8ECTgzMjk3MDgyM4ACBSA wDQYDVROKBAYwBAMCBkAwCwYJKoZIhvcNAQEEAA4GBAH2ylVCEw A4zaXzSYZJTTUi3uawbbFiS2yxHvgf284 8Js0OHXk1H1w2d6qOH H21X82tZXd 0JtGO0glT9usFFBDvYK800ebgz P5ELJnBL2 atOb EuJylZZOpBDWINR3WkDNLCGiTkCKpOF5EWIrVDwh54NNevkCORZ ita z4IBO Paste the contents in the terminal Press Enter Verify whether the system shows the following command prompt indicating the provided CA certificate is valid Raritan 20 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 322 config Setting the BSSID This command syntax specifies the BSSID config network wireless BSSID lt bssid gt Variables e bssid is either the MAC address of the wireless access point or none if the access point has no MAC address Example The following command specifies that the BSSID is 00 14 6C 7E 43 81 config network wireless BSSID 00 14 6C 7E 43 81 Configuring the IPv4 Parameters An IPv4 configuration command begins with network ipv4 The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Setting the IPv4 Configuration Mode This command syntax determines
512. ttings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears Type an integer number in the Altitude field Depending on the measurement unit displayed the range of valid numbers differs For meters m the value ranges between 0 and 3000 For feet ft the value ranges between 0 and 9842 Click OK to save the changes 115 116 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Setting Data Logging The PX can store 120 measurements for each sensor in a memory buffer This memory buffer is known as the data log Sensor readings in the data log can be retrieved using SNMP You can configure how often measurements are written into the data log using the Measurements Per Log Entry field Since the PX s internal sensors are measured every second specifying a value of 60 for example would cause measurements to be written to the data log once every minute Since there are 120 measurements of storage per sensor specifying a value of 60 means the log can store the last two hours of measurements before the oldest one in log gets overwritten Whenever measurements are written to the log three values for each sensor are written the average minimum and maximum values For example if measurements are written every minute the average of all measurements that occurred during the preceding 60 seconds along with the minimum and maximum measurement values are written to the log Note The PX s SNMP agent must be enabled for this feature to work See Enabling SN
513. two ends of the clip into the tiny holes Zero U models 1U 2U models wa Connect the power cord to the inlet and press the clip toward the power cord until it holds the cord firmly Zero U models 1U 2U models hen a Connecting the PDU to a Power Source zie Raritan 1 Verify that all circuit breakers on the PX device are set to ON If not turn them ON For a PDU with fuses ensure that all fuses are inserted and seated properly If there are any fuse covers ensure that they are closed Note Not all PX devices have overcurrent protection mechanisms Connect each PX device to an appropriately rated branch circuit See the label or nameplate affixed to your PX device for appropriate input ratings or range of ratings Note When a PX device powers up it proceeds with the power on self test and software loading for a few moments At this time the outlet LEDs cycle through different colors Note Outlet LEDs are only available on an outlet switching capable PDU 15 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 16 3 Configuring the PX When the software has completed loading the outlet LEDs show a steady color and the LED display illuminates There are two ways to initially configure a PX device Connect the PX device to a computer to configure it using a serial or USB connection between the PX and the computer The computer must have a communications program such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY For
514. u entered in a specific field is invalid a red warning icon appears to the right and the field in question is surrounded by a red frame as shown in this illustration helo ee D When this occurs position your mouse pointer over the warning icon to view the reason and modify the entered value accordingly S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading When a numeric sensor s reading crosses any upper or lower threshold the background color of the whole row turns to yellow or red for alerting users For a discrete on off sensor the row changes the background color when the sensor enters the abnormal state If any circuit breaker trips the circuit breaker s row is also highlighted in red See the table for the meaning of each color Color State White The background is white in one of the following scenarios e For a numeric sensor no thresholds have been enabled e f any thresholds have been enabled for a numeric sensor the sensor reading is between the lower and upper warning thresholds e Fora discrete on off sensor the sensor state is normal e The sensor reading or state is unavailable Yellow The reading drops below the lower warning threshold or rises above the upper warning threshold Red The meaning of the red color varies depending on the sensor type e For a numeric sensor this color indicates the reading drops below the lower critical threshold or r
515. ules to determine what actions are taken to respond to specific events By default the PX provides two built in event rules System Event Log Rule and System SNMP Notification Action If the built in rules do not satisfy your needs create new ones gt To create event rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears On the Rules tab click New In the Rule name field type a new name for identifying the rule The default name is New Rule number where number is a sequential number Select the Enable checkbox to enable the SNMP notification feature Click Event to select an event for which you want to trigger an action A pull down menu showing various types of events appears Select the desired event type from the pull down menu and if a submenu appears continue the navigation until the desired event is selected Note The option Any sub event gt refers to all events items listed on the same submenu Any slot refers to all slots Any server refers to all servers and Any user refers to all users 6 According to the event you selected in the previous step the Trigger condition field containing three radio buttons may or may not appear S Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Event types Radio buttons Numeric sensor Available radio buttons include Asserted threshold crossing Deasserted and Both events or the Asserted The
516. ur choice in the previous step Introduction to the Web Interface The web interface provides two panes a menu bar a status bar an Add Page icon and a logout button throughout every page Roritan Dominion PX rm Qo o lam mupti Drees fetes to Mantinae ors Deena PX Lepore mr nman 6 D B d vette a Em fX raiz insi one Gone Otit ate on deere bartu ks iom e Otit ritui cely cn Beste datus Js LI Pomer Off perot Aang Dower Crue we D toes tt krun Gar Desr 200 es o 5 eec Ganges Etema prat Z coocrate forat tad unts si iem ansie ud Firet vesir 2 343950 e MAC Atenes mesen mrs Kang 3t0415N MA 15 0 11 Sova Seitoee e e m D tht wegoerce Dene ined Shed bond Shoting Deci Mov ata Octieess tone ucs Used Decon Ses bees Comm o J swPFxilgbbA amp l t Acetum eame D Lanie VU 622 au Qe snd toe ae Number Web interface element 1 Menus Dominion PX Explorer pane Setup button o Status bar e Add Page icon Logout button zie Raritan B Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface Number Web interface element Data pane The Setup button is not available on some pages such as the Dashboard page For detailed information about these web interface elements see the sections that follow Menus There is a menu bar across the top of the page You can click any menu to select the desired menu item from the drop down list Four menus are available for managing different tasks or showing information e U
517. use the show commands to view current settings or status of the PX device or part of it such as the IP address networking mode firmware version states or readings of internal or external sensors user profiles and so on Some show commands have two formats one with the parameter details and the other without The difference is that the command without the parameter details displays a shortened version of information while the other displays in depth information After typing a show command press Enter to execute it Note Depending on your login name the prompt may be replaced by the gt prompt See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 Network Configuration This command shows all network configuration such as the IP address networking mode and MAC address show network IP Configuration This command shows the IP related configuration only such as IPv4 and IPv6 configuration address es gateway and subnet mask show network ip lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options all v4 or v6 Option Description all This options shows both of IPv4 and IPv6 settings Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data v4 This option shows the IPv4 settings only v6 This option shows the IPv6 settings only 279 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface 280 LAN Interface Settings This command shows the LAN interface inform
518. user declines the agreement they cannot log in An event notifying you if a user has accepted or declined the agreement can be created See Default Log Messages on page 198 gt To enable the service agreement 1 Click Device Services Security Restricted Service Agreement Banner The Restricted Service Agreement Setup dialog opens Select the Enforce Restricted Service Agreement checkbox Edit the text or replace it as needed Click OK Restricted Service Agreement Setup E E Enforce Restricted Service Agreement Unauthorized access prohibited all access and activities not explicitly authorized by management are unauthorized All activiteise are monitored and logged There is no privacy on this system Unauthorized access and activities or any criminal activity will be reported to appropriate authorities zie Raritan oa Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface If the Restricted Service Agreement feature is enabled the Restricted Service Agreement is displayed when any user logs in to the PX Do either of the following or you cannot successfully log in to the PX e Inthe web interface select the checkbox labeled understand and accept the Restricted Service Agreement e Inthe CLI type y when the confirmation message I understand and accept the Restricted Service Agreement is displayed Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules Role based access control rules are similar to firewall ru
519. ust perform this operation in the administrator mode See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 276 Turning On the Outlet s This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This command syntax turns on one or multiple outlets power outlets lt numbers gt on To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the end of the command which confirms the operation power outlets numbers on y Variables e numbers is one ofthe options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Switches ON all outlets A specific outlet Switches ON the specified outlet number A comma Switches ON multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets piieis For example to specify 7 outlets 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 A range of Switches ON multiple consecutive outlets outlets with an amdash m For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 between 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation Example The following command turns on all outlets power outlets all on Turning Off the Outlet s This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs This
520. ut adding this option all to get the same data A specific circuit Displays the information for the specified circuit breaker number breaker only Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the circuit breaker status and name are displayed e With the parameter details more circuit breaker information is displayed in addition to status such as the rating and RMS current value Date and Time Settings This command shows the current date and time settings on the PX device D show time To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show time details S Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Default Measurement Units This command shows the default measurement units applied to the PX web and CLI interfaces across all users especially those users authenticated through remote authentication servers show user defaultPreferences Note If a user has set his her own preferred measurement units or the administrator has changed any user s preferred units the web and CLI interfaces show the preferred measurement units for that user instead of the default ones after that user logs in to the PX See Existing User Profiles on page 295 for the preferred measurement units for a specific user zie Raritan i Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Environmental Sensor Information This command syntax shows the environme
521. ut of CEN pO 447 About the Interface zie Raritan The PX provides a command line interface that enables data center administrators to perform some basic management tasks Using this interface you can do the following e Reset the PX device e Display the PX and network information such as the device name firmware version IP address and so on e Configure the PX and network settings e Troubleshoot network problems You can access the interface over a local connection using a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or via a Telnet or SSH client such as PuTTY Note Telnet access is disabled by default because it communicates openly and is thus insecure To enable Telnet see Modifying the Network Service Settings on page 105 273 Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Logging in to CLI Logging in via HyperTerminal over a local connection is a little different than logging in using SSH or Telnet If a security login agreement has been enabled you must accept the agreement in order to complete the login Users are authenticated first and the security banner is checked afterwards With HyperTerminal You can use any terminal emulation programs for local access to the command line interface This section illustrates HyperTerminal which is part of Windows operating systems prior to Windows Vista gt To log in using HyperTerminal 1 Connect your computer to the PX device via a local connect
522. utlets See Expanding the Tree on page 83 2 Click the outlet you want in the PX Explorer pane and locate the Control section in the right pane Click On Off or Cycle A dialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and the outlet switches ON OFF or cycles its power 62 Outlet State Change Do you really want to switch off Outlet 1 Yes gt To control an outlet with the Outlets folder icon selected 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 2 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane 159 160 Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 3 Click the outlet you want in the right pane and the corresponding checkbox is selected 4 Click On Off or Cycle A dialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and the outlet switches ON OFF or cycles its power Seiting the Default Outlet State This section only applies to outlet switching capable PDUs Default outlet state determines the initial power state of outlets after the PX device powers up You can set up the default outlet state for all outlets or for a specific outlet Note that the value set for an individual outlet always overrides the value set for all outlets When removing power fr
523. utton iui enel ted n de 467 Using the GLI Command caet corte ott tte dte diet cet eeu 468 Using the Reset Button gt To reset to factory defaults using the reset button 1 Connect a computer to the PX device See Connecting the PX to a Computer on page 17 2 Launch a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Kermit or PuTTY and open a window on the PX For information on the serial port configuration see Step 2 of Initial Network Configuration on page 22 3 Press and release the Reset button of the PX device while pressing the Esc key of the keyboard several times in rapid succession A prompt 2 should appear after about one second Type defaults to reset the PX to its factory defaults Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete zie Raritan v Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults This diagram shows the location of the reset button on Zero U models oe pen MN o On D mae NAT cS x ine Comer nera This diagram shows the location of the reset button on 1U models Roritan nma A A e com maa uee ma 8 o dentis ao DII estes Note HyperTerminal is available on Windows operating systems prior to Windows Vista For Windows Vista or later versions you may use PuTTY which is a free program you can download from the Internet See PuTTY s documentation for details on configuration Using the CLI Command The Command Line Interface CLI pro
524. ve the changes The LDAP server is saved Raritan 473 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 6 Click OK to save the changes The LDAP authentication is activated Note If the PX clock and the LDAP server clock are out of sync the certificates are considered expired and users are unable to authenticate using LDAP To ensure proper synchronization administrators should configure the PX and the LDAP server to use the same NTP server Step D Configure User Groups on the PX Device 474 A role on the PX device determines the system and outlet permissions You must create the roles whose names are identical to the user groups created for the PX on the AD server or authorization will fail Therefore we will create the roles named PX_User and PX_Admin on the PDU In this illustration we assume e Users assigned to the PX User role can neither configure PX nor access the outlets e Users assigned to the PX Admin role have the Administrator permissions so they can both configure PX and access the outlets gt Tocreate the PX User role with appropriate permissions assigned 1 Choose User Management Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Click New The Create New Role dialog appears Type PX User in the Role Name field Type a description for the PX User role in the Description field In this e
525. vePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold of the outlet 5 RMS current config ft sensor outlet 5 current upperWarning enable di SE Raritan Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an outlet config f sensor outlet n sensor type lowerCritical option Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Sensor is
526. vice settings Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt Modbus The Modbus Settings dialog appears Raritan Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 To enable the Modbus access select the Enable Modbus TCP Access checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox 3 To use a different port type a new port number in the field Valid range is 1 to 65535 4 Toenable the Modbus read only mode select the Enable read only mode checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox Enabling Service Advertisement The PX advertises all enabled services that are reachable using the IP network This feature uses DNS SD Domain Name System Service Discovery and mDNS multicast DNS The advertised services are discovered by clients that have implemented DNS SD and mDNS The advertised services include the following e HTTP e HTTPS e Telnet e SSH e Modbus e json rpc e SNMP This feature is enabled by default The service advertisement feature supports both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols If you have set a preferred host name for IPv4 and or IPv6 that host name can be used as the zero configuration local host name that is preferred host name local where preferred host name is the preferred host name you have specified for PX The IPv4 host name is the first priority If an IPv4 host name is not available then use the IPv6 host name Note For information on configuring IPv4 and or IPv6 network settings
527. vides a reset command for restoring the PX to factory defaults For information on CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 273 gt To reset to factory defaults using the CLI command 1 Connect a computer to the PX device See Connecting the PX to a Computer on page 17 2 Launch a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Kermit or PuTTY and open a window on the PX For information on the serial port configuration see Step 2 of Initial Network Configuration on page 22 ue Raritan Raritan Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults Log in to the CLI by typing the user name admin and its password See Step 4 of Initial Network Configuration on page 22 After the system prompt appears type either of the following commands and press Enter reset factorydefaults OR reset factorydefaults y If you entered the command without y in Step 4 a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Type y to confirm the reset Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete gt To reset to factory defaults without logging in to the CLI As of release 2 4 the PX provides an easier way to reset the product to factory defaults in the CLI prior to login 1 Connect a computer to the PX and launch a terminal emulation program as described in the above procedure At the Username prompt in the CLI type factorydefaults and press Enter
528. webcam you can visually monitor environmental conditions near the PX through the web interface from anywhere For more information on the Logitech webcam see the user documentation accompanying it gt Toconnect a webcam 1 Connect the webcam to the USB A port on the PX device The PX automatically detects the webcam SE Raritan Chapter 4 Connecting External Equipment 2 Position the webcam properly Snapshots or videos captured by the webcam are immediately displayed in the PX web interface See Viewing the Webcam Snapshots or Videos on page 243 Connecting a GSM Modem Optional A Cinterion MC52iT or MC55iT GSM modem must be connected to the PX in order to send SMS event messages See Creating Actions on page 181 for more information on SMS event messages Note The PX cannot receive SMS messages gt Toconnect the GSM modem 1 Connect the GSM modem to the DB9 serial port on the PX 2 Configure the GSM modem as needed See the supporting GSM modem help for information on configuring the GSM modem 3 Configure the GSM modem settings in PX a Click Device Settings Serial Port Settings The Serial Port Configuration dialog opens b If needed enter the GSM modem SIM PIN Connecting a Schroff LHX Heat Exchanger Optional zie Raritan To remotely monitor and administer the Schroff LHX 20 or LHX 40 heat exchangers through the PX device you must establish a connection between the heat exchan
529. wer Strip Targets The KX II allows you to connect rack PDUs power strips to KX II ports KX II rack PDU configuration is done from the KX II Port Configuration page Note Raritan recommends no more than eight 8 rack PDUs power strips be connected to a KX II at once since performance may be affected Connecting a Rack PDU Rack PDUs are connected to the KX II using the D2CIM PWR CIM gt Toconnect the rack PDU 1 Connect the male RJ 45 of the D2CIM PWR to the female RJ 45 connector labeled FEATURE of the rack PDU 2 Connect the female RJ 45 connector of the D2CIM PWR to any of the available female system port connectors on the KX II using a straight through Cat5 cable SE Raritan Appendix E Integration 3 Attach an AC power cord to the target server and an available rack PDU outlet Connect the rack PDU to an AC power source Power on the device Tri aaaaaaA 1 vesees sesoses Raritan Naming the Rack PDU in the KX II or LX Port Page for Power Strips Note PX rack PDUSs power strips can be named in the PX as well as in KX Il and LX Once a Raritan remote rack PDU is connected to the KX II or LX it will appear on the Port Configuration page Click on the power port name on that page to access it The Type and the Name fields are prepopulated Note The CIM Type cannot be changed The following information is displayed for each outlet on the rack PDU Outlet Number Name and Port
530. werCaseCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one lowercase character is required disable No lowercase character is required Example This command syntax determines that a password must include at least a lowercase character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneLowerCaseCharacter enable Uppercase Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a uppercase character zie Raritan i Chapter 8 Using the Command Line Interface config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneUpperCaseCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one uppercase character is required disable No uppercase character is required Example This command determines a password must comprise at least one uppercase character config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneUpperCaseCharacter enable Numeric Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a numeric character config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneNumericCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one numeric character is required disable No numeric character is required Examp
531. xample we type The role can only view PX settings to describe the role 5 Click the Privileges tab to select all View XXX permissions where XXX is the name of the setting A View XXX permission lets users view the XXX settings without the capability to configure or change them a Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears b Select a permission beginning with the word View from the Privileges list such as View Event Settings c Click Add S Raritan zie Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration d Repeat Steps a to c to add all permissions beginning with View amp y Create New Role x View Event Settings View Local Event Log View Local User Management View SNMP Settings View Security Settings View Wleheam Imanes and Canfiour hos Add Eait Delete 6 Click OK to save the changes The PX_User role is created 4 Manage Roles IF Role Name Description Admin System defined administrator role including all privileges Predefined operator role The role can only view PX settings New Edit Delete Close 7 Keep the Manage Roles dialog opened to create the PX_Admin role gt To create the PX Admin role with full permissions assigned 1 Click New The Create New Role dialog appears 2 Type PX_Admin in the Role Name field 475 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 3 Type a description for t
532. y each detected environmental sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 83 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 98 Raritan Chapter 6 Using the Web Interface 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane External Sensors le 7 x4 Serial Number Type Channel Name Reading State i 1 PRCO190292 49 Contact On Off 1 On Off 1 normal I 2 PRCO190292 49 Contact On Off 2 On Off 2 normal m 3 AEI7A00022 Temperature Temperature 1 25 6 C normal m 4 AEI7A00022 Humidity Humidity 1 59 96 normal 3 Match the serial number from the tag to those listed in the sensor table Managing Environmental Sensors The PX starts to retrieve an environmental sensor s reading and or state and records the state transitions after the environmental sensor is managed The PX device can manage a maximum of 16 environmental sensors When there are less than 16 managed sensors the PX automatically brings detected environmental sensors under management You should only have to manually manage a sensor when it is not under management gt To manually manage an environmental sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Guía del usuario de HiSeq 2500 - Support  RPS3 25M  V7 Laser Toner for select BROTHER printer - replaces TN4100  air pump 100 air pump 200 air pump 400  Curing Units Curing Units - us dental depot supply miami    Frame It All 300001159 Instructions / Assembly  Sistema de frenos de disco  Pro-Mat-Bario & Pro-Mat-Bario-Max Mattresses  ScanJacket アプリケーション 取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file